JP7376801B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a Pachinko gaming machine that uses game balls as a gaming medium.

Generally, some gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines are equipped with an operation button called a chance button, and the player can change the performance by operating the chance button (paragraph of Patent Document 1). 0012 etc.). Furthermore, some gaming machines allow, for example, player operations to set the environment to adjust the volume of the performance, the amount of light, etc. (paragraph 0246 of Patent Document 1, FIG. 19(b), etc.) .
Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-164587

By the way, in recent gaming machines, a function that utilizes the player's button operations for effects has become indispensable for improving the taste of the game. For this reason, in a gaming machine, it is necessary to determine in more detail the control mode related to button operations and performances so that unexpected operations are not performed due to button operations. Furthermore, since button operations by the player are also performed when setting the environment to adjust the volume and light intensity of the performance, it is desirable to determine appropriate control modes for many situations involving button operations.

The present invention has been made in view of these problems, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine in which button functions related to presentation can be optimized.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention enables a game to be played using a game medium (such as a game ball), and to display a symbol after changing it as a performance related to the game, and then to stop displaying the symbol. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to a player when the symbol is in a predetermined display mode,
A main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main commands, etc.) transmitted from the main control means;
Effect display output means (effect display device, etc.) that outputs an effect display under the control of the sub-control means;
a production sound output means (such as a speaker ) that outputs production sound under the control of the sub-control means;
a first operation means (operation button, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
a second operating means (cross key, etc.) that can be operated by the player and is different from the first operating means;
It is possible to execute an operation performance that can cause a performance display to be executed in response to a player's operation of the first operation means,
The types of operation performances include a single operation performance that can accept a player's operation of the first operation means a single time, and a continuous hit operation performance that can accept a plurality of player operations of the first operation means,
It is possible to perform a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) for encouraging the player to operate the first operation means,
When the player operates the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hit operation performance, it is possible to perform a performance display (such as a normal continuous hit performance) in accordance with the player's operation of the first operating means a plurality of times. can be,
Even if the player does not operate the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hit operation performance, the player may operate the first operating means a single time for a predetermined period of time or more (such as a time exceeding 0.5 seconds or more). ) If the player continues to operate the first operating means, it is deemed that the player has operated the first operating means multiple times, and if a single player's operation of the first operating means continues for a predetermined period of time or longer. It is possible to display effects according to what is being performed (such as automatic continuous hit effects),
The volume level of the performance sound can be adjusted in response to a player's operation of the second operation means,
When adjusting the volume level of the performance sound , it is possible to display the volume level so that the player can understand the current volume level of the performance sound ,
In the continuous hit operation performance, when a single player operation of the first operating means is performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, it is deemed that the player has operated the first operating means multiple times. , in a situation where an effect display is being executed in response to a single player's operation of the first operating means being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, the player's operation of the second operating means is triggered. The volume level of the performance sound can be adjusted, and the volume level display is displayed in parallel with the performance display in response to a single player operation of the first operating means being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more. is feasible and
While the volume level display is being executed, an effect display is executed in response to a single player operation of the first operation means being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, so that both displays can be executed at the same time. can be,
By executing the volume level display during execution of the effect display in response to a single player operation of the first operation means being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, both displays can be executed at the same time. can be,
The volume level display has a higher display priority than the effect display in response to a single player operation of the first operation means being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more,
The volume level display switches from non-execution to execution when the second operation means is operated by the player during the variable display of the symbols;
If a specific period of time has elapsed after the execution of the volume level display started during symbol fluctuation, the volume level display will not be executed. However, if the player operates the second operating means before the specific time elapses, the The specific time is set again,
The specific time is the first operation that is set in the predetermined continuous-hit operation performance capable of executing a performance display in response to a single player operation of the first operation means being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more. shorter than the operational validity period of the means;
In a situation where the volume level display is being performed, even if the player continues to operate the second operation means a single time, the volume level will only change by one level;
If the player has continuously operated the second operating means a single time since before the power was turned on, the state of the signal indicating the player's operation of the second operating means continues after the power is turned on. The volume will not change depending on the situation,
Even if an effect display is executed in response to a single player operation of the first operating means being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more in a situation where the volume level display is executed first, the volume level The display can be executed continuously without ending.
A predetermined standby effect can be executed in a game standby state after the symbol fluctuation has stopped, and even while the predetermined standby effect is being executed, the volume level display and the volume can be executed by operating the second operating means. While the level can be adjusted, the predetermined standby effect does not end even if the operation is performed, and the volume level display has a higher display priority than the predetermined standby effect,
It has a starting winning hole into which game media can enter, and is configured to be able to display symbols in a variable manner when the gaming medium enters the starting winning hole,
The states related to the ease of entering the ball into the starting winning hole include a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ease of entering the ball into the starting winning hole is higher than the normal gaming state,
During the specific game state, it is possible to execute a firing instruction performance that instructs firing of the game medium in a predetermined direction;
During the specific game state, the predetermined standby performance and the firing instruction performance can be executed simultaneously, but the firing instruction performance has a higher display priority than the predetermined standby performance.
This gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which button functions related to presentation can be optimized.

1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a back view of the Pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing the functions of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the main board configuration of the Pachinko gaming machine. (a) is a front view showing the board case in a state in which the main board is accommodated, and (b) is a partial sectional view schematically showing a portion along line AA in (a). FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing basic functional means of a main board, a sub-main board, and a sub-sub board. It is an explanatory view showing a main pattern display board of a main control display device. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display while the performance symbols are changing on the performance display device, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display when the performance symbols are stopped. (a) is a chart showing a success/failure judgment table, and (b) is a chart showing a variation pattern table for failure. (a) is a chart showing the jackpot symbol determination table for the first lottery, (b) is a chart showing the jackpot symbol determination table for the second lottery, and (c) is a diagram showing the small hit symbol determination table used for the small win. The chart (d) is a chart showing a losing symbol determination table used when losing. A chart showing a fluctuation pattern table used in the case of a miss, (b) a chart showing a fluctuation pattern table used in the case of a 15R jackpot, and (c) a chart showing a fluctuation pattern table used in the case of a 5R jackpot. is a chart showing the winning value and ball payout rate for each set value. (a) is a chart showing a pre-reading determination table, and (b) is a chart showing a pre-reading code correspondence table. 3 is a flowchart illustrating power-on processing in the main board. 5 is a flowchart showing initial setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows setting value change processing. It is a flowchart showing game progress interrupt processing on the main board. It is a flowchart which shows lottery determination processing in a main board. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off processing in a main board. (b1) is an explanatory diagram showing the timing of power-on in an example of detecting a button operation that continues from before power-on; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a pulse signal for detecting a button operation when the power is turned on. (a) is a perspective view showing the lever device before the operation button is protruded, (b) is a perspective view showing the lever device with the lever erected and the operation button protruded, and (c) is the lever with the lever tilted. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the device. 3 is a flowchart showing sub-main initial setting processing on the sub-main board. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing on a sub-main board. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in a sub-main board. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot start demonstration screen, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen during a round, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a winning specifying performance screen. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a special performance screen during a win that is different from FIG. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a medium specific performance screen. (a) is a time chart showing an example of the progress of the game during a single-shot operation, (b) is a time chart showing an example of the progress of the game during the normal continuous play operation, and (c) is an example of the progress of the game during the automatic continuous play operation. FIG. (a) is a time chart showing a specific example of how the game progresses during auto-repeating operation, and (b) is a time chart showing an example of how the game progresses when the auto-repeating effective period and button-repeating effective period start at different times. It is a chart. (a) is a time chart showing the relationship between the automatic repeated hit function and the back button performance, and (b) is a time chart showing the relationship between the automatic repeated hit function and the fluctuation notice performance. (a) is a time chart showing the relationship between the automatic repeated hit function and the pending look-ahead performance, and (b) is a time chart showing the relationship between the automatic repeated hit function and button operations that continue from before the button operation valid period. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a button performance before a button is operated, and an explanatory diagram showing an example of a button performance during repeated button presses. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display mode related to the indicator performance, and (b) to (d) are explanatory diagrams sequentially showing how the instruction amount of the indicator performance increases. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the indicator performance during fluctuation, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the volume adjustment performance during the same fluctuation. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a volume adjustment performance, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a light amount adjustment performance. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a volume adjustment performance while fluctuation is stopped, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a light amount adjustment performance while fluctuation is stopped. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the standard timing and auto continuous operation, (b) is an explanatory diagram also showing the relationship between the standard timing and single-shot operation, and (c) is the same as the standard timing and the button from before the standard timing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship with operations. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance when effects are assembled, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance after effects are assembled. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a display when light amount adjustment is performed during execution of an automatic repeated hit effect. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a button hold effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the timing of occurrence of power cutoff and the button effect.

Embodiments of the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below. Here, first, the basic configuration of the Pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment will be explained, and then the game procedure, performance, control mode, etc. in the Pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment will be explained.
<Basic configuration of Pachinko gaming machine>

FIG. 1 shows the front configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment. In the pachinko game machine 10, a game board 50 is attached to a game machine frame 11, which will be described later. Among these, the game board 50 has different components such as accessory equipment and design depending on the model of the Pachinko game machine 10. Furthermore, the game board 50 can be separated from the game machine frame 11 by releasing the electrical connection relationship and structural connection relationship with the game machine frame 11.

In addition, by standardizing the structural and electrical connection relationship with the gaming machine frame 11 for the game boards 50 of multiple models, it becomes possible to change the model in which the gaming machine frame 11 is shared between different models. There is. Note that, below, first, the gaming machine frame 11 will be explained, and then the board configuration of the gaming board 50 will be explained.

The gaming machine frame 11 described above has an outer frame 12, a front frame (also referred to as an "inner frame" or a "body frame") 13, and a lower front plate (also referred to as a "curtain plate") 14. . Furthermore, a glass door 15 and a pan unit 16 are attached to the front frame 13. Among these, the outer frame 12 is a rectangular frame used to fix the pachinko game machine 10 at a predetermined position in island equipment in a game hall (gaming store), and as shown in FIG. It has an opening portion whose front side is closed by a front frame 13 having a door 15 and a tray unit 16, and the above-mentioned lower front plate 14.

Further, nailing is generally performed as a construction method for installing the outer frame 12 on the island equipment. Wood is used as the material of at least the portion of the outer frame 12 for fixing to the island equipment. Note that instead of wood, it is possible to use, for example, a plastic material that can be nailed. Moreover, it is also possible to employ a construction method other than nailing as a construction method for installing the outer frame 12 on the island equipment.

The front frame 13 has a structure that has an outer shape that matches the opening of the outer frame 12, and is attached to the outer frame 12 via hinge mechanisms 15A and 15B shown on the left side in FIG. The front frame 13 swings forward from the closed state relative to the outer frame 12, with the left side edge in FIG. 1 as a fixed end and the right side edge as a free end, to an open state. Further, the front frame 13 swings rearward from the open state, enters the outer frame 12, and locks therein, thereby returning to the closed state again. When the front frame 13 is closed, it closes the area between the upper short part of the outer frame 12 and the lower front plate 14 described above.

The front frame 13 is locked to the outer frame 12 and released from the outer frame 12 through a locking device (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 1, a cylinder part 17 of the locking device is arranged at a lower part of the free end side of the front frame 13, and this cylinder part 17 covers the lower part of the front frame 13. The keyhole is directed toward the front of the pachinko game machine 10 through the tray unit 16 mentioned above. Then, when the game hall clerk inserts the key into the keyhole of the cylinder 17 and turns the key, for example, counterclockwise, the free end side of the front frame 13 is released from the locking device, and the front frame 13 is in the open state. Become.

In contrast to such a front frame 13, the aforementioned lower front plate 14 does not have a structure for opening and closing like the front frame 13, and is fixed to the outer frame 12 so as not to move. The lower front plate 14 always closes the lower end of the front surface of the outer frame 12.

A glass door 15 and a pan unit 16 arranged at the front of the front frame 13 are attached to the front frame 13 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). Furthermore, both the glass door 15 and the dish unit 16 are independently swingable with the left side edge in FIG. 1 serving as a fixed end and the right side edge serving as a free end. The glass door 15 and the tray unit 16 are brought into an open state by being horizontally swung forward by, for example, an employee at the game parlor, and then are latched to the front frame 13 by being swung horizontally from the open state to the rear. This results in a closed state.

The glass door 15 is locked to the front frame 13 and released from the front frame 13 via the aforementioned locking device (not shown). That is, when the game hall clerk inserts a key into the keyhole of the cylinder 17 and turns the key clockwise, for example, in the opposite direction to when opening the front frame 13, the free end side of the glass door 15 is locked. is released, and the glass door 15 becomes open. Then, by pushing back the glass door 15 in the open state so that it overlaps with the front frame 13, and pushing it in so that the glass door 15 is parallel to the front frame 13, the locking device is activated and the glass door 15 is moved forward again. It is locked to the frame 13.

In addition, by opening the glass door 15, a locking mechanism (not shown) of the dish unit 16 appears and becomes operable, and an operating part (not shown) of this locking mechanism is pushed downward by an amusement hall employee. By performing the pushing operation, the pan unit 16 is brought into an open state. Furthermore, by pushing back the dish unit 16 in the open state so that it overlaps with the front frame 13, and pushing it in so that the dish unit 16 becomes parallel to the front frame 13, the locking mechanism is activated and the dish unit 16 is opened again. It is locked to the front frame 13.

Further, the glass door 15 detachably holds two parallel transparent plates, for example, and when the glass door 15 is in the closed state, the game board 50 can be viewed from the front of the pachinko game machine 10 through these transparent plates. That's what I do. As the transparent plate, in addition to a glass plate, a transparent resin plate can also be used. Further, by opening the glass door 15, the front surface of the game board 50 held on the front frame 13 by a game board holding mechanism (not shown) is exposed. Further, although not shown in the drawings, the front frame 13 has a game ball passage for guiding and collecting game balls, which are game media.

The pan unit 16 has an upper spherical tray 18, a lower spherical tray 19, a firing handle 20, etc. on its front surface. Among these, the upper ball tray 18 stores game balls, supplies the game balls to the firing device 43 (see FIGS. 2 and 4) operated via the firing handle 20, and supplies the game balls to the lower ball tray 19. Mechanisms are provided for various functions such as ball ejection. The lower ball tray 19 also stores game balls, receives game balls sent from the upper ball tray 18, and stores game balls in a ball box (so-called dollar box) placed outside the pachinko gaming machine 10. Mechanisms are provided for various functions such as ejection. Note that the ball box may be integrally provided with the island equipment.

In addition, in this embodiment, various speakers 21 are provided at the upper corner of the glass door 15, the lower front plate 14, etc., and through these speakers 21, sound is transmitted depending on the game status, performance pattern, etc. BGM and various sound effects are output.

Furthermore, an operation button 22 that can be operated by the player is provided on the portion of the upper ball plate 18 facing the player. This operation button 22 is provided on the outer wall surface of the upper part of the upper spherical plate 18 and is located near the center of the upper spherical plate 18 in the left-right direction. Further, the operation button 22 is provided with an operation button light emitting body (not shown) inside, and is configured to output light in accordance with the effect pattern to be executed.

Note that the operation button 22 may be made to protrude upward in a predetermined case using, for example, a drive source such as a motor. Although details are not shown in the drawings, the operation button 22 in this embodiment can be displaced in such a manner that the tip of the operation button 22 protrudes upward due to the drive of the elevating motor, thereby forming an operation lever input section that can perform input by tilting. It has a half-moon-shaped eccentric cam to generate vibrations in the drive system of the operating lever.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20(a), in addition to the operation buttons 22, a cross key 96 is provided, and the player can use this cross key 96 to set various environments. Examples of the environmental settings include adjusting the volume of the speaker 21 (volume adjustment), adjusting the brightness (brightness adjustment) and light amount of the presentation display (described later), or changing the presentation mode (described later). . Furthermore, as a content of the environment settings, there is an automatic button operation (sometimes simply referred to as "automatic button operation") for effect that allows the same effect to proceed even if the player does not operate the operation button 22. For example, the settings for Further, it is possible to provide a display device, for example, in the front frame 13 or the like of the gaming machine frame 11, which can display effects related to the game and displays related to the above-mentioned environment settings. Here, how to set the environment and various effects and control modes related to the environment setting will be described later.

Furthermore, in addition to the cross key, it is also possible to use, for example, lever-like operating means, touch panels of various types, and the like. Further, in FIG. 20(a), reference numeral 97 indicates a ball lending button, and reference numeral 98 indicates a return button. Furthermore, what is indicated by reference numeral 98 in FIG. 20(a) is a ball removal button for the upper ball tray 18.
<Back configuration of Pachinko machine>

Next, the basic configuration of the back side of the Pachinko gaming machine 10 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 2, the back of the front frame 13 is equipped with a game ball passage for guiding or collecting game balls, and a set base (also referred to as a "back set board") 31 that serves as a prize ball path forming mechanism. is attached, and below this set base 31, there is a power supply unit 32 for supplying power to the entire gaming machine, and a payout control (also referred to as "prize ball control" etc.) board for controlling the gaming machine frame side. 103 are installed in their own transparent cases. In addition, on the back side of the game board 50, there are a main board (main control board) 102 that centrally controls the entire game, and a sub board 104 that executes production control based on control commands from the main board 102. It is housed in a transparent case and is provided in a positional relationship corresponding to the opening of the set base 31. Furthermore, the set base 31 also includes a launcher 43 and a launch control board 105 that controls the launcher 43.

In the set base 31, a prize ball tank 33 is provided above the above-mentioned opening. This prize ball tank 33 stores game balls supplied from the island equipment and serving as prize balls. Further, below the prize ball tank 33, a prize ball passage 34, a payout unit 35, and a prize ball discharge passage 36 are provided. The prize ball passage 34, the payout unit 35, and the prize ball discharge passage 36 are arranged along the right side from above the game board 50 when the Pachinko game machine 10 is viewed from the back as shown in FIG. has been done.

The prize ball passage 34 described above rectifies and guides the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 to the downstream side. Moreover, the above-mentioned payout unit 35 communicates with the prize ball passage 34 and can discharge the balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 downward one ball at a time. Furthermore, the prize ball discharge passage 36 guides the game balls flown down from the payout unit 35 to a ball tray (upper ball tray 18 or lower ball tray 19) as a prize ball.

The aforementioned power supply unit 32 is provided at the lower left portion of the set base 31 when the Pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the back as shown in FIG. The power supply unit 32 converts AC power supplied from outside the gaming machine into various voltages used in the gaming machine, and supplies the voltages to the payout control board 103, the main board 102, the sub board 104, and the like. Further, a power switch 40 for operating the power supply unit 32 is arranged behind other devices, as shown by a hidden line (broken line) in the lower right part of the figure. This power switch 40 is installed so that it will not be turned off even if a fallen game ball hits it directly, and will be turned on when the power switch 40 is pressed below the center and tilted downward.

The aforementioned payout control board 103 is arranged at the lower right part of the set base 31 when the Pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the back as shown in FIG. The dispensing control board 103 has a dispensing control function that controls the dispensing unit 35 in response to instructions regarding dispensing from the main board 102 and lending requests from the outside. Further, the above-mentioned launch control board 105 has a launch control function that controls the launch device 43 so as to launch the game ball (hit ball) into the game area with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the launch handle 20 (see FIG. 1). ing.

The above-mentioned main board 102 is arranged at the lower center on the back side of the game board 50, and mainly performs various lottery functions, setting change functions, control functions for the payout control board 103 and the sub-board 104, etc. It has a central processing function in the pachinko gaming machine 10. The above-mentioned sub-board 104 is arranged at the upper center on the back side of the game board 50, and mainly has the function of controlling various effects to be described later.

Regarding the sub-boards 104, there is a main sub-board (in this example, the sub-main board 301) that is responsible for the main function of effect control, and a sub-sub-board that is specialized for a specific effect function such as image creation (in this example, 302), but the term "sub-board" includes these. In addition, at the lower right side of the back side of the set board 31, an external relay terminal board (such as a "frame relay terminal board") that relays signals from the main board 102, payout control board 103, etc. to equipment external to the Pachinko gaming machine 10 is provided. ) 46 are provided.

The above-mentioned setting change function on the main board 102 is a function that allows changing the setting value that defines the theoretical probability of winning (the degree of advantage for the player). In this embodiment, six types of integer values "1" to "6" are provided as setting values, and for each of these setting values, a probability value related to a theoretical jackpot or small hit, and The ball payout rates are different. Changes in such set values, the jackpot probability for each set value, etc. will be described later.
<Game board configuration>

Next, the aforementioned game board 50 and the parts arranged on the board surface of the game board 50 (board surface parts) will be explained. In this embodiment, the game board 50 is composed of a plurality of parts made of transparent resin material (for example, transparent acrylic resin, etc.) or wood (veneer board). Further, the game board 50 is formed into a plate shape, and has a game ball passageway that guides the game balls to the back side of the game board 50, a predetermined space, and the like. The game board 50 is mounted on the front frame 13 of the game machine frame 11 with the board surface on which various board parts are mounted facing forward, and is secured by the glass door 15 etc. in the closed state. The front is covered. Further, on the front side of the game board 50, a game area 52 is defined by combining inner rails and outer rails formed into curved band shapes.

As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming area 52 includes a first starting winning opening 62, a second starting winning opening 63, a big winning opening device 90 (attacker unit), an operating opening 68, a plurality of general winning openings 72, and , an exit port (58) located at the bottom of the gaming area 52 and hidden behind the operation button 22 in FIG. 1 is provided. Furthermore, the game area 52 is equipped with an effect display device 60 made of a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying effects, a center decoration 64 that decorates the periphery of this effect display device 60, and the like.

The game area 52 is also equipped with a large number of game nails and mechanisms such as windmills (not shown). Note that it is also possible not to provide a windmill. Furthermore, a main control display device 53 is provided outside the lower left of the game area 52 of the game board 50. Note that the specific configuration and functions of this main control display device 53 will be described later. Further, the above-described board configuration of the game board 50 may vary depending on, for example, the game nature adopted in the Pachinko game machine 10.
<Functions of panel parts>

Next, specific functions and configurations of the individual panel components described above will be explained. First, the above-mentioned first starting winning hole 62 is a starting winning hole related to the first game, and is of a type that always opens the entrance of the game ball and does not change the size of the entrance of the game ball. Furthermore, the first starting winning hole 62 has a first starting winning detecting device 74 (sensor) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning hole 62, and the output signal of this sensor is as described above. is input to the main board 102 of.

The aforementioned second starting winning hole 63 is a starting winning hole relating to the second game, and is arranged on the right side of the first starting winning hole 62. The second starting prize opening 63 is a starting opening for a normal electric accessory (so-called "electric tulip" or "electric chew"), and when the normal symbol described below is stopped and displayed in a winning manner, one side It is equipped with a blade (opening/closing blade) that operates to open (on the right side in FIG. 1). Then, based on the operation of the normal electric accessory, the second starting winning hole 63 opens and opens the opening/closing blade for a predetermined period of time, so that the ball enters the second starting winning hole 63. It becomes possible. It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the aspect of this embodiment, and a configuration may be adopted in which a normal electric accessory is not provided at the starting opening related to the second game, or a configuration in which a normal electric accessory is arranged at the starting opening related to the first game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 3, the second starting prize opening 63 is equipped with a second starting prize detecting device 75 (sensor) and a normal electric accessory solenoid 76 for opening and closing the above-mentioned opening/closing blade. . The output signal of the second start-up winning detection device 75 is input to the main board 102.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a plurality of types are provided as the manner in which the second starting prize opening 63 is opened. These opening modes include relatively short opening modes (for example, about 0.2 seconds) (referred to as "short opening" or "short opening") and relatively long opening modes (for example, about 5 seconds). There are various modes (referred to as "long open", "long open", etc.). It is also possible to provide a mode of middle opening, which is set to an opening time between short opening and long opening.

As shown in FIG. 3, the aforementioned general winning hole 72 is equipped with a general winning detection device 73 (sensor) for detecting the entry of a game ball. The output signal of the general winning detection device 73 is input to the main board 102.

When the general winning a prize detection device 73 is shared by a plurality of general winning a prize holes 72, the game balls that have entered the plurality of general winning a prize holes 72 are gathered at the location where the general winning a prize detecting device 73 is arranged, It is possible to detect. It is also possible to group the plurality of general winning holes 72 by positional relationship or by the number of prize balls (common use of the general winning prize detection device 73).

The above-mentioned big winning opening device 90 is formed into a case shape by combining parts made of transparent synthetic resin, and although not shown, it has a big winning opening visible to the player inside. . The big prize opening has an opening formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and is provided with an opening/closing door 91 (shown by a broken line in FIG. 1) inside for opening and closing this opening. Then, when a predetermined hit occurs, the big prize opening performs an opening operation in a predetermined manner. Here, in this embodiment, the big prize opening opens upward, and the opening/closing door 91 can be slid in the front-rear direction.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the big winning opening device 90 includes a big winning detection device 78 for detecting the entry of game balls, and a big winning opening (opening) solenoid that drives the opening/closing door 91 described above. It is equipped with 80. Of these, the big winning detection device 78 has a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning opening device 90, and its output signal is input to the main board 102.

In addition, various types can be adopted as the big winning a prize opening device 90. For example, as the grand prize opening device 90, it is possible to adopt one in which the grand prize opening is opened forward or one in which the grand prize opening is opened upward. In addition, the big winning opening device 90 is provided with multiple types of operation patterns (opening/closing patterns) related to the above-mentioned opening/closing door 91 that opens and closes the big winning opening, and during a jackpot game in which a special game is executed, multiple types of different operation patterns It is possible to adopt a device that operates the opening/closing door 91 with the following steps. Furthermore, as the grand prize opening device 90, it is also possible to employ a device that has a plurality of grand prize openings and allocates game balls to each grand prize opening according to the game situation.

As shown in FIG. 3, the aforementioned operation port 68 is equipped with a passage detection device 69, and this passage detection device 69 has a sensor that detects passage of a game ball in the operation port 68. The output signal of the sensor in the passage detection device 69 is input to the main board 102, and the passage detection device 69 changes the output signal of the sensor depending on whether or not a ball enters the ball.

The above-mentioned out port 58 includes an out ball detection device (out port sensor) 82, as shown in FIG. This out port sensor 82 is configured to detect a game ball (out ball) that does not become a winning ball (safe ball) in the game area 52 but enters the out port 58. The detection results of the out-port sensor 82 are used for counting out-balls and for display (base display) on the performance display unit (the ball entry status indicator 808 in FIG. 5, described later). There is.

The center decoration 64 described above has a performance function and the like, and inside the center decoration 64 is provided an LED board on which a large number of chip-type LEDs are mounted. By driving the LED of the center decoration 64, the light from the LED passes through the center decoration 64, and the center decoration 64 performs light decoration (light production). Furthermore, the light decoration on the center decoration 64 is performed not only during the game, but also while waiting for the start of the game, and during preparation for the game when the player adjusts the amount of light (setting the amount of light).

Further, a plurality of movable performance members are provided on the back (inside) of the center decoration 64, and these movable performance members constitute a gimmick for performance. These movable presentation members are normally hidden inside the center decoration 64 as shown in FIG. However, when a predetermined performance is performed, these movable performance members appear in front of the performance display device 60, although not shown.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, light decoration (light production) is also performed on the movable production member. Furthermore, the light decoration on the movable effect member is performed not only during the game, but also while waiting for the game to start, and during game preparation when the player adjusts the amount of light.

Furthermore, a game ball passage section 65 is formed on the right side of the center decoration 64 when viewed from the front, and in addition to the above-mentioned performance function, the center decoration 64 also functions as a flow path for game balls. have.

Further, the center decoration 64 is provided with a light guide plate 88. Although not shown in the drawings, the light guide plate 88 may include, for example, two transparent plates arranged in parallel with their surfaces facing front and back. Furthermore, the light guide plate 88 is attached to the center decoration 64 and shields between the outside and the inside of the center decoration 64 in front of the effect display device 60. The light guide plate 88 also functions as a protective cover for the effect display device 60 in the center decoration 64.

This light guide plate 88 can be configured as follows, for example. That is, inside the center decoration 64, a plurality of LEDs serving as light sources are arranged in a strip-like manner so as to face, for example, one of the left and right end faces of the transparent plate. In normal times, the display contents of the effect display device 60 are transmitted to the outside of the transparent plate so that the player can view them without overlapping other images on the screen of the effect display device 60.

However, inside each transparent plate constituting the light guide plate 88, fine irregularities are formed that are invisible under normal circumstances. Then, when a predetermined effect is executed, for example, the above-mentioned light source facing the end surface of one of the transparent plates is driven, and the light from the light source is irradiated from the end surface of the transparent plate toward the inside of the transparent plate. Ru. Further, the light is diffused by the unevenness of the transparent plate irradiated with light, and the diffused light causes a predetermined illustration or the like to appear in color so that it can be recognized by the player.

Further, of the two transparent plates of the light guide plate 88, the other transparent plate is engraved with unevenness for forming an image different from the above-mentioned illustration or the like. Then, at the time of a predetermined effect, by driving the light source facing the end surface, an illustration different from the above-mentioned one appears so as to be recognizable to the player.

Here, it is also possible to place a light source facing not only one of the left and right end surfaces of the transparent plate, but also one of the top and bottom end surfaces, and use the light from this light source to project other illustrations. By doing so, it becomes possible to display two types of images on one transparent plate. Further, the number of transparent plates may be one or three or more. Furthermore, it is also possible to use a transmissive liquid crystal display instead of or in addition to the light guide plate 88.

As shown in FIG. 7, the above-described main control display device 53 includes a symbol display board (main symbol display board) 256 on which a large number of LED indicator lights are arranged. The symbol display board 256 includes a normal symbol display section 59 that displays the above-mentioned normal symbols, a first special symbol display section 70 that displays a first special symbol (described later) that corresponds to the first game, and a first special symbol display section 70 that displays the first special symbol that corresponds to the second game. A second special symbol display section 71 that displays a second special symbol (described later) and other various display sections are formed so as to be visible to the player from the front of the gaming machine. In addition, the above-mentioned normal symbol display section 59 constitutes a normal symbol display device. Further, the first special symbol display section 70 constitutes a first special symbol display device, and the second special symbol display portion 71 constitutes a second special symbol display device.

In addition, in the following, the ordinary pattern will be referred to as "Public pattern", the special pattern as "Special pattern", the first special pattern as "1st special pattern", "Special pattern 1", "Special 1", and the second special pattern as "Special pattern". It is sometimes referred to as ``Second special map'', ``Special map 2'', ``Special 2'', etc. Furthermore, the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1" or "design 1," and the second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2" or "design 2."

The above-mentioned main control display device 53 means one provided in the game board 50, but as described later, a setting display section provided on the main board 102 (settings shown in FIG. 5(a) described later) is used. It is also possible to use it as a main control display device including a display device 807), a performance display section (ball entering state display device 808 in FIG. 5A, which will be described later), and the like. In that case, the setting display section and performance display section provided on the main board 102 may be referred to as a "main board side main control display device", for example.
<Basic gaming procedure>

Next, the game procedure in the pachinko game machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, when a game ball is supplied to the above-mentioned upper ball tray 18, when the player operates and rotates the above-mentioned firing handle 20, the upper ball tray 18 is released with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle. Game balls stored in the game ball are fired one by one at predetermined intervals. Then, the game ball is guided by the above-mentioned inner rail and outer rail, reaches the upper part of the gaming area 52, and is released into the gaming area 52 from between the inner rail and the outer rail.

In a normal game, a player shoots a game ball so that it flows down on the left side of the game area 52, and aims at the first starting prize opening 62 located at the lower central part of the game area 52. This type of firing that mainly uses the left side of the game area 52 is called left-handed firing. Further, while the player operates the firing handle 20, the firing of the game balls is repeated at predetermined time intervals (for example, at intervals not exceeding 100 shots per minute) by the aforementioned firing device 43. Then, the game balls continuously released into the game area 52 fall in a direction depending on factors such as their speed and angle of incidence (or angle of reflection) while interfering with a plurality of game nails, windmills, etc.

When a game ball falls into various winning holes such as the above-mentioned general winning hole 72 and first starting winning hole 62, the ball is detected and the payout control of the game ball is performed. Then, depending on the type of winning hole into which the balls entered, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls to the upper ball tray 18 via the above-mentioned payout unit 35. Further, when the upper ball tray 18 is filled with many game balls and the subsequent paid out game balls cannot enter the upper ball tray 18, these game balls are guided to the lower ball tray 19 as overflow balls. .

In addition, game balls that have fallen into various winning holes become safe balls and are guided from the front side of the game board 50 to the back side. Further, the game balls that are not safe balls reach the lower end of the game area 52, fall into the out port (58), and are guided to the back side of the game board 50. The game balls that have reached the back side of the game board 50 are guided downward through a predetermined guide gutter and a game ball passage in the set base 31, and are directed from the pachinko game machine 10 toward the island equipment described above. is discharged.

The above-mentioned operation port 68 is different from the above-mentioned winning hole that generates the safe ball, and serves as a gate through which the game ball passes. In addition, in the following, the operating port 68 will be referred to as the "winning port", and the terms "dropping", "entering ball", and "winning" in this embodiment will be used as "passing through" regarding the gate unless otherwise specified. ”.

In a gaming situation that is not a jackpot winning situation, when a game ball enters the operating port 68 and is detected, if a predetermined fluctuation start condition (normal pattern fluctuation start condition) as described later is satisfied. , on the main control display device 53, normal symbols (described later) are displayed in a variable manner. The normal symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 indicates the result of a random number lottery (common symbol lottery) that is executed based on the ball entering the operating port 68, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuating time. be done.

When the game ball enters the starting hole (here, the first starting winning hole 62 or the second starting winning hole 63), a predetermined fluctuation start condition (special figure fluctuation starting condition) as described later must be satisfied. For example, on the main control display device 53, special symbols (described later) are displayed in a variable manner. The special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 indicates the result of a random number lottery (jackpot lottery) executed based on the ball entering the starting hole, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined variable time. .

In the effect display device 60 described above, effects related to special symbols are displayed. This effect display differs depending on whether the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner or in a static display, and whether the special symbol's static display mode is a jackpot or a miss. Relatedly, various predetermined aspects are performed.

In a jackpot game in which a special game is executed, a unit game in which the big winning hole device 90 is operated and a big winning hole (not shown) is opened is repeated a plurality of times. Furthermore, special games include those in which a unit game is repeated a maximum number of times, and those in which a unit game is repeated a number of times less than the maximum number of times. An example of the maximum number of times is 15 times (15R (round)), and an example of the number of times smaller than the maximum number is 5 times (5R). Another example is to set the maximum number of times to 10 times (10R) and set the number of times smaller than the maximum number to 6 times (6R) or 2 times (2R). In addition, it is possible to provide other small winning games as games that operate the big winning a prize opening device 90.

In each unit game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected in the corresponding big prize opening, or when the total opening time reaches a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds), When the termination conditions are met, the grand prize opening is closed. The use of the total opening time as a condition for ending a unit game indicates that an upper limit is set even if the opening of the big prize opening is divided into multiple times in one unit game. ing. By opening the jackpot multiple times within a unit game, we can increase the technical intervention, and by opening the jackpot once, we can easily obtain balls, so that there is a range of playability during the jackpot. The opening mode of the grand prize opening can be selected from among preset patterns.

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko game machine 10 of the present embodiment employs a game feature in which a plurality of games (in this case, two) corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko game machine coexist. That is, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned plurality of games can be divided into a first game in which the first starting winning hole 62 is used and a second game in which the second starting winning hole 63 is used. Then, in a situation where the second game is given priority over the first game and the game start conditions are met at the same time, the second game is executed with priority and the first game is put on hold. The first game and the second game are not executed at the same time.

Note that this is not limited to this, and for example, the first game and the second game, that is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, may be displayed in parallel without setting a priority between the first game and the second game. It is also possible to adopt a game feature in which the game is executed. When such a game feature is adopted, a situation may arise in which the first game and the second game (the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are executed at the same time.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a specific game may be executed after the special game ends, depending on the result of the aforementioned jackpot lottery. This specific game is different from the above-mentioned special game, and is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In this embodiment, the specific games include a probability variable game (hereinafter referred to as "probability change"), a variable time shortening game (hereinafter referred to as "time saving"), and a ball entry facilitating game. As specific games, there are games in which only one of the probability change, time-saving, and easy-to-enter games are played, and there are games in which a plurality of specific games are played at the same time, and different gaming properties are created depending on the combination of these games.

When a specific game is to be executed, a notification regarding the recommended game ball launch position and launch timing is executed by images and sounds on the performance display device 60 (for example, a right-handed performance that encourages right-handed play). Then, when the player increases the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20 clockwise to strengthen the firing force and fires the game ball toward the right area of the game area 52, the game ball that has passed above the center decoration 64 , enters the game ball passage portion 65 of the center decoration 64, and causes the center decoration 64 to flow down. Further, the game ball released from the center decoration 64 hits a plurality of game nails and other structures and falls in a direction depending on how it hits.

Some of the many game balls released from the center decoration 64 pass through the operating port 68 (see FIG. 1) and are detected by the passage detection device 69 (see FIG. 3). Then, as described above, when the game ball passes through the operating port 68, the above-mentioned normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7), and the variable display of the normal symbols stops in a predetermined winning manner. Then, the normal electric accessory in the second starting prize opening 63 expands for a predetermined time depending on the winning mode.

In this embodiment, it is possible to guide the game ball that has reached the right side of the gaming area 52 to the vicinity of the second starting winning opening 63 and the big winning opening device 90 using a nail or the like. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a ball entry facilitation game is added to the specific time saving game, and during the time saving game, the ball entry facilitation game extends the opening of the normal electric accessory and extends the normal electric role. A combination of the probability change of the object and the time saving of the normal electric accessory is performed, making it easier to execute the long opening of the ordinary electric accessory. Then, during the time saving, when the normal electric accessory in the second starting prize opening 63 expands once, one or more game balls can enter the second starting winning opening 63. ing.

In addition, when a jackpot occurs and a special game is executed, the big winning hole (not shown) of the big winning hole device 90 is opened, but during this special game, the player does not hit right. It is possible to In this case, before the start of the special game, it is conceivable to execute a right-hitting performance that urges the player to play right-handed using images, sounds, etc. on the performance display device 60.
<Example of jackpot type: ST>

Next, types of jackpots in the above-mentioned first game and second game will be explained. First, as jackpots, there are a jackpot that repeats the unit game 15 times (hereinafter also referred to as "15R jackpot" as appropriate) and a jackpot that repeats the unit game 7 times (hereinafter also referred to as "7R jackpot" as appropriate). .

The above-mentioned unit game is started in the special game when the big winning hole in the big winning hole device 90 is opened, and when a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or when a predetermined number of pieces (for example, 10 The game ends when more than 100 game balls fall into the game, and the grand prize opening is closed. A special game in which such unit games are repeated is based on a so-called hit ball game (sometimes referred to as a ball hit) for the purpose of allowing the player to acquire game balls. Furthermore, among the various jackpots, the 15R jackpot, 7R jackpot, etc. are intended to allow the player to obtain a relatively large number of game balls.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to provide some types of jackpots, such as 15R jackpots and parts of 15R jackpots, which do not have variable probability (15R normal or 7R normal). In addition, for example, even if it is a 15R jackpot, the opening period of the big prize opening is short and you can only get the same number of balls as the 5R jackpot (15R probability variation (actual 5R)), or 5R jackpot. Even if it is, it is possible to provide a system in which it is almost impossible to obtain a ball (for example, in each R, only the minimum amount (for example, one ball) enters the big winning opening device 90).

Further, in this embodiment, the specific gaming states such as the above-mentioned probability change and time saving occur when the jackpot game ends for a predetermined specific jackpot. As a mode of occurrence of such a specific game state, for example, it is possible to provide a jackpot that does not give at least one part of the privilege functions such as probability change, time saving, and easy entry game. More specifically, it is conceivable to provide a jackpot that involves only a change in probability or a jackpot that involves only a time saving. Furthermore, it is also possible to vary the types of jackpots by varying the duration of the probability change or the duration of the time saving. In addition, when the electric chew support is also executed during the time saving, the "continuation period of the time saving" can be rephrased as the "duration period of the electric chew support". Furthermore, it is also conceivable to execute only the electric chew support out of the time saving and electric chew support, or conversely, to execute only the time saving among the time saving and electric chew support.

However, the combinations of the jackpot, variable probability, time saving, etc. are not limited to those of this embodiment, and various combinations can be adopted. For example, probability variations may occur for all jackpots. In this case, all of the 15R jackpots in this embodiment are 15R jackpots with probability variations (15R probability variations), and all of the 7R jackpots are 7R jackpots with probability variations (7R probability variations).
<Win other than jackpot>

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a small win is provided as a type of win other than the jackpot. In the first game (or second game), if this small win occurs, it is possible to adopt a game feature in which the big winning opening device 90 is opened, for example, once.
<Main control display device>
<<Configuration of main control display device>>

Next, the aforementioned main control display device 53 (game board side main control display device) will be explained based on FIG. 7. The main control display device 53 on the game board side, as shown in FIG. It is configured. In this embodiment, the number of LED indicator lights in the upper and lower stages is 18, and the LED indicator lights in each stage are arranged at equal intervals in the horizontal direction. Furthermore, the intervals between the LED indicator lights in the vertical positional relationship are also constant for all 18 indicators.

In the main control display device 53, the 10 rightmost LED indicator lights in the upper row when viewed from the front are used to display information regarding special map 1, and the 10 rightmost LED indicator lights in the lower row are used for special map 2. It is designed to be used for displaying such information. In the upper and lower stages, the two LED indicator lights at the right end constitute a first special symbol memory display section 83 and a second special symbol memory display section 84 that indicate the number of reserved memories. The eight LED indicator lights lined up on the left of the first special symbol memory display section 83 constitute the first special symbol display section 70 described above, and the eight LED indicator lights lined up on the left side of the second special symbol memory display section 84 constitute the first special symbol display section 70 described above. These LED indicator lights constitute the second special symbol display section 71 described above.

The first special symbol display section 70 is capable of variable display and static display of the first special symbol related to the first game, depending on the operation mode of eight LED indicator lights arranged in a row in the horizontal direction. The first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display section 70 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the first lottery that is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning hole 62, and its variable display is a predetermined symbol. When the game is stopped in the winning mode, a jackpot occurs and a special game is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol display section 70 stops displaying the first special symbol, a maximum of 255 (= 2^8 -1) Type identification information can be displayed. Specifically, the combination of turning on and off the 8 LED indicator lights is displayed in a stopped state, but both in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a loss (or in the case of a small win if it is equipped with a small win), all Since it is configured so that at least one LED indicator light is turned on instead of being turned off, it is possible to display a maximum of 255 (=2^8-1) types of identification information.

Similarly, regarding the above-mentioned second special symbol display section 71, depending on the operation mode of the eight LED indicator lights arranged in a line in the horizontal direction, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, a maximum of 255 (=2 ^8-1) Type identification information can be displayed. Specifically, the combination of turning on and off the 8 LED indicator lights is displayed in a stopped state, but both in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a loss (or in the case of a small win if it is equipped with a small win), all Since it is configured so that at least one LED indicator light is turned on instead of being turned off, it is possible to display a maximum of 255 (=2^8-1) types of identification information.

Furthermore, in the upper row, four LED indicator lights lined up on the left of the first special symbol display section 70 are used to display information regarding the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol). The two LED indicator lights lined up on the left side of the first special symbol display section 70 described above constitute a normal symbol memory display section 85 for displaying the number of stored normal symbols. The two LED indicator lights arranged in a row constitute a normal symbol display section 59.

The normal symbol display section 59 is configured to display the normal symbols in a fluctuating manner and in a stopped manner depending on the operation mode of the two LED indicator lights. The normal symbol display section 59 can display up to 3 (=2^2-1) types of identification information when the display is stopped. Specifically, the combination of lighting and turning off two LED indicator lights is displayed in a stopped state, but the structure is such that at least one LED indicator light turns on instead of turning off all the lights in case of a win or a miss. Therefore, it is possible to display a maximum of 3 (=2^2-1) types of identification information. However, as a modification, unlike the first special symbol display section 70 and the second special symbol display section 71, the normal symbol display section 59 may be completely turned off in the case of a miss, and in that case, the number of lights at the maximum is 4 (= 2^2) Type identification information can be displayed.

Further, a round number display section 86 is constituted by four LED indicator lights, two LED indicator lights lined up on the left side of the normal symbol display section 59 in the upper row, and two LED indicator lights located below at the left end of the lower row. Furthermore, the four LED indicator lights between the round number display part 86 and the second special symbol display part 71 in the lower row are, in order from the left, a first status display part (status indicator light 1) 87a, a second status display part (Status indicator lamp 2) 87b, a third status indicator (status indicator 3) 87c, and a fourth status indicator (status indicator 4) 87d.

The above-mentioned first state display section 87a is designed to light up when the probability variation function related to the special pattern is activated, and the second state display section 87b is designed to light up when the probability variation function related to the regular pattern is activated. There is. Further, the second status display section 87b is designed to light up even when the opening is extended, which is a so-called electric support state. Furthermore, the third status display section 87c is used as a striking (right-handed) status indicator. Further, the fourth status display section 87d is used as an error indicator light.

Here, the above-mentioned third state display section 87c (distribution state indicator light) is turned on not only during the electric support state but also during a jackpot. Note that during the jackpot, even if the player is playing consecutive games, the flag for setting the electric support state (electric support flag) etc. is turned off. Further, the third state display section 87c can be turned on even when the normal electric accessory is in a long open state in other states (normal state).

The main control display device 53 (game board side main control display device) having such a configuration is electrically connected to the aforementioned main board 102, as shown in FIG. Various display sections in the main control display device 53 are controlled by the main board 102. In addition, in FIG. 3, among the various display sections in the main control display device 53, only the normal symbol display section 59, the first special symbol display section 70, and the second special symbol display section 71 are shown.
<<Functions of main control display device>>

When the game ball passes through the aforementioned operating port 68, the normal symbol display section 59 blinks, and a variable display of the normal symbols is executed. Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time (normal pattern fluctuation time) has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed. If the normal symbol is displayed in a miss mode (miss pattern), if a ball enters the subsequent operating port after a predetermined stop time (fixed regular symbol stop time) has elapsed, the normal symbol will be The next variable display related to the symbol is started. In addition, when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode (win mode), it moves to the next fluctuating display in the same way as in the case of a loss, while the normal symbol that was stopped and displayed first moves to the next variable display. Depending on the mode, the second starting prize opening 63 performs an opening operation for a predetermined time.

The number of reservations related to the regular symbol lottery is the number of game balls that passed through the operating port 68 during the variation of the regular symbol, and indicates the number of times the regular symbol lottery has not been executed yet. In other words, if the previous symbol variation in the normal symbol storage display section 85 has not finished, the variation start condition is not satisfied, and when the symbol variation ends, the variation start condition is satisfied, and the symbol change is held. A new symbol variation will be started based on the stored lottery result (pending lottery result). The upper limit of the number of reservations is 4, and no more than 4 reservations are stored.

The display of four types of numerical values by the normal symbol memory display section 85 is such that, for example, when the number of reservations is 0 (no reservation), both are turned off, and when the number of reservations is 1, either one is turned on. This can be done by turning off the other one. In addition, when the number of reservations is 2, both are lit, when the number of reservations is 3, one of them is lit and the other flashes, and when the number of reservations is 4, both are flashed. It is possible to display

The display of the number of reserved first special symbols by the first special symbol storage display section 83 described above is performed by displaying four types of information using a set of two LED indicator lights. The display of the number of reserved second special symbols by the second special symbol storage display section 84 described above is also performed by displaying four types of information using a set of two LED indicator lights.

In addition, when the game situation is such that the above-mentioned right-handed game should be performed, a predetermined display is performed using the third status display section 86c of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7). In this embodiment, the third status display section 86c is set to be turned off when the player is playing left-handed, which is a gaming situation in which the player should play left-handed, and turned on when the player is playing right-handed, which is a gaming situation in which players should play right-handed.
<Configuration of production display device and basic display contents>

Next, the configuration of the above-mentioned effect display device 60 and a basic display example of the effect display device 60 will be explained. In this embodiment, a large (for example, about 15 inches) liquid crystal display is used as the effect display device 60. In the display area 194 of the performance display device 60, other performance displays such as a performance display regarding the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the above-mentioned main control display device 53, a story display, etc. are performed. Although various images are displayed in the effect display device 60, here, a basic effect display directly related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be explained.

As mentioned above, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started on the main control display device 53, the effect is displayed on the effect display device 60 as shown in FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b). A variable performance accompanied by a variable display of symbols (also referred to as "decorative symbols" or the like) 190 is executed. In this embodiment, the performance pattern 190 is composed of a left performance pattern 190a, a middle performance pattern 190b, and a right performance pattern 190c. In addition, below, the effect patterns 190a to 190c on the left center right may be described as "effect patterns 190" or "effect patterns 190a to 190c" depending on the situation.

Further, in this embodiment, the effect pattern 190 has nine types of elemental patterns (symbol element effect patterns) having the meanings of symbols from numbers "1" to "9". The other performance patterns, the middle performance pattern 190b and the right performance pattern 190c, also have nine types of elemental patterns meaning the numbers "1" to "9", like the left performance pattern 190a. Note that details of the above-mentioned elemental designs will be described later.

Along with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the main control display device 53, the above-mentioned production symbol 190 is displayed in a variable manner on the production display device 60 (see FIG. 8(a)). In this embodiment, the variable display of the performance symbols is performed by individually moving the left performance symbol 190a to the right performance symbol 190c in the vertical direction (vertical scrolling), and causing the above-mentioned element symbols to appear in the display area 194 one after another. Executed by It should be noted that as the direction of scrolling the performance symbols 190a to 190c, in addition to the vertical direction, various modes such as the horizontal direction, rotation, or rotation can be adopted.

In addition, the performance symbols 190 may constitute a so-called "reach" combination as an intermediate stage of the variable display. In this "reach", two of the production symbols 190 (here, the left production symbol 190a and the right production symbol 190c) are symbols with the same number, such as "7" and "7", the same meaning, Alternatively, a combination is made up of symbols having a predetermined relationship. Furthermore, in this "reach", the remaining one symbol (in this case, medium performance symbol 190b) other than the production symbols 190a and 190c that constituted the combination of reach (tenpai) cannot form a combination with other production symbols. It is currently changing.

It should be noted that as the display mode of the effect pattern 190, many types of "reach" and other various types can be adopted, but the details of the various display modes will be described later. Further, in the effect display device 60, various effects other than the effect using the effect pattern 190 are performed, and the details thereof will be described later.

Further, in this embodiment, the effect display device 60 uses a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to this, and may use other types of display bodies such as a mechanical drum body or an LED display body. It may be something. Furthermore, the effect display device 60 is not limited to one having only one display body, and may be configured by adding an additional display body and combining a plurality of display bodies, for example.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide such an additional display body as a movable presentation member and configure a gimmick using the additional display body. Then, normally, an additional display body is placed outside the display area 194 so as not to obstruct the visibility of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, and a predetermined effect pattern is executed. In some cases, it is conceivable for an additional display to appear in front of the display area 194.
<Configuration related to setting change function>

Next, the configuration related to the above-mentioned setting change and the method of setting change will be explained. FIG. 5(a) shows a partially enlarged view of the state in which the main board 102 is housed in a transparent board case 801, and FIG. 5(b) shows a cross section taken along line AA in FIG. 5(a). Shown enlarged and schematically. In FIG. 5A, a board case 801 is formed into a box shape with a divided structure (for example, a two-divided structure) from a colorless and transparent plastic material.

An example of a divided structure of the board case 801 is one in which a cover body is combined with a board holder that holds the main board 102, and the board holder and cover body are joined through a caulking structure that leaves a mark when separated. Can be adopted. In the board case 801, a connector 802 (only a part of which is shown with reference numerals) used for connection with other devices such as the sub-main board 301 is formed with a size that leaves as few gaps as possible. exposed through the opening.

The main board 102 is visible through the transparent board case 801, but in FIG. The sphere status indicator 808 is shown by a broken line, and illustration of other devices is omitted. Among these, the test terminal mounting area 806 is an area where test terminals are mounted only when performing a ball ejection test etc. at the product testing stage, and test terminals are not mounted on the main board 102 at the mass production stage. Not yet.

The above-mentioned setting display 807 displays the selected setting value only when changing the setting or confirming the setting. The setting display 807 displays the current setting regarding the setting value for varying the operating probability of the accessory continuous actuating device (the operating probability of the device that continuously activates the special electric accessory, the so-called jackpot probability). Values can be displayed. Furthermore, a 7-segment display for one digit is used as the setting display 807. Here, in this embodiment, although not shown, a dot display section is provided at the lower right corner of the 7-segment display in the setting display 807.

A setting key cylinder (also referred to as a "setting key switch") 809 and a setting change button (also referred to as a "setting change switch") 810 are arranged near the setting display 807. A setting change operation section 811 is configured by a change button 810 and the like. As shown in FIG. 5(b), this setting change operation unit 811 can be operated as shown in FIG. It is exposed as shown.

The opening/closing lid 812 is, for example, one that is integrally molded with the board case 801 via a resin hinge, and is opened as shown by arrow B by pulling the protruding knob part 813 with fingers and resisting elastic force. can be exemplified. Further, when closing the opening/closing lid 812, it is laid down from the state shown in FIG. 5(b) (not shown), and the free end side is latched to the board case 801.

The aforementioned ball entering state display 808 is used as a performance display section of the Pachinko gaming machine 10, and is capable of displaying the base (value of the number of prize balls per number of shots) for each game state. In this embodiment, as shown in the enlarged solid line in the lower right portion of FIG. 5A, a 7-segment display with four digits is used as the ball entry state display 808. Further, a dot display section (numerical symbol omitted) is provided at the lower right corner of the 7-segment display for each digit of the ball entry state display 808.

In this embodiment, as described above, the CPU 501, the test terminal mounting area 806, the ball entry status display 808, the setting change operation section 811, and the setting display 807 are overlapped in plan view (back view of the gaming machine). They are arranged so that they do not overlap (do not overlap). In addition, the ball entering state indicator 808 and the setting indicator 807 are arranged with a distance of a predetermined distance or more (for example, 30 mm or more) in order to prevent misidentification of the display.

In this embodiment, the left side in FIG. 5(b) is the free end when the gaming machine frame 11 is opened, and the setting change operation section 811 and the setting display 807 are arranged near the free end side. This makes it easier to change settings, etc., while the ball entry status indicator 808 is placed on the rotation axis (fixed end) side when opening the gaming machine frame 11. When the gaming machine frame is opened, consideration is given to preventing the displayed information from being unintentionally seen by the player. Of course, if priority is given to preventing fraud when changing setting values, etc., the setting change operation section 811 and the setting display 807 should be formed on the right side of the main board 102 when viewed from the front (on the rotation axis side of the gaming machine frame 11). Bye.

In this embodiment, in consideration of the above-mentioned points, an opening/closing lid 812 is provided at a portion corresponding to the setting change operation section 811 so that the setting change operation section 811 cannot be accessed easily. The configuration is such that the setting change operation section 811 is not exposed except when changing work or checking setting information. The setting change operation section 811 and the setting display 807 will be described below with reference to FIG. 5(b).

First, the top surface of the board case 801, which is located in a positional relationship corresponding to the setting change operation section 811, is designed so that a setting key (key) can be inserted into the setting key insertion slot (number omitted) of the setting key cylinder 809. Further, an opening 816 of a predetermined size is formed so that the setting change button 810 can be operated. However, by forming a partition wall such as a side wall from the opening 816 toward the top surface of the main board 102, it is impossible to access other electronic components (for example, the CPU 501) on the main board 102 through the opening 816. It has become. Further, a setting key cylinder 809 in which a setting key insertion slot (numerical symbol omitted) is formed corresponding to this opening 816 and a push-type setting change button 810 are arranged vertically when viewed from the back of the pachinko gaming machine 10. Furthermore, an opening/closing lid 812 corresponding to the size of the opening 816 is provided on the board case 801 so as to be openable and closable while being biased in a direction to always close the opening 816 .

Next, a brief explanation will be given of an operation method for changing settings, etc., and an overview of the effects of changing settings and displaying settings. When checking the set value, first operate the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) to turn off the power, then open the opening/closing lid 812 at a predetermined angle against the urging force, and open the setting key cylinder 809. Insert the setting key (key) into the setting key slot and rotate the key to the right. Then, without pressing the initialization switch 544, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated again to turn on the power. By this operation, the current setting value (for example, if the setting value range is "1" to "6", the corresponding value) is displayed on the setting display 807 formed by a 7-segment LED, and the setting display mode is displayed. Some segments (in this case, dot portions) are driven to light up to indicate that there is. In addition, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine is started (for example, in a state where control based on input related to the progress of the game, such as winning detection of the starting winning opening, can be executed), the setting value changing process is performed. is configured so that it is not possible.

On the other hand, when changing the set value, first operate the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) to turn off the power, then open the opening/closing lid 812 at a predetermined angle against the urging force, and press the setting key. Insert the setting key (key) into the setting key insertion slot of the cylinder 809 and rotate the key to the right. Then, while pressing the initialization switch 544, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated again to turn on the power. By this operation, the current setting value is displayed blinking on the setting display 807 formed by 7-segment LEDs, and some segments (in this case, dots) are turned off (unlit) to indicate that the setting change mode is in progress. Is displayed.

In this state, each time the setting change button 810 is pressed, a new setting value incremented by 1 to the current setting value is temporarily stored, and the stored setting value is displayed on the setting display 807. The administrator at the gaming parlor operates the setting change button 810 to obtain an arbitrary (target) setting value. In this embodiment, if the set value at power-on is "1", each press of the setting change button 810 changes the setting value to "1", "2", . . . "5", "6", "1". ” will be changed as follows.

Then, by operating the setting change button, the setting value is changed to an arbitrary setting value (the arbitrary setting value is displayed on the setting display 807), and when the key inserted in the setting key cylinder 809 is rotated to the left, the setting After the change process is completed and the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 807 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1000 ms), and some segments (in this case, dots) are displayed on the setting display 807, the setting value is and the dot are both turned off.
<Electrical configuration of Pachinko gaming machine>

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. Here, the main components of the electrical configuration will be extracted and explained. First, as shown in FIG. 4, the Pachinko gaming machine 10 is equipped with a power supply board 251, a payout control board 103, a main board 102, a sub-main board 301, and the like. Among these, the power supply board 251 is connected to the above-mentioned payout control board 103, game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 106, firing control board 107, etc. Further, a main board 102 is connected to the payout control board 103 via a frame relay terminal board 108. Also, connected to the main board 102 are a main symbol display board (also referred to as a "design display board") 256 that constitutes the above-mentioned main control display device 53 and a sub-main board 301. , the aforementioned sub-sub board 302 is connected.

The power supply board 251 of the various configurations described above is included in the power supply unit 32 (see FIG. 2) described above. A frame effect connection board 300 and a terminal board for connecting a rental device such as game balls (not shown) are connected to this power supply board 251. Of these, the terminal board for connecting a rental device such as game balls (not shown) The ball coin operation board used for coin operation is connected.

A touch switch 310 provided on the firing handle 20 (see FIGS. 1 and 20(a)) is connected to the firing control board 105 described above. Although not shown in the drawings, this touch switch 310 is connected to a firing touch lever and a lock fitting for grounding. A touch switch (also referred to as a "touch sensor") 310 detects this contact and changes the form of an output signal when a player, an arcade clerk, or the like touches the firing handle 20 with a finger or finger.

Furthermore, a firing intensity volume 311, a firing stop switch 312, and the aforementioned firing device 43 are connected to the firing control board 105. Of these, the firing intensity volume 1311 is used to change the firing intensity of the game ball according to the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 20. The firing stop switch 312 is used to detect an operation with a part of the finger (such as the thumb) gripping the firing handle 20 and stop firing.

Power from the power supply board 251 is supplied to the main board 102 via the payout control board 103 and the frame relay terminal board. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 3, the main board 102 is connected to a main control display device 53, each passage detection device 69a, 69b, and a normal electric controller via a game board connection board and a game board relay terminal board (not shown). object solenoid 76, first starting winning detection device 74, second starting winning detecting device 75, general winning detection device 73, big winning detection device 78, big winning opening (opening) solenoid 80, and magnetic sensor and radio wave sensor (not shown). (omitted) etc. are connected. Here, in this embodiment, the connection of the first starting prize detection device 74 and the second starting prize detecting device 75 to the main board 102 is directly performed without using a game board connecting board or a game board relay terminal board. It is being done.

Power from the power supply board 251 is supplied to the sub-main board 301 via the frame effect connection board 300 and the frame connection board 303. Furthermore, the sub-main board 301 is connected to the above-mentioned frame connection board 303 and frame effect connection board 300, as well as a glass frame effect connection relay board 305 and a glass frame effect connection board 306. Each device is connected.

The performance devices in the Pachinko gaming machine 10 include a frame illumination L2 board 317, a frame illumination R2 board 318, (left) speaker 21 (L), (right) speaker 21 (R), and the like. In addition, in this embodiment, a cross key (cross button) board, a production button board, a lifting motor, a production button (operation button) motor, a button position sensor, etc. are also provided, but the diagram in FIG. 4 is not complicated. Therefore, these illustrations are also omitted.

Also connected to the sub-main board 301 are equipment for game boards, equipment for image display, equipment for audio control, and the like. Among these devices, there is a board illumination connection board 331 as a device for the game board. This panel illumination connection board 331 is connected to the sub-main board 301 via the frame connection board 303 and the effect interface board 304 described above. A center illumination board 332 used for illuminating the center decoration 64 is connected to the panel illumination connection board 331. Further, although not shown in the drawings, an effect sensor board, other illumination boards, an effect motor, etc. are also connected to the board illumination connection board 331. Here, although not shown, various illumination boards and performance motors are connected to the performance interface board 304.

The above-mentioned image display device connected to the sub-main board 301 includes a sub-sub board (image control board) 302, and the sub-sub board 302 is connected to a liquid crystal unit (also known as a liquid crystal module) via an image display connection A board 336. ) 42 is connected. Here, in this embodiment, although not shown, another liquid crystal unit connected to the presentation interface board 304 via the image display connection board B is also provided. The aforementioned audio control devices connected to the sub-main board 301 include an audio control board (audio board) 339 and an audio ROM (ROM) board 340.

Next, the configurations of the main board 102, payout control board 103, etc. will be explained. As shown in FIG. 4, a CPU (main CPU) 501, a ROM (main ROM) 502, and an RWM 503 are mounted on the main board 102. Among these, as the CPU 501, for example, a central processing unit in a CPU device (CPU device) packaged with resin can be used. Note that the "ROM" and "RWM" described in this embodiment are comprehensive concepts that include both those built into the CPU device and those externally attached to the CPU device.

Furthermore, although not shown, the CPU device mounted on the main board 102 includes, in addition to the CPU 501, a control clock generation circuit, a random number clock generation circuit, a random number circuit for 16-bit random numbers, and an 8-bit random number. It is equipped with a random number circuit, etc. Among these, the random number circuit for 16-bit random numbers and the random number circuit for 8-bit random numbers are for generating hardware random numbers that are built-in random numbers.

Furthermore, the main board 102 is equipped with an input/output port 505 for inputting and outputting data to and from devices external to the main board 102. Further, although not shown in the drawings, various circuit sections such as an interrupt circuit and a timer circuit are formed on the main board 102.

The above-mentioned ROM 502 stores a gaming program for the CPU 501 to perform gaming-related processing, predetermined control data, and the like. Further, the above-mentioned RWM 503 rewritably stores data necessary for various processes, data generated during the process, etc. when the CPU 501 executes the game program.

Subsequently, the payout control board 103 is equipped with a CPU (payout CPU) 511, a ROM (payout ROM) 512, and an RWM 513. Among these, as the CPU 511, for example, a central processing unit in a CPU device (CPU device) packaged with resin can be used. Further, the ROM 512 stores a payout program for the CPU 511 to perform processing related to payout, predetermined control data, and the like. Further, the above-mentioned RWM 513 rewritably stores data necessary for various processes, data generated during the process, etc. when the CPU 501 executes the payout program.

The aforementioned sub-main board 301 includes a CPU (sub-main CPU) 521, a ROM (sub-main ROM) 522, a work RWM 523, an input port 527, an output port 528, a bus line (not shown), and the like. . The output side of the main board 102 is connected to the input side of the input port 527, and the CPU 521, ROM 522, work RWM 523, output port 528, etc. are connected to the output side of the input port 527.

The CPU 521 of the sub-main board 301 controls the display of the performance display device 60 based on the performance control command (command) for displaying symbols transmitted from the main board 102. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RWM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. memory.

Note that data transmission and reception between the main board 102 and the sub-main board 301 described above is performed in the form of one-way communication (one-way communication) from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. Since unidirectional communication is ensured between the main board 102 and the sub-main board 301, data cannot be transmitted from the sub-main board 301 to the main board 102. Therefore, the information held by the main board 102 cannot be referenced by the sub-main board 301 unless the main board 102 transmits it to the sub-main board 301. In order to enable such one-way communication, for example, the main board 102 is equipped with a communication regulation means (buffer circuit, etc.), and the data output to the sub-main board 301 is controlled by this communication regulation means. It is possible to do so via

The aforementioned sub-sub board 302 includes a CPU 531, a work RWM 532, a program ROM 533, a character ROM 535, a video controller (VDP) 536, an input port 538, an output port 539, a bus line (not shown), and the like. Further, the image controller (VDP) 536 includes a video memory 540. The output side of the sub-main board 301 is connected to the input side of the input port 538, and each device such as the CPU 531, work RWM 532, program ROM 533, etc. is connected to the output side of the input port 538.

The video memory 540 described above is a memory for storing display data displayed on the effect display device 60, and by rewriting the contents of the image data in the video memory 540, the display contents (frame images) of the effect display device 60 can be changed. ) is changed. The character ROM 535 is a memory for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the effect display device 60. The image controller 536 adjusts the operation timing of the CPU 531, the video memory 540, and the output port 539 to intervene in data reading and writing, and also reads display data stored in the video memory 540 from the character ROM 535 at a predetermined timing. Furthermore, the symbols are displayed on the effect display device 60 in a layered manner in which the priority order is determined in advance.
<Power supply and data backup>

The aforementioned power supply board 251 includes a power supply section 541 for supplying power to each section of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and an initialization switch circuit section 543 having an initialization switch 544. The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating voltages to the main board 102, payout control board 103, etc. through a power path (not shown). More specifically, the power supply unit 541 takes in a predetermined voltage supplied from the outside and supplies the predetermined amount of voltage for driving various switches, motors, logic circuits, etc. to the main board 102, payout control board 103, and supply to other specified equipment.

The initialization switch circuit unit 543 sends an initialization signal to the main board 102 and payout control board 103 for clearing backup data when the initialization switch 544 is pressed by, for example, an administrator of a game parlor when the power is turned on. It is equipped with a circuit that outputs. In the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, as will be described later, it is possible to retain (back up) stored data even in a situation where power supply to the power board is cut off. Then, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on, when the above-mentioned initialization signal is input to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, the data backed up on the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 (backup data) is cleared. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, the main board changes to the setting change state depending on the input status of the initialization switch 544 and the input status of the setting key when the power is turned on. It is configured such that whether or not to initialize, the range of initialization, etc. can be determined depending on the signal from the initialization switch circuit section 543 and the input signal related to the setting key.

In addition, the initialization switch 544 is divided into one for the main board 102 and one for the payout control board 103, and the backed up data is cleared separately for the main board 102 and the payout control board 103. You can also do this. For example, when the initialization switch 544 is operated when the power is turned on, the backup data for the main board 102 and some backup data of the payout control board 103 are cleared and added to the payout control board 103. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the remaining backup data of the payout control board 103 is cleared when the payout initialization switch (not shown) is further operated.

As described above, the RWM 503 on the main board 102 is supplied with backup voltage from the power supply board 251 and can retain (back up) data even after the power to the Pachinko game machine 10 is cut off. That is, the RWM 503 is provided with a backup area 503a in addition to a memory and area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data and the like. This backup area 503a is used to store the stack pointer and the This is an area for storing values of each register, I/O, etc. Then, when the power is turned on normally or the power outage is resolved, the state of the main board 102 and the like is returned to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area 503a. Here, regarding power cutoff, hereinafter, in addition to "power cutoff", it may be referred to as "power cutoff", but both have the same meaning.

Writing to the backup area 503a is performed when the power is turned off by power-off processing (described later), and restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is performed during power-on processing (described later) when the power is turned on. . As the backup area 503a, it is possible to use an RWM (external RWM) that is externally attached to the CPU 501 and connected to a backup power source.

Further, similarly to the RWM 503 of the main board 102, the RWM 513 in the payout control board 103 is supplied with backup voltage from the power supply board 251 after the power to the Pachinko gaming machine 10 is cut off, so that data can be retained (backed up). It has become. That is, the RWM 513 of the payout control board 103 is provided with a backup area 513a in addition to a memory and area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data and the like. This backup area 513a is used to store the stack pointer and the values of each register, I/O, etc. at the time of power cut-off in the event that the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like (if a power cut occurs). area. Then, when the power is turned on normally or the power outage is resolved, the state of the payout control board 103 is returned to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area 513a.

Writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the power-off processing in the payout control board 103, and each value written in the backup area 513a is restored by the power-on processing (on the payout control board 103) when the power is turned on. control start processing). As the backup area 513a, as in the case of the main board 102, it is possible to use an RWM (external RWM) that is externally attached to the CPU 511 and connected to a backup power source.

The above-described main board 102 is provided with a power outage monitoring circuit section 506 that monitors power interruption due to the above-mentioned power outage or the like. This power outage monitoring circuit unit 506 outputs a power outage signal (power outage signal) to the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. More specifically, the power outage monitoring circuit section 506 monitors a stable DC voltage (for example, 30 volts), which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply section 541 of the power supply board 251, and detects when this voltage becomes less than a predetermined voltage. In this case, the occurrence of a power outage (power cutoff) is detected and the above-mentioned power cutoff signal is output. Based on the input of such a power-off signal, the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 execute a predetermined power-off process.

Note that the electrical characteristics of the main board 102 etc. are such that even after the stable DC voltage becomes less than the predetermined voltage at which a power cut signal is output, there is a sufficient time to perform predetermined processing such as power cut processing. During this period, the output voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, is maintained at a normal value.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the output of the power supply board is supplied to the main board 102 via the payout control board 103. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the output of the power supply board may be supplied to the payout control board 103 via the main board 102, or may be supplied to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 individually through separate systems. You may also do so.

Moreover, the above-mentioned power failure monitoring circuit section 506 can also be arranged at a location other than the main board 102. For example, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be formed on the power supply board 251, and a power failure signal may be input from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to each board on the power supply board 251. Further, it is also possible to omit the input of the power-off signal from the main board 102 to the payout control board 103. Furthermore, the function of the power supply board 251 may be performed by the main board 102. In this case, forming the power supply section 541 on the main board 102 may be considered.

Furthermore, a power outage monitoring circuit unit 506 may be provided in the payout control board 103, and each of the payout control board 103 and the main board 102 may output a power outage signal and perform power outage processing based on the power outage signal. Furthermore, out of the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, the power outage monitoring circuit section 506 may be provided only on the payout control board 103, and the power outage signal may be transmitted from the payout control board 103 to the main board 102.

Here, the above-mentioned main CPU 501, payout CPU 511, etc. are equipped with an NMI (non-maskable interrupt) terminal. In addition, the triggers for executing the power-off process described above include hardware that generates a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) based on the input of a power-off signal indicating a voltage drop to the NMI terminal of the main CPU, and a timer. This is periodic interrupt processing based on settings, such as software that checks a power-off flag set when a voltage drop is detected.

In this embodiment, power-off processing is performed based on a hardware trigger caused by an NMI. A signal can be input to the NMI terminal by, for example, inputting a power interruption signal from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to the NMI terminal. Here, the signal input to the NMI terminal may occur not only when a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit section 506 but also due to noise being mixed into the signal line connected to the NMI terminal. Note that the transition to power-off processing can also be performed based on a software method, as will be described later as another embodiment. Furthermore, it is also possible to set a power-off flag based on a power-off signal input to the NMI terminal and use this as a trigger for executing power-off processing. Although data backup is performed here on the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, the data backup is not limited to this, for example, the data backup of the storage area is performed on the sub-main board 301, and the main It is also possible to perform data backup similarly to the board 102 or the payout control board 103.

Next, the basic functions of the main board 102 will be explained. The main board 102 of this embodiment performs various functions, such as ball entry determination, lottery, and command transmission, through the functions of each of the aforementioned configurations (see FIG. 4).

FIG. 6 shows typical functional means in each of the main board 102, the sub-main board 301, and the sub-sub board 302. Of these, the main board 102 includes a ball entry determination means 110, a first lottery means 111, a second lottery means 112, a regular lottery means 113, a reservation control means 114, a main display control means 115, a special game control means 116, It includes specific game control means 117, opening/closing control means 118, advance information notification means 119, main command transmission means 120, and the like. The main board 102 uses these functional means to perform lottery related to special symbols, lottery related to normal symbols, reservation control, main control display, special game, specific game, opening/closing control, and advance information, as will be explained in order below. Execute notifications, etc.

The above-mentioned ball entry determination means 110 detects the entry of game balls into each winning opening (operating opening, various starting winning openings, big winning opening, general winning opening, out opening, etc.) using sensors provided in each winning opening. Judgment is made based on the signal output from the
<< Win/fail lottery function related to special symbols >>

The first lottery means 111 described above executes a first lottery based on the ball entering the first starting winning hole 62. The first lottery means 111 has the functions of a first lottery value acquisition means 121, a first validity determination means 122, a first symbol determination means 123, and a first pattern determination means 124. The result of the first lottery is represented by the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display section 70 of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7).

Similarly, the second lottery means 112 described above executes a second lottery based on the ball entering the second starting winning hole 63. The second lottery means 112 has the functions of a second lottery value acquisition means 125, a second validity determination means 126, a second symbol determination means 127, and a second pattern determination means 128. The result of the second lottery is represented by a second special symbol that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display section 71 of the main control display device 53 mentioned above.

The first lottery value acquisition means 121 provided in the first lottery means 111 described above converts the value of the jackpot random number related to the first lottery into the first winning lottery value when the ball enters the first starting winning hole 62. Get as. Further, the second lottery value acquisition means 125 provided in the second lottery means 112 described above uses the value of the jackpot random number related to the second lottery as a second win/win, triggered by the entry of the ball into the second starting winning hole 63. Obtained as a lottery value.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number acquired as the first win/fail lottery value and the jackpot random number acquired as the second win/fail lottery value are a combination of a hardware random number (hard random number) and a software random number (soft random number). It is generated by the operation (addition) used. As the hardware random number, for example, a built-in random number generated by a 16-bit random number circuit is used, and as the software random number, a value updated every interrupt by a random number generation program in software is used. Note that either one of hardware random numbers and software random numbers may be used.

The first win/fail determination means 122 in the first lottery means 111 makes a win/fail determination based on the first win/fail lottery value, and determines whether the first win/fail lottery value corresponds to a predetermined value (win value) that is a win. to judge. Similarly, the second win/fail determination means 126 in the second lottery means 112 makes a win/fail determination based on the above-mentioned second win/fail lottery value, so that the second win/fail lottery value becomes a predetermined value (winning value). Determine whether or not it applies. In the win/fail judgment by the first win/fail judgment means 122 and the second win/fail judgment means 126, a win/fail judgment table (for example, FIG. 9 a)) is used. Here, the normal time probability variable time jackpot shown in FIG. 9(a) indicates a random number range that always results in a jackpot, and the probability variable time jackpot indicates a random number range that results in a jackpot only in a probability variation. It is shown that.

The first symbol determining means 123 in the first lottery means 111 and the second symbol determining means 127 in the second lottery means 112 determine whether a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. , the type of special symbol is determined based on the jackpot symbol determination table (see FIG. 10). The jackpot symbol determination table for the first lottery defines the relationship between the symbol lottery value, which is a random number value (symbol random number) related to symbol determination, and the type of special symbol.

Here, the symbol lottery value may also be referred to as a "symbol random number per special symbol" or "symbol random number" related to the special symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, the type of winning includes a small win, and the first symbol determining means 123 and the second symbol determining means 127 are configured to determine the special symbol when a small prize is won in a jackpot lottery related to a special symbol. The type of symbol is determined based on the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 10(c)).

The symbol lottery value, like the above-mentioned win/fail lottery value, is obtained when the ball enters the starting winning hole. Further, the type of special symbol is associated with the type of win, and is linked to the obtained symbol lottery value to determine the type of jackpot and the presence or absence of a small win.

The first pattern determining means 124 in the first lottery means 111 and the second pattern determining means 128 in the second lottery means 112 determine the fluctuation patterns of the special symbols in the corresponding special symbol display sections based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern table. decide. The special symbol variation pattern table defines the relationship between a large number of special symbol variation patterns and a pattern lottery value that is a random number value (variation pattern random number) related to determining the variation pattern of the special symbol.

The pattern lottery value, like the above-mentioned win/fail lottery value, is acquired when a ball enters the starting winning hole. Furthermore, the fluctuation patterns related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol vary depending on various gaming conditions, such as when hitting the jackpot, when winning, whether or not there is a reach, whether there is a time reduction, the number of holds, the number of fluctuations after the jackpot, etc. A plurality of different special figure fluctuation pattern tables are provided.

The variation pattern related to the special symbol (special symbol variation pattern) defines the time from the start of variation to the stop (variation time) in the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure fluctuation pattern defines various long and short fluctuation times, for example, from less than one second to several tens of seconds, depending on the type. That is, each special symbol fluctuation pattern has a fluctuation time determined as a condition for ending the fluctuation display, and in the first special symbol display section 70 or the second special symbol display section 71 (see FIG. 7), the special symbol When the variable display of symbols is started and a specified variable time has elapsed, the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

Many of the special symbol fluctuation patterns that are selected when time is shortened have a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the special symbol fluctuation patterns that are selected when time is not reduced.In other words, when time is reduced, It can be said that the average value per variation of the selected variation time is shorter than the average value per variation of the variation time selected during non-time saving. In addition, regarding time saving (time saving game), it can be said that it is a gaming state where the special symbol variation efficiency is high (the time required for one variation is short). However, the special symbol fluctuation patterns that can be selected in the case of non-time saving and when the number of reservations is 4 include those with shorter fluctuation times compared to the specific special symbol fluctuation patterns in time saving. There is.

Further, in this embodiment, most of the variation patterns selected in a predetermined situation such as when the probability changes are extremely short variation times (for example, about 0.6 seconds). In such a situation, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and an accompanying performance is performed based on a very short period of variation pattern.
＜＜Relationship between the random numbers and setting values related to special symbols＞＞

Next, the relationship between the win/fail random number and the setting value regarding the special symbol will be explained. FIG. 9(a) shows the random numbers for the set value "1" among the set values "1" to "6" in this embodiment. Regarding the win/fail random number table with the setting value "1" shown in FIG. is "0 to 205". Furthermore, in normal times, the random value range "206 to 64875" is an outlier in both the first lottery and the second lottery.

On the other hand, when the probability is high (when the probability is variable), the jackpot value is "206 to 615" for both the first lottery and the second lottery. Furthermore, in both the first lottery and the second lottery, the random value range "616 to 64875" is an outlier in both the normal time and the probability change time. Furthermore, for both the first lottery and the second lottery, the random number range "64876 to 65535" is the small winning value both in the normal time and in the probability change time.

FIG. 12 shows a list of winning values for each set value. Among these, for the setting value "1", as shown in FIG. 9(a), "0 to 205" is the normal jackpot value. Therefore, the number of random numbers is 206, and the normal jackpot probability is 1/318 (≈206/65536). On the other hand, for the setting value "2", the normal jackpot value is "0 to 206". Therefore, the number of random numbers is 207, and the normal jackpot probability is 1/317 (≈207/65536).

Furthermore, for the setting value "3", the normal jackpot value is "0 to 207". The number of random numbers is 208, and the normal jackpot probability is 1/315 (≈208/65536). Regarding the setting value "4", the normal jackpot value is "0 to 208". The number of random numbers is 209, and the normal jackpot probability is 1/314 (≈209/65536).

Furthermore, for the set value "5", the normal jackpot value is "0 to 209". The number of random numbers is 210, and the normal jackpot probability is 1/312 (≈208/65536). For the set value "6", the normal jackpot value is "0 to 210". The number of random numbers is 211, and the normal jackpot probability is 1/311 (≈211/65536). In this way, the range of jackpot values is determined so that the larger the numerical value of the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability becomes.

When the probability is high, the set value is "1", the jackpot value is "0 to 615", and the jackpot probability is 1/106. For setting values ``2'' to ``6'', the jackpot values are ``0 to 618,'' ``0 to 621,'' ``0 to 624,'' ``0 to 627,'' and ``0 to 630,'' in order. The approximate jackpot probabilities are, in order, "1/106", "1/105", "1/105", "1/104", and "1/104".

Here, the reason why the general jackpot probability is described as including the same values such as "1/105" and "1/104" is because the jackpot probability is expressed by rounding the decimal point. In this embodiment, the range of the jackpot value is determined so that the larger the numerical value of the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability is. Further, the probability magnification for low probability and high probability is "3x" for all setting values, which is common.

Regarding the small hit, the random number range is "64876 to 65535" regardless of the setting value in both the normal time and the high probability time. Therefore, the probability of occurrence of a small hit is 1/99 regardless of the probability state or setting value. Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 12, the design values of the ball payout rate are 97%, 98%, 99%, 100%, 101%, and 102% for the set values "1" to "6", respectively.

In addition, in the examples of FIG. 9(a) and FIG. 12, "0" which is the minimum value of the numerical range is set as the jackpot value, but the jackpot value is not limited to this, and "0" may be excluded from the jackpot value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent fraud in the event that fraud is committed, such as intentionally setting the validity/falsity numerical value updated by resetting the power source to the minimum value. Furthermore, it is possible not to assign "0" to a small win, or to not assign the maximum value (here, "65535") to a jackpot or a small win.

In this embodiment, a preliminary judgment (so-called pre-reading) is performed on the winning/failure lottery results performed using the random numbers shown in FIG. 9(a) and FIG. 12. This will be described later based on (a) and (b).
<<Various lottery functions related to normal symbols>>

Next, the above-mentioned common map lottery means 113 will be explained. The common symbol lottery means 113 includes a common symbol lottery value acquisition means 129, a common symbol determination means 130, a common symbol determining means 131, and a common symbol pattern determining means 132. Then, when the above-mentioned ball entry determining means 110 detects the passing of a game ball through the operating port 68, the ordinary symbol lottery means 113 executes a lottery related to ordinary symbols (general symbol lottery) based on this detection result. do.

In this common symbol lottery, the common symbol lottery value acquisition means 129 acquires the common symbol lottery value, which is a random number related to the common symbol (common symbol random number), and the common symbol determination means 131 determines the common symbol determination table. Referenced. In this ordinary figure determination table, the correspondence relationship between the ordinary figure lottery value and the type of ordinary symbol is defined. Then, the common symbol correctness determination means 130 determines whether or not the common symbol linked to the common symbol lottery value corresponds to a hit, and if it corresponds to a win, the type of win is determined. be done.

In addition, a normal pattern lottery value is acquired when the ball enters the operating port 68, and the normal pattern determination means 132 uses the acquired general pattern lottery value to determine a variation pattern related to the normal symbol (a normal pattern fluctuation pattern). ) is determined. Each general pattern fluctuation pattern is associated with a general pattern lottery value, which is a random number related to the general pattern fluctuation pattern (general pattern fluctuation pattern random number), and the game situation is linked to the obtained general pattern pattern lottery value. The fluctuation pattern of the common map is determined according to the

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the regular symbol lottery value and the regular symbol pattern lottery value, which are random numbers related to the regular symbol, are created using only software random numbers.
<<Functions related to holding special symbols>>

Next, the aforementioned hold control means 114 will be explained. The reservation control means 114 includes a first reservation means 133 , a second reservation means 134 , and a regular figure reservation means 135 . Among these, the first holding means 133 is such that when a new ball enters the first starting winning hole 62, if a predetermined fluctuation start condition related to the first special symbol is not satisfied, the first holding means 133 will not be acquired by the ball entering. Information (first special symbol pending storage information) related to various random numbers (first win/fail lottery value, first symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily retained and stored. In this embodiment, the upper limit value of reservation related to the first special symbol is set to 4, and reservation related to the first special symbol is possible within a range that does not exceed this upper limit value.

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that was being executed when the above-mentioned ball entered has finished, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol that occurred before the above-mentioned ball entry has finished. If there is no reservation related to this, the variation start condition related to the first special symbol is satisfied, and a new symbol variation related to the first special symbol is permitted.

Regarding the second holding means 134 described above, when a new ball enters the second starting prize opening 63, if the predetermined fluctuation start condition related to the second special symbol is not satisfied, the ball will not be acquired by entering the ball. The information related to the various random numbers (second win/fail lottery value, second symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily held and stored.

When the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that was being executed when the above-mentioned ball enters has ended, the fluctuation start condition for the second special symbol is satisfied, and a new symbol fluctuation for the second special symbol is established. will be permitted. In addition, in this example, the upper limit value of reservation concerning the 2nd special symbol is set to 4 pieces similarly to the 1st special symbol.

For the above-mentioned first special symbol and second special symbol, when the symbol that starts the special game stops and the special game is controlled, the fluctuation start condition is determined after the special game ends.
<<Functions related to holding normal symbols>>

Next, the above-mentioned general map holding means 135 will be explained. If a ball enters the operating port 68 (see FIG. 1) and a predetermined fluctuation start condition related to the normal symbol is not met, the normal symbol holding means 135 stores a random number obtained by the entering ball (common symbol lottery). (values, etc.) (general figure pending storage information) is temporarily held and stored. Then, until the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol related to the above-mentioned ball entry is not permitted. In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of reservation related to normal symbols is set to 4, and reservation related to normal symbols is possible within a range that does not exceed this upper limit value.

When the fluctuation display of the normal symbol that was being executed when the above-mentioned ball enters has ended and the normal electric accessory is not operating, the fluctuation start condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, and a new display for the normal symbol is established. Design variations will be permitted.
<<Functions related to main control display>>

Next, the above-mentioned main display control means 115 will be explained. The main display control means 115 has a first special figure control means 136, a second special figure control means 137, a regular figure control means 138, a pending display control means 139, and other display control means 140. Among these, the first special symbol control means 136 controls the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 70 (see FIG. 7) according to the variation pattern of the first special symbol determined by the first lottery means 111. A display (for example, a flashing display in which a predetermined portion of LED indicator lights flash every 100 msec) is performed. Then, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the determined symbol in the first special symbol display section 70 after the variation time determined by the variation pattern has elapsed.

Further, the second special symbol control means 137 causes the second special symbol display section 71 ( (see FIG. 7), a variable display of the second special symbol is performed. Then, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the determined symbol in the second special symbol display section 71 after the variation time determined by the variation pattern has elapsed.

Further, if the above-mentioned variation start condition regarding the normal symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol control means 138 controls the normal symbol display section 59 (see FIG. 7) according to the variation pattern of the normal symbol determined by the common symbol lottery means 113. ) to display a fluctuating pattern of normal symbols. Furthermore, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the determined symbol in the normal symbol display section 59 after a variation time determined by the variation pattern has elapsed.

Furthermore, the reservation display control means 139 displays the number of reservations related to the above-mentioned first special symbol, second special symbol, and normal symbol. These reserved numbers are displayed in the first special symbol memory display section 83, second special symbol memory display section 84, and normal symbol memory display section 85 of the main control display device 53 shown in FIG. be exposed. Moreover, the above-mentioned other display control means 140 controls the display on the main control display device 53 other than the above-mentioned first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol, and various pending displays.
<<Functions related to special games>>

Next, the above-mentioned special game control means 116 will be explained. When the special game control means 116 wins a jackpot and the special symbols are stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode, the special game control means 116 determines that the special game activation condition is satisfied, and executes a predetermined operation according to the type of jackpot as described above. A special game is executed to be opened in a manner (a predetermined number of unit games or an opening pattern of the big prize opening during the unit game).
<<Functions related to specific games>>

Next, the above-mentioned specific game control means 117 will be explained. The specific game control means 117 performs control related to the above-mentioned probability change, time saving, etc. The specific game control means 117 shifts the gaming state after the end of the special game to a variable probability state, a time saving state, etc., depending on the type of jackpot. The variable probability state is not attached to all types of jackpots, but to some types of jackpots. Furthermore, for some jackpots, the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot, and for other jackpots with variable probability, it continues until the total number of variable displays after the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). . During the probability variable state, the probability of winning the jackpot by the first lottery means 111 and the second lottery means 112 is maintained at a higher value than in the normal state, which is the non-probability variable state.

Further, the time saving state continues until the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined end condition number of times (for example, 100 times, etc.) counting from the end of the special game. Furthermore, during the time saving, the first pattern determining means 124 and the second pattern determining means 128 select the variable pattern for time saving so that the variable display time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generally shorter than in the normal state. Select.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the time saving is executed as a specific game, the ball entry facilitation game is executed, and the operation of the normal electric accessory is facilitated, and it is placed at the entrance of the second starting prize opening. The opening/closing blades can be opened easily. Opening/closing control of the opening/closing blades is controlled by opening/closing control means 118, which will be described later.
<<Functions related to opening/closing control>>

Next, the aforementioned opening/closing control means 118 will be explained. The opening/closing control means 118 controls the opening/closing operation of the normal electric accessories (opening/closing blades) of the second starting winning opening 63 and the big winning opening device 90. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific manner, the opening/closing control means 118 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric accessory solenoid 76 to open the normal electric accessory in the second starting prize opening 63. Further, the opening/closing control means 118 performs control to send an opening instruction to the big winning opening (opening) solenoid 80 in the special game, and opens the big winning opening device 90.
<<Functions related to advance information notification>>

Next, the above-mentioned advance information notification means 119 will be explained. The prior information notification means 119 is acquired when a ball enters the first starting winning hole 62 or the second starting winning hole 63, regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display corresponding to the entering ball is suspended. Processing is performed to transmit information related to the various random numbers to the sub-board (here, the sub-main board 301) as advance notification information.

The above-mentioned advance notification information includes each of the acquired winning lottery values (first winning lottery value or second winning lottery value), each symbol lottery value (first symbol lottery value or second symbol lottery value), and each pattern. Information such as what kind of win/fail range, symbol range, and pattern range the lottery value (first pattern lottery value or second pattern lottery value) belongs to can be exemplified.

Note that by transmitting such advance notice information, various pre-read effects are possible on the sub-board 104 side. Examples of pre-read effects include suspended notices and continuous notices, the details of which will be described later.
<<Functions related to command transmission>>

Next, the above-mentioned main command transmitting means 120 will be explained. The main command transmitting means 120 transmits a command (main command) from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. Commands are sent from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 at various timings, such as when winning a prize, when special symbols start changing, when special symbols stop changing, and when a jackpot occurs, including various information. .
<Basic functions of sub-board>

Next, the basic functions of the aforementioned sub-board 104 will be explained. In this embodiment, the sub-board 104 is composed of a sub-main board 301 and a sub-sub board 302, and performs various functions such as receiving commands from the main board 102, determining performance patterns, controlling performance display, and executing performance.

As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-main board 301 includes main command receiving means 141, effect pattern determining means 142, sub-main command transmitting means 143, and the like. Furthermore, the sub-main board 301 is equipped with functional means such as a sound control means 144 for controlling speaker output, etc., and a light control means 145 for controlling game effect lamp output, etc.

The performance pattern determined by the performance pattern determining means 142 includes information specifying the display performance to be displayed on the performance display device 60 and the sound performance and light performance to be performed in conjunction with the display performance as necessary. A performance suggesting a high degree of expectation of a jackpot is executed during the variable display of the symbol 190. Here, the "expectation level" in the present example can be rephrased as "reliability level." In addition, "expectation level" can be broadly defined as, for example, "a player's expectation that the player will be in a favorable (convenient, desirable) gaming state (including situations where performances are performed that are not performed frequently)." It can also be explained as "the degree to which it is possible." In the following, regarding the "expectation level" of a jackpot, we will discuss the performance stages (normal pattern, chance-up pattern, confirmed pattern) that increase the expectation of a jackpot due to fluctuations when they appear among the same type of preview performance patterns, When checking the winning variation pattern information (variation pattern in winning variation) that causes the effect of 1 and the losing variation pattern information (variation pattern in losing variation), the winning variation pattern is included in the variation pattern corresponding to the effect of 1. It may be used for each statement that describes the probability of winning, and in general, a ``highly expected performance'' refers to a performance that often results in a jackpot when the performance occurs. In addition, in the following explanation, when referring to "expectation level", "expectation level of development", "expectation level of execution of performance", etc., instead of "level of expectation of jackpot" or "level of expectation of winning", etc. , sometimes refers to a broad sense of ``expectation level'' that cannot be said to be directly linked to a jackpot.

When the performance pattern is determined by the performance pattern determining means 142, performance pattern information indicating the determined performance pattern is transmitted to the sub-sub board 302 as a sub-main command via the sub-main command transmission means 143. Further, the command sent from the sub-main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302 includes sound information and the like in order to read sound data, lamp data, etc. from the ROM of the sub-sub board.

As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-sub board 302 is equipped with a sub-main command receiving means 146, an effect execution control means 147, and the like. Then, in the sub-sub board 302, the effect execution control means 147 sequentially outputs necessary image data to the liquid crystal unit 42 (see FIG. 4) based on the sub-main commands from the sub-main board 301, and forms an animation image. Then, a moving image for presentation is displayed on the presentation display device 60.
<Specific examples of aspects related to specific games>

Next, specific aspects of the above-mentioned specific game will be explained. As mentioned above, as specific games, there is a special symbol probability variation function (probability change), a special symbol variation time shortening function (time saving), and a game that facilitates ball entry (normal symbol probability variation function, normal symbol variation time shortening). function, a combination of the opening extension function of ordinary electric accessories) is provided. Then, at least one of these various specific games is executed according to the result of the jackpot lottery (stop display symbol of the special symbol) or the game result during the jackpot. In this embodiment, instead of using the above-mentioned so-called ST machine, a specification is adopted in which a variable probability period continues until the next jackpot for some jackpots, and the specific aspect thereof will be described later.
＜＜Probability variation game＞＞

The above-mentioned probability change is to change the probability state of the game related to the special symbol after a jackpot so that the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is higher than the normal probability state. In a pachinko game machine that employs ST, the duration of the variable probability state (variable probability period) is determined based on the number of variations of the special symbol.

The number of times the special symbol changes is determined as one time from the variable display to the stop display of the special symbol. Then, in the probability variable period in ST, the total number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the special game is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). In this way, the function that allows the variable probability period to end before the next jackpot occurs can be referred to as ST, frequency cut probability variable, or the like.
＜＜Fluctuating time reduction game＞＞

The above-mentioned time saving is to generally shorten the variation time of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) in the main control display device 53 as compared to the case of the normal game. Here, "generally shortened" does not necessarily mean that it will be shorter than the normal game in all cases, and in some cases, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is equal to the normal game, or when it is longer than the normal game. This means that it can include. And, according to this time saving, since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened, even if winnings occur in the starting winning hole (first starting winning hole 62 and second starting winning hole 63) in succession, the special The fluctuating display and stop display of symbols can be smoothly performed at short intervals, and it is possible to secure many opportunities for jackpot lottery.

Furthermore, the duration of the time saving state (time period) is determined based on the number of changes in the special symbol, similarly to the probability variable state. In this embodiment, the time saving state continues until the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times).

In addition, in the example mentioned above, although a probability variable period and a time period are set to the same period, it is good also considering a probability variable period and a time period as mutually different periods. For example, it is possible to set the probability variable period to 104 times and the time period to 100 times. Further, the variable probability period and the time period are not limited to being constant. For example, the probability variable period can be set to 4 times, 25 times, 100 times, etc. depending on the type of jackpot that has occurred. Further, the time period can be set to 25 times, 50 times, 75 times, 100 times, etc. depending on the type of jackpot that has occurred.

Furthermore, it is possible to provide a so-called fall lottery function. Examples of this falling lottery include the following. For example, after the probability change or time saving reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) that is less than the maximum number of changes mentioned above (here 100 times), every time the special symbol changes until the maximum number of changes is reached, A lottery (specific game end lottery) is executed to determine whether or not to end the probability change or time saving. If this specific game end lottery is won, the probability variation and time saving are ended, and the game state from the next variation returns to the normal state without probability variation or time saving.

Furthermore, it is not limited to executing both the probability change and time saving, but it is also possible to execute only one of them in a specific game. For example, depending on the type of jackpot won, it is possible to award only the time saving and not the variable probability, or it is possible to make it so that the time saving is not awarded and only the variable probability is awarded.
＜＜Game that makes it easier to enter the ball＞＞

Next, the above-mentioned ball entry facilitation game will be explained. This ball entry facilitation game is a game state in which functions related to normal electric accessories are set advantageously for the player, and the opening mode of the second starting prize opening 63 can be made easier to accept game balls than usual. be. When the ball entry facilitation game is executed, a second The ease of entering the ball into the starting winning hole 63 is increased, and a state where it is easy to enter the ball is formed. In relation to this "ball entry facilitation game" and the aforementioned "base", "electric support", etc., the following will be described as "high base", "high base state", "low base", "low base state", " Terms such as "non-electric support" are used. In the following, the "low base state" corresponds to the "non-electrical support state", and the "high base state" corresponds to the "electrical support state".

Among the above-mentioned various control modes for normal symbols, the time reduction related to normal symbols is a control mode in which the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than the normal state, and the probability fluctuation related to the normal symbol is the control mode that reduces the winning probability of the normal symbol. It is a control mode (probability change related to normal symbols) that improves the control over the normal state. Furthermore, the opening extension related to the normal electric accessory is a control mode in which the opening time of the second starting prize opening 63 is opened for a longer time (long opening) than the opening time (short opening) during normal times (during non-specific games). be.

As mentioned above, the ball entry facilitation game during a specific game uses the three functions of shortening the time of normal symbols, changing the probability of the opening lottery, and extending the opening of the normal electric accessory to enter the second starting prize opening 63. Improves ball ease. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which one or two of these three functions are used to increase the ease of entering the ball into the second starting winning hole 63. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which switching between a period in which at least one of the three functions is performed and a period in which it is not performed is performed depending on the gaming state.

The duration of such a ball entry facilitation game can be determined based on the time period related to the special symbol. For example, it is possible to adopt a control mode in which the ball entry facilitation game is continued during the time saving related to the special symbol, and the ball entry facilitation game is ended when the time reduction related to the special symbol ends. In this case, the normal symbol variation pattern (normal symbol variation pattern) in which the symbol variation starts after the time saving of the special symbol ends is provided for normal times (non-specific game time). It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern from among the fluctuation patterns.
<Main effects on pachinko machines>
<<Basic display mode of production patterns>>

Next, the main aspects of various effects executed by the sub-main board 301 and the sub-sub board 302 based on commands from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 will be explained. First, the basic display mode of the effect pattern 190 (see FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b)) will be explained here. It should be noted that extremely diverse display modes and control modes are defined for the effect pattern 190 with respect to matters such as its type, function, purpose, cooperation with other effect displays, and the like. However, in order to avoid complicating the explanation, basic matters will be explained here, and more detailed matters related to the effect pattern 190 will be described later as appropriate.

The performance symbols 190 are variably displayed on the performance display device 60 in conjunction with the special symbols being variably displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 8(a)). Furthermore, the performance symbol 190 is stopped and displayed on the performance display device 60 (see FIG. 8(b)) in conjunction with the special symbol being stopped and displayed on the main control display device 53.

The stop symbol displayed when the performance symbol 190 stops is composed of a combination of three symbols: a left performance symbol 190a, a middle performance symbol 190b, and a right performance symbol 190c. If the result of the jackpot lottery on the main board 102 is a jackpot, a combination of three symbols, such as ``777'' or ``555,'' will be used as a stop symbol representing a jackpot. Is displayed. In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, for example, "767", "928", "331", etc., one or all of the performance symbols may be created in a combination different from other performance symbols. The symbol 190 is stopped and displayed.

Here, the "stopped symbols" and "stopped symbols" in this embodiment mean that the three performance symbols 190 are "definitely stopped." That is, even if the three performance symbols 190a to 190c are displayed in the display area 194 of the performance display device 60 in a state in which a combination such as "767" or "928" is maintained, it will not be "determined to stop". It does not apply to what you did. The state in which the performance symbols 190 maintain their combinations but have not yet reached a "determined stop" can be referred to as a "temporary stop" state.

As a display mode of such a "temporary stop", for example, a state in which the effect pattern 190 is vibrating (shaking) little by little can be exemplified. A mode of temporary stop in which the performance symbols 190 are swaying little by little while maintaining the combination can be referred to as a mode of "swing fluctuation" or the like. Examples of the manner in which the effect pattern 190 shakes during this "temporary stop" include vertical or horizontal linear movement, horizontal rotational movement, etc., and the range of movement can be exemplified by several millimeters.

Further, as an example of the display mode of the above-mentioned "determined stop", a state in which all the performance symbols 190a to 190c are stopped while maintaining their combination after going through a state of temporary stop can be exemplified. Furthermore, at the time of this "determined stop", it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the stop has been determined. The effects indicating that the display has been confirmed include maintaining the confirmed stop state for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 1 second), and displaying each of the fixed and stopped effect symbols 190a to 190c in a state with special effects added. For example, it may be displayed (design effect), or an LED (lamp) provided on the center decoration 64 may be lit.

By performing a temporary stop (temporary stop display) effect in this way, it is possible to make it appear as if a plurality of fluctuations are being executed during one fluctuation. In addition, with the provisional stop effect, the player is asked whether or not there will be a confirmed stop (in other words, whether the player will change again without making a confirmed stop, whether he will make a confirmed stop and win, or whether he will make a confirmed stop and lose). etc.) will be able to stimulate expectations.

Here, the pattern effects include lighting each of the production patterns 190a to 190c only momentarily (for example, about 0.5 seconds), making a bright spot circulate around each of the production patterns 190a to 190c once or multiple times, and other effects. It is possible to employ various methods such as enlarging or reducing the patterns 190a to 190c, moving the performance patterns 190a to 190c by several millimeters and returning them to their original positions.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned "reach" display mode, a production pattern that maintains the reach combination may be displayed in the above-mentioned "temporary stop" mode. Then, after this "temporary stop" reaches-for-reach display, the symbols that have been fluctuatingly displayed (in this case, the middle effect symbol 190b) form a winning combination (missing reach combination) and "temporarily stop", causing the combination to stop. An example of such an effect is that a "determined stop" is performed and the variable display ends while the state is maintained. In addition, from the state in which the three performance symbols 190a to 190c are "temporarily stopped" due to the combination of missed reach, the medium performance symbol 190b resumes fluctuation after displaying a predetermined cut-in image (cut-in performance). An example can also be given of a performance (second half reach) in which the reach performance develops into a highly reliable one (relatively high reliability regarding jackpots).

Note that the scrolling display mode of the effect pattern 190 is not limited to the above-mentioned vertical scrolling, and various display modes can be adopted. Other display modes include, for example, a horizontal scrolling mode in the horizontal direction (from right to left, etc.), and a mode in which the left effect pattern 190a to the right effect pattern 190c are individually rotated (rotated) around the vertical axis. , a rotation mode for performing a variable display can be exemplified. Further, for example, the left presentation pattern 190a to the right presentation pattern 190c are enlarged in the display area 194 from the back to the front, that is, from the back of the screen to the front, along a straight trajectory or a curved (swivel) trajectory. An example of a display mode is one in which the images are played out sequentially. Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt a scrolling display mode in which the effect patterns move from the rear to the front and descend from the top to the bottom.

Furthermore, the scrolling mode is not limited to adopting any one of the various modes described above; for example, when a predetermined effect is executed, a predetermined scrolling mode is switched to another scrolling mode. It is also possible. Furthermore, it is also possible to vary the scrolling mode for each of the plurality of presentation modes.

Further, as a scrolling mode to definitively notify a jackpot, a full rotation effect may be performed. In this full-rotation performance, decorative patterns such as the performance patterns 190a to 190c are scrolled at a low speed while remaining aligned.

Also, when a reach occurs, it is possible to output a reach voice as a sound output. This reach voice is a sound that is generated when a reach is established or after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the reach is established, and is a preview that indicates the degree of expectation of winning. By executing this reach voice, when it becomes a reach, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning in combination with image display, movement of accessories, etc.

In addition, in FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b), a display mode in which the combination of performance symbols 190 is stopped and displayed only in the middle row in the vertical direction of the display area 194 is illustrated, and the effective line is in the horizontal direction. There is only one line. However, the number of effective lines is not limited to this, for example, it is also possible to set the number of effective lines to 2 lines or 5 lines.

Furthermore, as illustrated in FIG. 8(b), the effect design 190 is composed of a part that means a predetermined symbol such as a number (the element design that is the symbol element effect design described above), and a pattern that represents other than the predetermined symbol. It is possible to configure it by a combination with a part (an element pattern that is a non-symbolic element performance pattern). Examples of the part consisting of a pattern representing a symbol other than a predetermined symbol include various design drawings, portraits, and combinations thereof. It is also possible to do this. In the example of FIG. 8(b), a heart pattern is used as a pattern representing a symbol other than the predetermined symbol.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b), the aforementioned reduced effect pattern display area 361 is superimposed on the screen. This reduced performance symbol display area 361 displays the performance symbols (also referred to as "mini performance symbols", "mini design", etc.) corresponding to the performance symbols 190a to 190c in a size smaller than each of the performance symbols 190a to 190c. It is something that can be shown. By displaying the mini symbols in the reduced performance symbol display area 361, the status of whether or not each of the performance symbols 190a to 190c is changing, and the status of each of the performance symbols 190a to 190c when they are stopped (the situation when they are temporarily stopped) can be displayed. ) can be displayed inconspicuously separately from each of the performance symbols 190a to 190c.

Furthermore, by displaying the reduced performance symbol display area 361, the transparency of the performance patterns related to the performance symbols 190a to 190c increases, and even if the performance is diversified by providing a performance pattern that is no longer visible to the player, the performance patterns It is possible to show the situations 190a to 190c to the player. For example, when performing a background preview effect that covers the entire screen (a performance with high expectations for a jackpot in which a specific character is displayed large in the background), this background preview effect is displayed with priority over the effect patterns 190a to 190c. By increasing the transparency of the performance symbols 190a to 190c in order for the player to see them, the visibility of the background preview performance will not be significantly reduced, and at the same time, because of the display of the reduced performance symbol display area 361, Fluctuations and stoppages can be ascertained.

Furthermore, in addition to such a reduced performance pattern display area 361, whether each performance pattern 190a to 190c is changing or not, and which of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 is being displayed, For example, it is possible to display a pattern inconspicuously using small one-digit numbers. Such a pattern can be called a "guarantee pattern" or the like. The display position of this security symbol can be set so that it will not be hidden even when one or more movable performance members appear in front of the performance display device 60. Furthermore, the security symbol can be displayed at a position where it will not be hidden no matter which movable presentation member appears, or it may be changed in accordance with the movable presentation member that appears.
<<Example of production pattern>>

Next, the above-mentioned performance pattern will be explained. A large number of performance patterns are provided in association with variation patterns determined by the main board 102. Furthermore, the performance pattern includes performance patterns including performance symbols 190. More specifically, the production pattern defines a production process such as a variation process from the start of variation to the stop of variation for the selected production pattern 190, a background displayed in combination with the production pattern 190, and a story development. There is. There are production patterns that correspond to the above-mentioned "with reach" and "without reach".

Among these, when the performance pattern "with reach" is executed, a ready-to-win performance is performed on the performance display device 60 in which if one more performance symbol (here, the medium performance symbol 190b) is aligned, the player will win the jackpot. When the result of the winning/failure lottery regarding the special symbol is a jackpot, a display of matching numbers such as "777" and "333" according to the type of jackpot is performed by the finalized and stopped performance symbol 190. In addition, when the result of the lottery concerning the special symbol is a loss, a combination indicating a loss such as ``767'' or ``515'' is performed using the effect pattern 190 that has been fixed and stopped.

Furthermore, when a "no reach" production pattern is executed, a no reach combination in which the left production symbol 190a and the right production symbol 190c are not a reach combination, such as "928" or "331", is executed. This is performed using the effect pattern 190 that has been fixed and stopped.

Some of these production patterns have variable times of varying lengths, and in particular, the "with reach" variation patterns include ones whose varying times extend to several minutes. In addition, in this example, in the variation pattern related to the special symbol mentioned above (see FIGS. 11(a) to (c)), "No reach (approximately 3 seconds to 10 seconds)" and "Normal reach (10 seconds to 20 seconds)" There are performance patterns without reach, normal reach performance patterns, and super reach performance patterns that correspond to ``super reach (reach with high reliability of jackpot) (approximately 30 seconds to 2 minutes)''. In these performance patterns, for example, a plurality of performance patterns are associated with one fluctuation pattern, and the number of performance patterns is more diverse than the above-mentioned fluctuation patterns. Furthermore, "super reach" can be rephrased as "SP (special) reach."
＜＜Display of pending effects regarding special designs＞＞

Next, a suspension display (suspension performance display) related to a special symbol performed on the performance display device 60 will be explained. At the bottom of the display area 194 of the performance display device 60, as shown in FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b), there is a first pending number display section 196 that indicates the number of pending lottery values in the first game, and A second pending number display section 197 indicating the number of pending lottery values in the second game is displayed. Note that here, in order to simplify the explanation and illustration, each pending display is represented by a perfect circle, but the pending display may be performed using other shapes, combinations of colors, character images, animations, etc.

In the present embodiment, when a hold related to the first game occurs, a predetermined hold is displayed on the first hold count display section 196 described above. Furthermore, when the number of pending items increases, a pending display is added. When the number of reservations reaches the upper limit, four reservations are displayed in the first reservation number display section 196, as shown in FIG. 8(a).

Further, the reservation display in the first reservation number display section 196 can be performed from the first display position to the fourth display position. That is, the first pending number display section 196 includes the first to fourth display positions, and the rightmost part of the first pending number display section 196 when viewed from the player is the first display position. It becomes. A second display position, a third display position, and a fourth display position are provided in order toward the left end. Furthermore, hereinafter, the hold displays performed at the first display position to the fourth display position are respectively referred to as "hold 1", "hold 2", "hold 3", and "hold 4".

For example, in the effect display device 60, a hold occurs while the effect symbols 190 related to the first game are being played, and in a situation where not even one hold is displayed on the first hold number display section 196. Then, a hold display is displayed at the first display position at the right end (the above-mentioned "Hold 1" position). At this time, it is assumed that no other pending display has been performed and "Hold 2" to "Hold 4" have not occurred. In this situation where "Hold 1" is occurring, if a hold is further generated, the display related to the generated hold is displayed at the position of "Hold 2" to the left of "Hold 1". Then, in a situation where "Hot 1" and "Hot 2" are displayed, but "Hot 3" and "Hot 4" are not displayed, and another hold occurs, "Hot 3" is displayed according to the number of holds that have occurred. ``Hot 4'' is displayed.

Then, if the fluctuation display that was being executed when "Hot 1" occurred has ended and the other fluctuation start conditions related to the first game are also satisfied, the suspended storage information related to the above-mentioned "Hot 1" is At this stage, the pending display of "Hold 1" moves to the right side of the first pending number display section 196. The fluctuation information display section 195 is provided on the right side of the first reservation number display section 196. This variation information display section 195 is an area that displays information related to the variation display being executed at that time (the variation information). In other words, when a variable display related to the corresponding pending storage information is executed, the pending display of "Hold 1" moves to the variable information display section 195 and changes to the variable information display 198.

Here, when moving the pending display of "Hold 1" to the relevant variable information display section 195, display elements such as the size, color, form, etc. of the item may be changed. In the examples shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the size is expanded when changing the pending display of "HOLD 1" to the relevant variable information display 198. Further, in FIGS. 8A and 8B, a state is illustrated in which the first pending number display section 196 displays three pending displays, "Hold 1" to "Hold 3".

Here, the display of a moving image representing a new hold display when a hold occurs can be referred to as an "occurrence display" or a "hold occurrence animation" related to the hold. In addition, when the hold is extinguished, the first hold number display section 196 (or the second hold number display section 197) displays a moving image when moving the hold display using "shift display" or "shift animation". ”, etc. Furthermore, the display of the fluctuation information display 198 on the fluctuation information display section 195 can also be referred to as a "reserved digestion transmission image", a "fluctuation compatible image", etc. In addition, in order to distinguish from the pending number display area 367 that represents the number of pending items, the first pending number display section 196 and the second pending number display section 197 are replaced by the first pending image display section 196 and the second pending image display section. It is also possible to call it 197 or the like.

As described above, when the hold display in "Hold 1" moves to the relevant variable information display section 195, the waiting order of the subsequent hold display moves up, and "Hold 2" shifts to the position of "Hold 1". Furthermore, if there is a "safety 3" or a "safety 4", the "safety 3" is shifted to the position of "safety 2", and the "safety 4" is shifted to the position of "safety 3". If another hold occurs in such a situation, a new "Hold 4" will occur, and the number of holds will reach the upper limit. Further, if no new hold is generated, the hold display is shifted with the start of the next variable display, and the waiting order of each hold is moved up.

It should be noted that, in a broad sense, including the state in which the hold display in "Hold 1" to "Hold 4" changes to the fluctuating information display 198 in the fluctuating information display section 195, can be regarded as a hold performance. Not limited to this, the pending display in "Secure 1" to "Secure 4" is treated as a pending display, and the state changed to the relevant variable information display 198 in the relevant variable information display section 195 is not included in the pending display. It is also possible.

In addition, if a ball enters the first starting winning hole 62 in a situation where the fluctuating display related to the performance symbol 190 is not being performed and the number of reservations is 0, "Hold 1" will not be displayed (or will not be displayed momentarily). ), and the variation information display 198 is displayed directly (or via shift animation) on the variation information display section 195. Only in such a case, it is also possible to handle such that the relevant fluctuation information display 198 in the relevant fluctuation information display section 195 is not included in the pending display.

Next, the above-mentioned second reservation number display section 197 will be explained, but the explanation of the same points as the first reservation number display section 196 will be omitted. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the second pending number display section 197 is located on the opposite side of the first pending number display section 196 (on the right side as seen from the player) with the above-mentioned fluctuation information display section 195 in between. ) are arranged in a color different from that of the first pending image so that the relationships between "Ho 1" to "Ho 4" are symmetrical.

Furthermore, the pending display can be displayed in various ways depending on the gaming status. For example, when the probability of a jackpot lottery is a normal probability and a case where a high probability is controlled, the mode of the hold display may be made different when the performance mode is controlled to be different.

Furthermore, the positional relationship between the first pending number display section 196, the second pending number display section 197, and the fluctuation information display section 195 is not limited to that described above, and as in this embodiment, when the second game is A pachinko gaming machine of the type that displays the special symbols and performance symbols 190 in a variable manner in the order in which starting winnings related to the first game and the second game occur, rather than executing them in priority to one game, has a variable information display section. It may also be possible to arrange eight pending displays on the left side of 195. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the hold display and the variable information display 198 may be performed in association with the operation and performance related to the operation button 22 described above, but the specific mode of such performance is This will be discussed later.
＜＜Pending advance reading performance related to special symbols＞＞

Next, a pending look-ahead performance, which is one of the preview performances (look-ahead performances) related to special symbols, will be explained. This pending pre-reading performance is a performance executed based on the above-mentioned pending storage information (first special figure pending storage information or second pending storage information). Furthermore, the hold look-ahead effect uses the above-mentioned advance information notification function to generate a reach or jackpot for a hold that is completed later than the effect that is being performed using the effect pattern 190 etc. at that time. It is executed as a performance that suggests the expectation of what will happen.

For example, regarding the hold display that occurred at the position of "Hold 3" in the first hold number display section 196 described above, unlike the basic display mode (for example, blue) in which hold has not changed, the hold display is green. By doing this, it is shown that there is a higher degree of expectation that a reach will occur compared to the normal blue mode. In addition to blue and green colors, display modes such as yellow, red, gold, rainbow color, and predetermined patterns are provided, and the expectation of a jackpot is that yellow, red, gold, rainbow color, and predetermined patterns are displayed in that order rather than green. There is a performance that shows that the degree is high.

Here, examples of the display mode of the above-mentioned "predetermined pattern" include an animal pattern such as a giraffe, a display mode including a predetermined character image, and the like. In addition to the coloring and pattern of the pending display, it is also possible to use items other than perfectly circular shapes, human images, and the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform a look-ahead effect by combining the above-mentioned various display modes with blinking and light-emitting modes. Furthermore, a hold that has been won in a pre-read performance including a hold-ahead effect can be referred to as a "trigger hold", for example.

The prefetch effect related to suspension as explained above may be performed also in the second game. Regarding the second game, in addition to the basic color (orange), display modes such as red, gold, rainbow colors, and predetermined patterns can be provided. Furthermore, it is also possible to use items other than a perfect circle shape, a person image, etc. as the hold display related to the second game.

Further, the prefetch effect using the hold display in the first game and the second game as described above can be referred to as a “hold change” or the like. Such "suspension changes" include those that show a display format different from the basic display format as described above from the beginning of the suspension occurrence, and those that indicate a change in the display format at a timing after the suspension occurs. be.

Among these, examples of changes in the display mode after the occurrence of a hold include, for example, when a hold occurs, the hold display starts, the hold progresses, and the hold display changes to, for example, "Hold 2", An example of this is that the pending display changes while progressing to "Hold 1". For example, when a hold occurs, a hold display is displayed in blue (orange in the case of the second game) at the "Hold 3" position, and when the hold is moved to the "Hold 1" position, another color such as green is displayed. Things like changing to .

In addition, for both the first game and the second game, when the relevant variable information display 198 is displayed, the pending display changes from the basic color to red, gold, rainbow color, a predetermined pattern, etc., or the display mode changes to true color. In some cases, the display mode may change to include items other than circular shapes, images of people, etc. to represent the expectation of a jackpot.

Furthermore, the following can be exemplified as a control mode related to the above-mentioned pending change. For example, when a hold occurs, a lottery (hold change pattern lottery) is performed to determine a performance pattern of a hold change (a hold change pattern). A pending change pattern table is used for this pending change pattern lottery, and this pending change pattern table includes the presence or absence of a pending change, and the timing when executing a pending change (if there is a pending change). Matters related to determining the presentation pattern, such as what kind of display mode is to be executed, are defined. Further, as the pending change pattern, one for the first game and one for the second game are defined.

Furthermore, if there are multiple holds that have won the hold change in “Hold 1” to “Hold 4”, it is possible to cancel the hold look-ahead effect for any one of them. More specifically, for example, when "Hot 4" occurs, the hold related to "Hot 4" wins a hold change pattern that changes to green, and one of the holds that occurred earlier is For example, if the hold change pattern that changes to a rainbow color is won, the hold change related to the above-mentioned "Secure 4" is canceled and not executed.

Furthermore, for example, when "Hot 4" occurs as in the above example, the hold related to "Hot 4" wins a hold change pattern that changes to a rainbow color, and all the holds that occurred earlier are However, if the pending change does not change to a rainbow color, but only to green, etc., the pending change that has occurred earlier may be canceled and not executed. Note that when performing a pending change, it is also possible to perform a performance that suggests that a pending change will be performed (sometimes referred to as a "pending change suggesting performance"), and this point will be described separately later.
<<Continuous notice regarding special designs>>

Next, as another look-ahead performance pattern, a continuous notice (continuous performance) related to special symbols will be explained. There are two types of continuous notices: genuine ones and pseudo-ones. Of these, genuine continuous notices refer to continuous notices that span multiple fluctuating displays of special symbols. ing. In addition, pseudo continuous notice refers to intermittent notice performance (pseudo continuous notice) in which the special symbol changes multiple times for one variable display related to the special symbol.

As for the above-mentioned "continuous notice", for example, the main character in the production story moves to different rooms in sequence, aiming for the room that is the final destination for each change in the special symbol. I can give examples of things like this. In addition, other types of "continuous previews" include ones in which the main character fights against and wins a different enemy each time a special symbol changes, aiming for the final goal of the enemy. can also be exemplified.

Further, the above-described genuine continuous notice (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "continuous notice") can be performed based on advance notice information transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. More specifically, for example, the sub-main board 301 creates a production pattern corresponding to the variable display of the subsequent special symbols, based on the advance notice information received when "Hold 3" is put on hold. , it is possible to select a content that includes a continuous notice spanning three variable displays.

Then, when the hold for one time is exhausted and the hold for "Hold 3" mentioned above is shifted to the "Hold 2" position, the first time of the performance pattern related to the selected continuous notice is The performance pattern related to the preview is executed. Furthermore, when the hold is cleared one by one and the hold display moves from ``Hold 2'' to ``Hold 1'', the second notice of the three times is executed, and the change information display is changed from ``Hold 1'' to ``Hold 1''. When moving to section 195, the third and final notice is executed.

In addition, on the sub-main board 301, the fluctuation pattern related to the fluctuation display that is being executed at the time when the above-mentioned "Hot 3" is suspended, or the "Hot 2" or "Hot 1" that has occurred before that. It is also possible to check such pending storage information. In other words, when the above-mentioned "Security 3" suspension occurs, among the various information already stored, there is information indicating that a predetermined reach effect with high jackpot reliability will be executed, and that a jackpot has occurred. If there is information indicating that the performance pattern will be canceled, it is possible to cancel the performance pattern related to the continuous notice selected when the "Hospitality 3" is put on hold. In addition, depending on the expectation level of the hold for "Hold 3", continuous notice is not immediately given from the next change, but after waiting for one change, the change of "Hold 1" and the trigger hold expiration which becomes a look-ahead mode. There may also be cases where continuous notices are made that span the fluctuations.

In addition, as for the above-mentioned pseudo continuous notice (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "pseudo continuous notice"), the reach display is performed intermittently multiple times in the production pattern related to one fluctuating display of the special symbol. Examples include things like this, things in which a character repeats an action multiple times, things in which the performance pattern 190 repeatedly temporarily stops and changes again, etc.

Furthermore, it is possible to display a pseudo-sequence suggestive pattern at the time of the pseudo-sequence notice. This pseudo-continuation suggestion pattern is one of the special decorative patterns that are displayed to stimulate expectations as to whether or not a pseudo-continuation notice (so-called "pseudo-continuation") will occur. An example of the pseudo-connection suggesting pattern is, for example, a semi-transparent presentation of a pseudo-connection pattern accompanied by the characters "NEXT" or "Continue". The above-mentioned pseudo-continuation pattern can also be called a re-variation pattern, and is one of the special decorative patterns that more definitely indicates that a pseudo-continuation occurs than the pseudo-continuation suggestion pattern.

Furthermore, examples of the pseudo-connection suggestive pattern and the pseudo-connection pattern include those that are scroll-displayed and those that are displayed in a certain area. In addition, examples of the "certain area" here include, for example, the approximate central area of the display screen of the effect display device 60, the vicinity of the first reservation number display section 196 (or the second reservation number display section 197), etc. can. Furthermore, it is also possible to display the pseudo-connection suggestive pattern or the pseudo-connection pattern in a certain area through scroll display.

Note that the contents of the continuous notice as explained above are merely examples, and various contents other than those described above can be adopted as the contents of the continuous notice.
<<Production patterns related to normal patterns>>

Next, the effects related to the above-mentioned normal symbols will be explained. In this embodiment, no effect display related to the normal symbol is performed. However, it is possible to perform the performance related to the normal symbols as part of the performance on the performance display device 60. When displaying a normal symbol in this way, it is conceivable to display the performance symbol to the extent that it is possible to distinguish between a miss and a hit, for example.

Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies, it includes a relatively large display body and a smaller display body (or more than one display body). Is possible. The large display body can be called, for example, a "main display body" or "main liquid crystal," and the small display body can be called, for example, a "sub display body" or a "sub liquid crystal." Furthermore, when a relatively small display body as described above is provided, the effect pattern (199) related to the normal pattern may be displayed on the small display body, for example. Further, for example, a set of two LED indicator lights may be provided at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64, and this may be used as an effect display device related to a normal symbol.

Further, when performing a performance using performance symbols related to normal symbols, it is possible to perform a reserved performance display related to the normal symbols as a part of the performance on the performance display device 60. Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured with a plurality of display bodies such as a large display body and a small display body, the effect pending display related to the normal symbol may be It may also be displayed on the body. In addition, for example, a set of two LED indicator lights is provided at a predetermined part of the center decoration 64, and thereby the number of reservations related to the normal symbols "1" to "4" is displayed. Good too.
<<Production related to limited frequency pattern>>

Next, the performance related to the limited frequency pattern (hereinafter referred to as "limited frequency pattern performance") will be explained. The limited frequency pattern effect is provided as a part of the above-mentioned effect pattern. Further, the limited frequency pattern performance is a performance that is set to be more likely to appear in a predetermined gaming state in response to a variable pattern determined in a specific period by the pattern determining means of the main board. The content of this limited frequency pattern performance is a performance content that shows a specific tendency.For example, the content of the limited frequency pattern performance is such that a predetermined fluctuation pattern is displayed on the main board in a specific fluctuation during a time-saving game. An example of this is something that can be determined and produce a highly reliable reach.

In addition, the gaming situations where the limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear include: at the start of the game, immediately after a predetermined effect pattern is executed (for example, immediately after a small hit, a no-ball jackpot), during a predetermined effect mode (such as fixed variation, For example, during a time-saving game mode), immediately after a special game ends, etc. In addition to these, gaming situations in which limited frequency pattern effects are likely to appear include cases where the number of pending games related to the first game (or second game) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4), and cases where the number of pending games is An example can also be given where it does not exist. Furthermore, in a situation where a limited frequency pattern performance is executed, a limited frequency table that is set in advance according to the situation at that time is used, and the performance pattern to be executed is determined from the limited frequency patterns set in this limited frequency table. It is now selected.
<<Production using operation buttons>>

Next, a presentation (hereinafter referred to as "button presentation") using the aforementioned operation button 22 (see FIG. 1) will be explained. Regarding the pachinko game machine 10 of this embodiment, various matters have been considered, such as the performance mode related to the operation button 22 and the relationship with the environment settings related to the volume adjustment and the like mentioned above. However, in order to avoid complicating the explanation, basic matters will be explained here, and detailed matters will be described later.

The operation button 22 is pressed by the player when a button effect is executed, and has a function of giving the player a feeling as if he or she is participating in a game effect or a winning/losing lottery. be. As a button effect, for example, in the process of variable display of the effect pattern 190 (see FIGS. 8(a) and (b)), the image of the operation button 22 (also referred to as a button image, etc.) is displayed in the display area 194 of the effect display device 60. Examples include displaying guides to prompt operations, such as text such as ``Press the button,'' ``Continue to press,'' or ``Press and hold,'' or videos of various indicators showing remaining time, amount of consecutive presses, etc. can.

Here, FIG. 31(a) shows an example of a button image 401 with an indicator image 402 attached, and FIG. 32(a) shows an example of the indicator image 402. In addition, when displaying a button image, etc., it is also possible to perform a preliminary effect that arouses expectations for the display of the button image. Examples of this preliminary effect include, for example, an effect in which the button image gradually becomes darker from semi-transparent until the button image is displayed, or an effect in which the button image remains translucent and then disappears, not resulting in the button image being displayed. be able to. Furthermore, there are multiple types of indicators, and they can be distinguished depending on their function, for example, by calling them "remaining time indicators", "operation amount indicators", etc.

Furthermore, examples of the button effects include effects in which a character makes a comment when the player operates the operation button 22 according to the above-mentioned guide display, and effects in which an ally character attacks an enemy character. Further, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-mentioned movable presentation member (reference numeral omitted) is activated to notify that the player is ready. Furthermore, a button performance may be performed during the ready-to-win performance, and in that case, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-mentioned movable performance member is activated to stimulate expectations for a jackpot.

Further, regarding the above-mentioned operation button 22, the operation of the operation button 22 is disabled during normal times, but during the button presentation, the operation of the operation button 22 is valid during the button operation validity period. The button operation valid period is a preset fixed time. In addition, multiple types of button operation validity periods may be provided depending on the type of button effect. The button operation valid period is longer for operation effects (if multiple types of single-shot operation effects and multiple types of repeated-press operation effects are provided, the button operation effective period for multiple types of continuous-press operations is longer than the average value of the button operation effective period for multiple types of single-shot operation effects) (2) There are multiple types of single-shot operation effects, and the first single-shot operation effect (for example, the effect that occurs before reaching in a low base state) (3) The second single-hit operation effect (for example, the effect that occurs during reach in a low base state) has a longer button operation validity period. For example, the effective period of the button operation may be longer for the second consecutive hit operation effect (for example, the effect that occurs during reach in the high base state) than the effect that occurs before reach in the low base state. In addition, having multiple types of single-shot operation effects and multiple-press operation effects means, for example, single-shot operation effects that are executed before the reach (e.g., a line preview is generated when a button is pressed) and multiple-press operation effects (e.g., a continuous button press). ), single-shot operation effects that are executed after reaching (for example, the final effect where you are notified of whether you hit the jackpot or not by pressing the button), and multiple-hit operation effects (for example, when you press the button repeatedly, the meter goes to 0). If it hits the jackpot, it will be a jackpot), a single operation effect that is executed during a jackpot (for example, a movable effect member is activated by pressing a button to notify that the probability will change after the jackpot), and a continuous operation effect (for example, This means that it has various types of button effects, such as an effect that informs you that if you defeat all enemies by repeatedly pressing the button, the probability will change after you hit the jackpot.

In addition, a vibration motor or a solenoid (not shown) may be combined with the operation button 22 to vibrate the operation button 22, or a driving source such as a motor may be used to expand the operating range of the operation button 22. It is also possible to adopt an effect mode in which 22 is plunged and submerged. Furthermore, when the operation button 22 is projected and retracted, it is also possible to set the amount of projection relatively large (for example, about 5 to 10 cm).

Further, the operation button 22 is not limited to one having a small outer size (for example, about several centimeters), but may be a hemispherical one with an outer dimension of about ten or more centimeters. Furthermore, as the operation input device (operation input means) such as the operation button 22, various other forms can be adopted. It is also possible to use models (figures) of characters with touch sensors attached. Further, as the operation input means, it is also possible to provide an operation button 22 (or a smaller operation button, etc.) and an operation lever, etc., and use them depending on the situation such as the content of the performance. .

In this embodiment, the operation button 22 is equipped with a protruding/retracting mechanism or a vibration mechanism, and is capable of protruding/retracting operations with respect to the upper spherical plate 18 and vibrating operations on the upper spherical plate 18. The operation button 22 is provided on the upper part of a lever device (lever device unit) 184 as shown in FIG. 21(a). This lever device 184 is constructed by attaching a motor (here, a stepping motor) 186 serving as a drive source, a movable mechanism section 187, and a lever body 188 to a base body 185. Furthermore, a decorative portion 189 is provided on the upper part of the lever body 188 to decorate the area around the operation button.

As shown in FIG. 1, the lever device 184 is built into the tray unit 16 of the gaming machine frame 11, and the above-mentioned decorative portion 89 and operation button 22 are exposed from the upper ball tray 18. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 21(a), the lever device 184 accommodates the lever body 188 so that the decorative portion 189 constitutes a surface that is substantially continuous with the outer surface of the upper spherical plate 18 in the normal state. are doing.

However, when a predetermined effect is executed, the lever body 188 protrudes, and the decorative portion 189 and the operation button 22 rise at a predetermined angle and protrusion amount, as shown in FIG. 21(b). In this case, although not shown, the decorative portion 189 and the operation button 22 are in a state of protruding from the outer surface of the upper spherical plate 18. Here, the lever body 188 and the decorative portion 189 can be collectively referred to as a "lever". Moreover, it is also possible to include the operation button 22 in these and call it a "lever." Hereinafter, the lever body 188, the decoration part 189, and the operation button 22 will be collectively referred to as a "lever" and will be denoted by the symbol L.

The lever L described above can be tilted forward as shown in FIG. 21(c) in a protruding state as shown in FIG. 21(b). Then, for example, during a predetermined reach performance, the lever L changes from the retracted state to the protruding state, and the performance display device 60 displays a video showing the lever L falling down, text display of "Pull the lever", etc. , When the player pushes the lever L forward, other movable production members etc. are operated, a cut-in production is performed, and the SP reach with higher expectation of jackpot develops, the SP reach continues, and the result is correct or incorrect. It is possible to perform a series of effects, such as announcing that the lottery result is a jackpot.

Here, when the reach develops, it is possible to display a developing symbol. The development symbol is one of the special decorative symbols that indicate that a reach effect will occur. By displaying the development symbol, it is possible to definitively notify that a reach effect will occur.

Furthermore, as shown in an enlarged view of the main part in FIG. 20(a), as described above, a cross key 96 is provided near the operation button 22, and the operation button 22 is selected when setting the environment. It may be used as a key etc. In this embodiment, the effect operation using the operation button 22 and the cross key 96 is performed in a situation where the effect display device 60 is displaying a variable display of the effect design 190 or the like, or in a situation where no variable display is being performed. It may be done. In this way, the cross key 96 also functions as a type of operation input means that can be operated by a player or the like.

Next, the above-mentioned guide displays such as "Press the button", "Continuously press", "Long press", etc. are designed to distinguish and specify the operation mode of the operation button 22 (button operation mode). For example, when a single operation (single operation) is detected, a character display such as "Press a button" is used as a guide display when proceeding with subsequent control processing, assuming that the requested operation (requested operation) has been performed. Illustrated. Those that request a single operation and generate some kind of effect when the single operation is performed are called, for example, "single operation effect," "single press effect," "single effect," "single button effect," etc. It is possible. Further, a single operation may be referred to as a "single press", and a function of a single operation may be referred to as a "single operation function", a "single press function", a "single function", etc.

Further, for example, a character display such as "Tap repeatedly" is exemplified as a guide display when a plurality of operations (repeated tap operation) is a requested operation. Those that request such a repeated tap operation and generate some kind of effect by performing the repeated press operation are called, for example, "repeated press operation effect", "repeat press effect", "repeat button effect", "repeat press possible effect", etc. It is possible. In addition, a continuous press operation in which the button is pressed intermittently is referred to as a ``continuous press'', ``continuous press'', ``intermittent operation'', etc., and a function of the continuous press operation is referred to as a ``continuous press operation function'' or a ``continuous press function''. , it is also possible to refer to it as a "repeated hit function" or the like.

The continuous-hit performance related to this continuous-hit operation can be considered to include, in addition to the above-mentioned performance that encourages repeated hits (pre-sequence-hit performance), also the performance when the repeated hits are performed afterwards (during-sequence-hit performance). An example of this continuous press effect may be, for example, a change in the image in response to the operation each time the operation of pressing the operation button 22 is repeated at relatively short intervals. A specific example of such a continuous hit performance will be described later.

Further, an example of a repeated press effect may include displaying an indicator (in this case, an operation amount indicator) and increasing the amount indicated by the indicator as the pressing operation is repeated. The display of such an indicator can be started before the consecutive hits or after the consecutive hits have started. Note that a specific example of indicator display will be described later.

Further, for example, a character display such as "Press and hold" is exemplified as a guide display when a continuous operation (long press operation) for a predetermined time or more is a requested operation. Something like this that requests a continuous operation and generates some kind of effect when the continuous operation is performed can be called, for example, a "long-press operation effect," a "long-press effect," or a "long-press button effect." It is something. Further, the continuous operation may be referred to as a "long press" or the like, and the function of the long press operation may be referred to as a "long press operation function" or a "long press function".

For example, an indicator (in this case, a remaining time indicator) is displayed as a long-press effect related to this long-press operation, and the amount indicated by the indicator increases as the time that the operation button 22 is pressed increases. I can give an example. Further, an example of a long-press effect may be one in which the speed of change (or period of change, etc.) of the image in response to the operation increases as the time that the operation button 22 is pressed increases. Furthermore, a combination of multiple effects like these can also be exemplified as a long-press effect.

As described above, the effect using the operation buttons 22 and the like is basically performed in a mode (front button effect) accompanied by a guide display such as a button image that prompts button operation. In FIG. 31(a), an example of a button image is shown with reference numeral 401. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, in order to further diversify the effects using the operation buttons 22, etc., effects such as not displaying the guide or limiting the guide display can be performed. . These kinds of effects can be called, for example, "back button effects" or "hidden button effects." Details of this back button effect and the function of the back button (back button function) will be described later.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine 10 of this embodiment is equipped with an automatic repeated hitting function (auto repeated hitting function) that facilitates the above-mentioned repeated hitting operation related to the operation button 22. This auto-sequence function can be used even if the button is pressed only once or repeatedly at considerably longer intervals than usual in a production situation that requires repeated presses. This function treats button operations in these situations as repeated presses.

More specifically, a button operation that continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, more than 0.5 seconds, such as 0.55 seconds or 0.6 seconds) is detected in a situation where a continuous press effect is executed. For example, it is assumed that the conditions for automatic consecutive hits (the first condition and the second condition, which will be described later) are satisfied, and that consecutive hits have been performed, and the control proceeds. A button operation that satisfies the conditions for auto-repeated presses can be referred to as an "auto-repeated press operation."

By providing such an automatic repeated hit function, it is possible to proceed with the same effect as if repeated hits were performed even if the repeated hits are not necessarily performed. Furthermore, for players who find it troublesome to actually hit the button repeatedly, it is possible to present the same effects as if they had hit the button repeatedly by just one continuous button operation. Furthermore, the player is not excessively distracted by repeated hits, and can easily pay attention to the performance being performed on the performance display device 60 or the like.

In addition, the auto continuous hit function is combined with the normal continuous hit function (normal continuous hit function), so players who actually want to repeatedly press the operation button 22 to enjoy the continuous hit effect and continuous hit function can use the automatic continuous hit function. It is possible to perform the normal repeated tapping operation (normal repeated tapping operation) as described above without using the function. It should be noted that various correlations with various button effects, environment settings, game characteristics, power outages, etc. are defined for such an automatic repeated press function, and the details of these correlations will be described later. In addition, in this specification, the term simply "auto consecutive hits" may be used, but this term is used in the sense of contrasting with normal consecutive hits; for example, "auto multiple hits function" , "auto continuous hit effect", "effect related to automatic continuous hit", etc. are higher-level concepts of various terms related to automatic continuous play.
＜＜Production when a jackpot occurs＞＞

Next, the effect when a jackpot occurs will be explained. Performances when a jackpot occurs include the performance at the start of the special game (jackpot start demo), the performance during the special game (round performance), the performance at the end of the final round (win end demo), and the performance at the end of the special game. There is a performance (demonstration of the end of the jackpot), etc. Here, the performance of the jackpot start demo described above is the performance during the period when the attacker (big prize opening) is kept closed from the start of the jackpot game (special game) to the start of the first round (unit game). The performance of the above-mentioned jackpot end demo is based on the period during which the attacker (big prize opening) is kept closed from the end of the final round (unit game) to the end of the jackpot game (special game). It can be said that it is a performance.

When the above-mentioned production pattern 190 is fixed and stopped, a display indicating that a jackpot has started is displayed along with a sound such as a fanfare. An example of the display indicating that the jackpot has started is the jackpot start demonstration screen shown in FIG. 25(a). Furthermore, as an instruction on how to hit during the special game, a right-handed hitting guidance presentation (right-handed hitting instruction display) is executed, and an example is given in which the player is guided to increase the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20 and perform a right hitting. can. Furthermore, as a display of content to guide the player to hit the ball to the right, it is possible to display a message such as "Turn the steering wheel to the right" in the right-hand ball guidance display area 383 in FIG. 25(a).

Here, the production content at the start of the jackpot may be different between the first hit (jackpot with a low base) and the successive win (jackpot with a high base). Specifically, when the player wins for the first time, a message such as "Jackpot has started!" may be displayed, and when a consecutive winner occurs, a message such as "Jackpot continues!" may be displayed. In addition, regarding right-handed hitting, the message ``Turn the handle to the right'' is displayed at first play, but in consecutive games, such a message is not displayed or a different display (simply ``Right-handed hitting'' is displayed). (such as displaying large letters for a short period of time). In this way, the jackpot start demo performance at the time of consecutive hits may be shorter than the jackpot start demo performance at the first hit, and in that case, of course, the jackpot start demo time will be shorter than the time at the first hit. It will be shorter when staying in a consecutive house. Similarly, the time value of the jackpot end demonstration performance (jackpot start demonstration time) may also be set to be shorter during successive wins than during the first win.

An example of the performance during the above-mentioned special game is a moving image that cannot be viewed unless the player wins a jackpot. Further, at this time, a predetermined music piece is output from the aforementioned speaker 21 (see FIG. 1). Further, as a video during a special game, for example, a predetermined character in a graphic novel adopted for the production of the pachinko gaming machine 10 may be depicted fighting a rival enemy, or a video depicting a character enjoying a fortune. I can give examples of things that I have done. Here, (FIG. 25(b)) exemplifies a scene of a video in which two women fight together against an enemy as a video during a special game.

Note that the switching of rounds during the special game can be changed by, for example, "1R", "2R", ..., "15R" at the bottom of the screen, "1st round", "2nd round", etc. It is possible to notify by displaying as follows. Furthermore, as part of the performance during the special game, it is also possible to display, for example, the number of times a jackpot occurs when a jackpot occurs during a specific game and the jackpot continues.

In the display example of FIG. 25(b), a reservation number display area 367 is displayed at the bottom of the screen to distinguish and show the reservation numbers of special drawings 1 and 2. Also, in the display example shown in FIG. 25(b), a reduced performance symbol display area 361, a round number display area 368, and a count number display area 369 are displayed. Also, in the display example shown in FIG. 25(b), in the upper right part of the screen, the number of consecutive winnings related to multiple jackpot games and the number of consecutive wins are displayed by displaying "1st chance" and "number of winnings: 195" in the upper right part of the screen. , the number of pitches won during consecutive games is displayed.

Here, instead of only displaying the number of prize balls won during the game (by hitting the big winning hole (90)), we display the ball at the same firing position (90) as the big winning hole (90). The number of prize balls won may also be displayed based on the ball entering the general winning hole (number omitted) located in the firing direction). In addition, in the event that a so-called over-winning occurs (a ball that enters the big winning hole in excess of the specified number of counts in one round), there will be a production that suggests or announces the occurrence (for example, " It is also possible to output a sound such as "Tane!" or display a message such as "Nice!" in a performance display.

Further, as a performance during the special game, it is possible to perform a specific performance (specific performance during a win) as shown in FIG. 25(c) and FIGS. 26(a) to (c), for example. FIGS. 25(c) and 26(a) to 26(c) exemplify winning specific performance screens A to D. These winning specific performance screens A to D are displayed as an opportunity to change the story development, or are inserted as a turning point in the performance when the number of rounds is announced or a promotion to a certain change is performed during a jackpot game. It can be used for purposes such as.

As the above-mentioned promotion performance, the performance symbols 190a to 190c are changed from, for example, a non-probable variation symbol (such as "666") which is a non-probability variation combination to a probability variation symbol (such as "777") which is a probability variation combination. I can give an example of a performance that arouses expectations about whether or not the person will be promoted (progressive performance that is likely to change). Furthermore, an example of the promotion performance is a performance (round promotion performance) that arouses expectations as to whether or not a low round win (such as a 5R win) will be changed to a high round win (such as a 15R win).

Next, examples of performances after the above-mentioned special game include those related to the results of the performance during the special game. More specifically, it can be exemplified by the content in which the winner expresses his or her emotions depending on the outcome of a fight between characters. Such a performance after the special game can also be called an ending performance.

Furthermore, examples of performances after the special game include one that additionally displays the number of consecutive jackpots, and one that displays the number of prize balls won by the player in the special game at that time. It is also possible to additionally display the number of jackpot occurrences when a jackpot occurs during a specific game and the jackpot continues. Furthermore, regarding the succession of jackpots, when the number of occurrences of jackpots reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times), it is also possible to execute an effect pattern that has not been selected before.

Although not shown, when the special game ends, a jackpot end demonstration screen (jackpot end demonstration screen) is displayed. An example of this jackpot end demonstration screen is one that displays the words "End" indicating the end of the jackpot game. Further, in this jackpot end demo screen, it is also possible to display the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game or consecutive games.

In addition, if the types of jackpots include a jackpot that does not involve a change in probability, the notification as to whether or not the probability will change after the end of the special game is not notified during the special game or until the end of the special game. is also possible.

For example, when a special game is played for a total of 10 rounds, an effect is not performed to notify the player whether or not he or she has won a winning bet until the end of the 8th round, and after the end of the 8th round, It is possible to adopt a performance or control mode in which, if the player has won, a performance to that effect (specific performance during winning) is performed over one or more rounds.

Similarly, in a pachinko game machine that includes a jackpot with no probability change, if a game ball is detected in a predetermined area at a predetermined timing such as before the start of a special game, during a special game, or at the end of a special game, It is also possible to adopt an effect or control mode such that the number of characters is variable.

In this case, for example, a ball entry device (herein referred to as a "V ball entry device") having a detection area for game balls may be added to a location below the grand prize opening in the gaming area 52 (see FIG. 1). Provided. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing such as at the end of a special game, the V ball entry device is set to a state where it can accept game balls, and when a game ball is detected by the V ball entry device in this state, the subsequent probability state is determined. , is controlled to be in a variable state for a predetermined period of time. Then, if the game ball does not enter the V ball entering device or if the game ball does not enter a predetermined area within the V ball entering device, control is performed so that the subsequent probability state does not become a variable state. It is conceivable to do so.

Moreover, it is also possible to provide such a probability change based on the ball entering the ball only as a performance. That is, when a jackpot with probability variation is won in the jackpot lottery, the V ball entry device is brought into a state in which it can accept game balls at a predetermined timing. Then, a sorting mechanism is provided in the V ball entry device, and if the player has won a jackpot with a probability change in advance, the game ball that entered the V ball entry device is guided to the area of probability change, and the player Execute a performance that indicates that the . Furthermore, if the player has previously won a jackpot with no probability variation, it is conceivable to guide the game ball into a non-probability variation (normal) area and perform an effect to the effect that the player has won a probability variation.

Next, examples of performances after the above-mentioned special game include those related to the results of the performance during the special game. More specifically, it can be exemplified by the content in which the winner expresses his or her emotions depending on the outcome of a fight between characters. Such a performance after the special game can also be called an ending performance.

Furthermore, examples of performances after the special game include one that additionally displays the number of consecutive jackpots, and one that displays the number of prize balls won by the player in the special game at that time. It is also possible to additionally display the number of jackpot occurrences when a jackpot occurs during a specific game and the jackpot continues. Furthermore, regarding the succession of jackpots, when the number of occurrences of jackpots reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times), it is also possible to execute an effect pattern that has not been selected before.

Furthermore, when a small hit occurs, there is no performance to notify the occurrence of a small hit, and during the game after a small hit occurs, it is the same as normal, and it is not possible to distinguish whether or not the probability is changing. It is conceivable to stage the content.
<<Production by superimposing multiple production elements>>

Next, various specific performances that can be performed in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained by giving examples. First, it is possible to perform the display on the effect display device 60, the display on the light guide plate 88 mentioned above, and the effect by superimposing the movable effect members. This type of performance is a complex performance by positioning a movable performance member in front of the performance display device 60 and combining the display contents of the performance display device 60 with light decorations, movements, etc. of the movable performance member.

To give an example, in a state where any of the movable performance members protrudes in front of the display area 194 of the performance display device 60, at least a part of the display area 194 of the performance display device 60 is visible outside the movable performance member. For example, when an image of a burning flame is displayed on the effect display device 60, a combination of effects in which the movable effect member performs light decoration and movement in front of the flame is executed. Furthermore, by performing an effect such as a flashing flame pattern or a flashing ripple pattern on the light guide plate 88, it is possible to create an effect that is caused by the difference in distance between the light guide plate 88 and the effect display device 60. It can produce visual effects.

Furthermore, in this state, by performing a performance using the movable performance member between the light guide plate 88 and the performance display device 60, the state of the movable performance member and the image on the performance display device 60 can be changed from the display on the light guide plate 88. It can be made visible to the player while partially serving as an obstacle. Furthermore, by synthesizing changes in the pattern-like display before and after the movable effect member, it is possible to superimpose complex situational displays on the movable effect member, making it possible to express the environment in which the movable effect member is placed in a complex manner. .

As a result, even with the limited configuration of the light guide plate 88, the movable performance member, and the performance display device 60, more complex performances can be performed, and it is possible to diversify the performances. Note that even if the light guide plate 88 is changed to, for example, a transmissive liquid crystal display, a part of the transmissive liquid crystal display, a movable production member behind it, or a part of the displayed content of the production display device 60 cannot be visually recognized. By making it as transparent as possible, it is possible to perform an effect by superimposing the light guide plate 88 similarly to the case of the light guide plate 88.

In addition, as modes of using the light guide plate 88, a transparent liquid crystal display, etc. (herein referred to as the light guide plate 88, etc.), a mode that emphasizes the light guide plate 88, etc., and a mode using a combination with the effect display device 60 are adopted. Is possible. The above-mentioned "mode of emphasizing the light guide plate 88 etc." uses most of the display surface of the light guide plate 88 etc. to perform a colored display that makes a predetermined image stand out, and the display content of the effect display device 60 behind it is This is a display mode that focuses the player's attention as little as possible.

On the other hand, the above-mentioned "aspect in combination with the effect display device 60" suppresses the area ratio of the portion of the light guide plate 88 etc. where color display is performed to a predetermined level, and displays the effect display device 60 behind. This is a display mode that draws the player's attention to the content and shows the player a performance that combines the display on the light guide plate 88 and the display on the performance display device 60. Then, in a predetermined case, an effect is performed in a manner that emphasizes the light guide plate 88, etc., and in another predetermined case, an effect is performed in a manner in which it is combined with the effect display device 60. , etc. is possible.
<<Production that suggests pending changes>>

Next, various examples can be further exemplified as effects using the above-described hold display. For example, a pending change suggestion effect that suggests that a pending change will be performed is exemplified, and the relevant fluctuation information display 198 of the relevant fluctuation information display section 195 shown in FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b) is once erased, and The information display section 195 displays text information (text state transition suggestion information) that suggests that the pending color changes and the expectation level increases, such as "color change?", for example. After displaying such state transition suggestion information, the variation information display 198 in the variation information display section 195 may change to a color indicating a high expectation level, such as red or rainbow color. do.

It is also possible to display the above-mentioned "color change?" display as one of the eyes of a roulette wheel or one of the symbols on a rotating drum (reel). For example, information displays such as "No change", "Color change?", "Red", and "Rainbow" may be used as the eyes of the roulette or the rotating drum, and the fluctuation information display section 195 may display information such as "No change", "Color change?", "Red", or "Rainbow". Displays the drum object. Then, in the fluctuation information display section 195, the display of "No change", "Color change?", "Red", and "Rainbow" changes sequentially, and the fluctuation information is subsequently displayed in a manner corresponding to the stopped information. 198 may be performed. Note that it is also possible to display objects such as a roulette or a rotating drum without erasing the fluctuation information display 198.

In addition, as another aspect of the performance using the pending display, when a pending change is performed in the first pending number display section 196 or the second pending number display section 197 in FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b), One idea is to proactively notify users that a change has occurred or that a change to hold will occur immediately by displaying hold change information such as ``change to hold'', ``red hold'', ``rainbow hold'', etc. It will be done. Here, such pending change information may be displayed in the center of the display area 194 in the effect display device 60, or the pending change information may be displayed in the first pending number display section 196 or the second pending number display section 197. This may be done near the pending display.

In addition, as mentioned above, one or more types of pending change suggestion performances that suggest that a pending change will be performed are provided, and the rate at which pending changes are made and the pending change are determined depending on whether or not the pending change suggestion production is executed and the type. It is also preferable to have different degrees of change (for example, the rate at which the reserved color changes from blue to red is different between type A and type B). In addition, if there are multiple hold displays and hold changes can be made to multiple hold displays, it is not known which hold change will be made at the start of the hold change suggestion performance. With this configuration, it is possible to increase interest from the viewpoint of whether the previously changed reservation will change further or whether the reservation that has not changed will change.

In addition, when executing the holding change suggestion performance, the timing of the holding change can be set to various timings during symbol fluctuation. For example, if the pending change suggestion performance uses an area or image object dedicated to the pending change suggestion, multiple starts and ends can be made at arbitrary timings that do not overlap with the fixed stop period of the decorative pattern (performance pattern). You can set the timing.

On the other hand, if the reserved change suggestion performance is not exclusive to the reserved change suggestion, but is performed in conjunction with the fluctuating display of decorative symbols, for example, a pseudo decorative symbol suggesting a reserved change can be created using the display area of the decorative symbol. (For example, a "retention change symbol") can be displayed. In this case, it is possible to set the timing at which one or more rows of symbols temporarily stop or the timing at which the stopped symbols are announced.

In addition to the various hold change timings described here, the hold color can also be changed at the start of hold display or at the time of shift. Further, in the pachinko game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the hold change may be performed in association with the button performance, but the specific aspect of such performance will be described later.
<Various commands sent from the main board to the sub-main board>

Next, main commands among various commands sent from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 will be explained. First, the command transmission timings are while the initial screen is displayed, during the customer waiting demonstration (standby demonstration), when the special symbol pattern fluctuation starts, when the special symbol symbol is confirmed, while the special symbol symbol is confirmed, during the jackpot start demonstration, There are times when the jackpot medium/large winning opening is opened, when the jackpot medium/large winning opening is closed, when the winning end demonstration is over, and when the jackpot ending demonstration is over. The period during which the initial screen is displayed is the period from when the Pachinko game machine 10 is powered on until the customer waiting demonstration starts and the machine enters a steady state. In addition, a command is sent in any case when starting a prize, when recovering from a power failure, and when detecting an error. Furthermore, command transmission is also executed when RWM is cleared.

Among these, commands for RWM clearing include commands for effect display initialization, effect LED initialization, and various error commands. The effect display device initialization command is for displaying a predetermined effect pattern on the effect display device 60. The effect LED initialization command is for lighting a part of the game effect lamp when communication is normal. Various error commands are used to display effects and the like in accordance with error conditions.

The customer waiting demo command includes a customer waiting demo command. This customer waiting demonstration command is for setting the production display device 60 and game effect lamps for the customer waiting demonstration and erasing the audio.

The commands when starting the symbol variation of the special symbol include the number of symbols 1 memorized, the number of memorized symbols 2, communication test 1, communication test 2, number of productions A to Z, production selection status 0 to 2, variation additional information, and pattern 1 production. There are commands for pattern, 2-character performance pattern, 1-character character performance, and 2-character design. The symbol 1 memory number command indicates the number of pending memories of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 memory number command indicates the number of pending memories of the second special symbol. The communication test 1 command and the communication test 2 command are used to confirm whether or not communication is occurring normally. The various commands for the number of productions A to Z indicate the number of productions according to the limited frequency table described above, and the various commands for production selection states 0 to 2 indicate the type of production according to the limited frequency table. It is something. The variable additional information command indicates information for adding an element (performance component) that suggests, for example, the expected level of jackpot to the performance pattern. The symbol 1 production pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 production pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol. It is something. The symbol 1 character production command is for sending a command corresponding to the symbol of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 character production command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the second special symbol. be.

Commands for determining the special symbol include commands to stop the symbol 1 production pattern and to stop the symbol 2 production pattern. The symbol 1 performance pattern stop command and the symbol 2 performance pattern stop command are for stopping the performance symbols 190 based on the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively.

Commands for special symbols while the design is confirmed include: 0 number of fluctuation time reductions (at low probability), number of fluctuation time reductions A to Z (at low probability), 0 number of fluctuation time reductions (at high probability), during probability fluctuation ( There are commands (up to a predetermined number of fluctuations). These are for transmitting commands related to the current gaming state, and are used to display the production mode, the number of time reductions, etc.

Commands during the jackpot start demonstration include a symbol 1 jackpot start demo, a symbol 2 jackpot start demo, and a command to specify the firing position. The symbol 1 jackpot start demo command and the symbol 2 jackpot start demo command are for displaying a start demonstration based on the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The firing position designation command is used to inform the player of the firing position when the player is required to hit the game ball differently by hitting the game ball to the left or right.

The commands for opening the jackpot medium jackpot opening include the commands 1 to 16 of symbol 1 jackpot, and 1 to 16 of symbol 2 jackpot. These are for displaying performances based on the jackpot symbols and the number of rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

As a command when the jackpot middle/large prize opening is closed, there is a big winning opening closing production command. This is for displaying the big winning opening closing effect.

Commands for the jackpot end demonstration include commands for a symbol 1 hit end demonstration and a symbol 2 win end demonstration. These are for displaying a winning end demonstration performance based on the winning symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Commands at the time of starting a prize winning include commands for winning notice (winning notice performance), symbol notice (winning symbol notice performance), variation notice (pattern notice performance), number of symbols 1 stored, and number of symbols 2 stored. Each command of the hit notice, symbol notice, and fluctuation notice is a command (preread command) related to the above-mentioned preread effect by the advance information notification means 157. The win notice command is for transmitting the random value range of the win/fail random number, and includes information on the win/fail according to the lottery probability. The symbol preview command is for transmitting the random value range of the symbol random number, and includes information related to the type of hit. Furthermore, the fluctuation notice command is for transmitting the random number range of the fluctuation pattern, and can be used to specify the type of the fluctuation pattern group (no reach, normal reach, super reach, etc.). The commands for the number of symbols 1 stored and the number 2 stored are used to convey the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this embodiment, information such as the result of the winning lottery, the presence or absence of pre-read effects, and the period thereof are transmitted to the sub-main board 301 by commands for winning notification, symbol notification, and variation notification.

Commands when recovering from a power outage include communication test 1, communication test 2, game states A to E for power outage recovery, number of performances A to Z, performance selection status 0 to 2, symbol 1 character performance, symbol 2 character performance, There are commands for state upon power failure recovery, special symbol 1 state upon power failure recovery, special symbol 2 state upon power failure recovery, firing position designation, errors a to d, number of symbols 1 stored, and number of symbols 2 stored.

The communication test 1 and communication test 2 commands are for checking whether normal communication is being performed. The commands for the gaming states A to E for power outage recovery are for transmitting different commands depending on the gaming state at the time of the power outage. The commands A to Z of production times indicate the number of productions according to the aforementioned limited frequency table, and the commands of production selection status 0 to 2 indicate the type of production according to the limited frequency table. be. The symbol 1 character performance and symbol 2 character performance commands are for transmitting commands corresponding to the symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The power failure recovery status command is for transmitting different commands depending on whether or not recovery is occurring. The command for the special symbol 1 state when power is restored and the special symbol 2 state when power is restored is a command that corresponds to the state of the first special symbol or second special symbol, such as waiting, fluctuating, winning, etc. It is for. As described above, the firing position designation command is used to designate an appropriate firing position depending on the situation. Errors a to d are for transmitting the presence or absence and type of error. The commands for the number of symbols 1 and 2 stored are for conveying the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
<Main control processing of the main board>

Next, the main control processing in the main board 102 of the Pachinko gaming machine 10 configured as described above will be explained based on FIGS. 14 to 19 and the like. Prior to the explanation, the terms "special electric accessory", "conditioning device", and "accessory continuous operation device" used below will be explained. All of these represent conceptual devices in the control process of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and among these, the "special electric accessory" operates (opens) the big winning hole of the big winning hole device 90. It is something. In addition, the "condition device" operates when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, and the "accessory continuous actuation device" operates the special electric accessory multiple times in succession. It is something that can be done.

The main control processes of the pachinko gaming machine 10 described here include the power-on process shown in FIG. 14 (also referred to as "control start process" on the main board), the initial setting process shown in FIG. 15, and the process shown in FIG. These are the setting change process shown in FIG. 17, the game progress interrupt process shown in FIG. 17, the (win/fail) lottery determination process shown in FIG.
<Power-on processing>

The power-on process schematically shown in FIG. 14 is a control process that is started after a security check using the manufacturing code of the CPU 501 is performed when the Pachinko gaming machine 10 is powered on. In this power-on process, an initial setting process (S101) is executed as shown in the figure. In the initial setting process (S101), processes related to setting values and the like are executed, and the contents of the initial setting process (S101) will be described later.

After the initial setting process (S101), it is determined whether the RWM clear button (RWM clear switch (544)) has been operated (S102). In S102, if the RWM clear button has been operated (S102: YES), RWM clear processing (S103) is executed, and RWM clear information is sent to the sub side (sub main board 301 side). (S4). Furthermore, information indicating that the power was turned on normally (information indicating that the power was turned on normally) is stored in the RWM (S105), and timer interrupts are permitted (S106). By permitting this timer interrupt (S106), game progress interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing) becomes possible at a predetermined period (here, 4 ms). Furthermore, various random numbers are updated each time the loop process (circular process) is repeated (S107).

Here, the random numbers updated in the random number update process (S107) include various initial value random numbers such as a normal initial value random number per symbol, a symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and a soft initial value random number per special symbol. I can do it. Further, when updating various random numbers, it is possible to use a 2-byte soft random number update process as a common control module. Further, the random number updated in the random number update process (S107) is the software random number mentioned above, and depending on the type of random number, the software random number updated in the random number update process (S107) and the above-mentioned hardware random number. It is also possible to generate random values by the calculation.

In S102, if the RWM clear button has not been operated (S102: NO), it is determined whether or not information indicating normal power off is stored in the RWM (S111). If the information indicating that the power is turned off normally is stored in the RWM (S111: YES), an RWM check is performed (S112), and it is determined whether the data in the RWM (data within a predetermined range) is normal or not. This is done (S113). In this S113, if the data in the RWM is not normal (S113: YES), the process moves to RWM clear processing (S103).

If the information that the power off is normal is saved in the RWM in S111 above (S111: NO), and if the data in the RWM is normal in S113 above (S113: NO), the RWM will turn off the power. The data of various information commands at the time is acquired (S116). Furthermore, the acquired data of various information commands is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 side (S117), solenoid recovery settings are performed (S118), and the above-mentioned S105 (processing to save information on normal power-on in RWM) Move to.
<Initial setting process>

Next, the above-mentioned initial setting process (S101 in FIG. 14) will be explained based on FIG. 15. In this initial setting process, a setting process for each port register is executed (S121), and it is determined whether or not a setting key has been inserted (S122). If a setting key has been inserted (S22: YES), a setting value changing process (S126) is performed, and this setting value changing process (S126) will be described later.

If the setting key is not inserted in S122 above (S122: NO), setting value information is read (S123), and it is determined whether the setting value is abnormal or not (S124). . If the set value is not abnormal (S124: NO), the initial setting process ends, but if the set value is abnormal (S124: YES), notification of the set value abnormality is performed (S128). Then, the setting value abnormality information is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 (S129), and thereafter a loop state is established.
<Setting value change processing>

Next, the aforementioned setting value changing process (S126 in FIG. 15) will be explained based on FIG. 16. In this setting value change process, the RWM of the setting value storage area is checked (S131), and it is determined whether or not the setting value information is abnormal (S132). If there is no abnormality in the set value information (S132: NO), it is determined whether the RWM clear switch has been input (S133), and if the RWM clear switch has been input (S133: YES), the set value Setting values corresponding to the information are displayed (S134).

If there is an abnormality in the setting value information in the above S132 (S132: YES), the setting value is forcibly set, and the default value (here, "1") is set in the setting value information (S141). Then, after transmitting the set value forced setting information to the sub-main board 301 (S142), the set value is displayed (S133).

After S134, it is determined whether or not there has been an operation to change the setting value (S135), and if there has been an operation to change the setting value (S135: YES), the setting value information at that time is incremented by 1 (S136). Furthermore, it is determined whether the setting value information has reached the setting upper limit value (here "6") (S137), and if it has reached the upper limit value (S137: YES), the setting value information at that time is changed to " 1" (S138). Then, it is determined whether the setting change has been completed (whether the setting key has been removed or not) (S139), and if it has been completed (S139: YES), the display of the setting value is stopped (the display is erased in S140). ), and end the setting value change processing.

In S135 above, if there is no changed setting (S135: NO), the process of adding setting value information (S136) to setting the setting lower limit value (here "1") (S138) is not performed. , the process moves to a determination process (S139) to determine whether or not the setting change has been completed. In addition, in S137 above, if the setting value information has not reached the upper limit value (S137: NO), the process of setting the lower limit value of S137 (S138) is not performed, and the setting change is completed. The process proceeds to determination processing (S139). Further, if the setting change is not completed in S139 (S139: NO), the process returns to S134 to display the setting values.

In the above S133, if there is no input of the RWM clear switch (S133: NO), the setting value according to the setting value information is displayed (S146), similarly to the above S134. Furthermore, similarly to S139 above, it is determined whether the setting change is completed (whether the setting key is removed or not) (S147), and if it is completed (S147: YES), the process moves to S139 above, The display of the setting value is stopped (the display is erased in S140), and the setting value changing process is ended. If the setting change is not completed in step S147 (S147: NO), the process returns to step S136 to display the setting values.

That is, in S133 above, if the RWM clear switch is input (S133: YES), the set value is displayed (S134), and the process for changing the set value (S135 to S138, etc. above) is performed. It becomes possible. However, if the RWM clear switch is not input in S133 above (S133: NO), the set value is displayed (S146), but the process for changing the set value as in S135 to S138 above is performed. The setting value is displayed in a state where the setting value is not possible (this state is sometimes referred to as a setting display mode).
<Game progress interrupt processing>

Next, the game progress interrupt process (FIG. 17), which is repeated every timer interrupt at a predetermined period, will be explained. Although this game progress interrupt processing (also referred to as "timer interrupt processing", etc.) is omitted in the above explanation, it is performed at a predetermined period (4 ms period here) based on the period information set in the power-on processing (Fig. 14). repeated. As shown in FIG. 17, the game progress interrupt processing includes setting of interrupt operating conditions (S41, S42), recursion of the interrupt processing time monitoring means (S43), management of gaming machines (S45 to S70), and permission of interrupts (S43). Steps S71) are performed in order to return to the process before the game progress interruption occurs.

Specifically, in the interrupt operation condition setting process (S41, S42), in order to clear the interrupt flag, the interrupt operation condition setting value is stored in the game progress interrupt control register (S41), and the interrupt operation condition setting value is stored in the game progress interrupt control register (S41). A value is set in a control register corresponding to a predetermined input terminal (S42). Thereafter, second recursion information is set (S43), and further second recursion information is set in the interrupt processing time monitoring means register (S44). As will be described later, the second recursion information, together with the previously set first recursion information, is a condition for recursively restarting the monitoring time of the interrupt processing time monitoring means.

In the gaming machine management (S45 to S70), the following processes are executed in order to manage the gaming machines. First, input processing (S45) is executed to monitor input of a specific signal. What is monitored here are various switches attached to the game board surface, saucer full switch, open signal, magnetic detection signal, radio wave detection signal, glass non-detection signal, and disconnection/short circuit power abnormality detection signal. It is.

Subsequently, various random number update processes (S46) are executed to update the normal symbol variation pattern random numbers and the variation pattern random numbers. Furthermore, an initial value update type random number update process (S47) is executed to update the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol. Next, an initial value random number update process (S48) is executed to update the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol. In addition, in order to update the 2-byte timer, a timer subtraction process (S49) is executed, and in order to set the valid period of the second starting prize opening 63, a second starting opening valid period setting process (S50) is executed. .

Furthermore, a winning monitoring process (S51) is executed, in which the number of times prize balls are paid out is stored, a request for outputting board external information is created, and a request for sending a command to be sent to the sub-board 104 is performed. Subsequently, in order to control the payout control board 103, a prize ball control process (S52) is executed.

Next, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operating gate (operating port 68), in order to store the random number related to the normal symbol, a normal symbol operating gate monitoring process (S53) is executed, and the normal symbol display device or the normal symbol In order to perform processing related to electric accessories, normal symbol control processing (S54) is executed. Furthermore, in order to monitor the start of normal symbol variation, a normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S55) is executed. In addition, in order to monitor the winnings of the first starting winning hole 62 and the second starting winning hole 63 of the game ball, a starting hole monitoring control process (S56) is executed, and the first special symbol display section 70 or the second special symbol In order to perform processing related to the display section 71, special symbol control processing (S57) is executed. Next, in order to perform the process related to the special electric accessory, a special electric accessory control process (S58) is executed, and in order to perform the process related to the validity period of the big winning opening, a big winning opening valid period setting process (S59) is executed. In order to monitor the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S60) is executed.

Next, abnormality detection processing (S61) is executed to monitor magnetic fields, disconnections, short circuits, power supply, radio waves, open/close status of glass frame set and game board frame, and double glass. Then, in order to detect an abnormality in entrance and passage time, a ball entrance and passage time abnormality detection process (S62) is executed. Furthermore, in order to request the display of the number of times the special electric accessory is activated in succession, the error state, the number of balls pending operation of the normal symbol display device, and the number of balls pending activation of the special symbol display device, a game state display process (S63) is performed. ), and in order to monitor the touch state (including the operation amount state) of the firing handle 20, a handle state signal inspection process (S64) is executed. In addition, the display of special symbols, the display of normal symbols, the display of the number of pending balls on the special symbol display device (70, 71), the display of the number of pending balls on the normal symbol display device, the display of the game status, and the special electric accessories. LED output processing (S65) is executed in order to display the number of consecutive activations and to display an error.

Next, a firing control signal output process (S66) is executed to output a signal for prohibiting/permitting firing of game balls, and a test signal output process (S67) is executed to create and output a signal to be output to the test device. Execute. Furthermore, in order to output the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid and the grand prize opening (opening) solenoid, a solenoid output process (S68) is executed, and in order to send a production control command, a production control command transmission process ( S69) is executed, and an external information output process (S70) is executed in order to output signals to external terminals (various external output terminals of the external relay terminal board 46 (see FIG. 2)).

Thereafter, interrupt permission (S71) is executed, and the control process exits to return (RET). Then, using the remaining time until the next game interrupt is executed, the above-mentioned cyclic process (cyclic process that is repeated including the random number update process in S107) of the power-on process (FIG. 14) is executed. .
<<Handle status signal inspection process>>

In the above-mentioned handle state signal inspection process (S64), the handle state is inspected in order to monitor the touch state of the firing handle 20, and if it is determined that there is a change in the handle state as a result of the inspection, the handle state monitoring timer is activated. , update the handle state, set the handle state monitoring timer, and request to send a command for the handle state performance. As a result of the inspection, if it is determined that there is no change in the steering wheel condition, a steering wheel condition monitoring timer is set. Note that in the subtraction of the steering wheel state monitoring timer, if it is determined that the steering wheel timer is being subtracted, subsequent processing regarding the steering wheel state is not performed.
<Lottery determination process>

Next, the aforementioned lottery determination process (also referred to as "lottery determination process") will be explained. This lottery determination process is a process of determining whether or not a prize is won using probability data (processing for determining a jackpot lottery). Further, the lottery determination process can be performed, for example, in the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S60) in the game progress interrupt process (FIG. 17) described above.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a lottery determination process regarding success or failure. In this lottery determination process, when the process first proceeds to step S1022, the main CPU 501 sets 1 in a predetermined register (for example, C register) as winning number data, and proceeds to the next step S1024. When proceeding to step S1024, the main CPU 501 sets 2 as the repetition count data, and proceeds to the next step S1025. In the winning number data, "1" indicates a jackpot, and "2" indicates a small win.

Proceeding to step S1025, the main CPU 501 acquires probability data from the lottery table. Specifically, the main CPU 501 specifies the gaming state (probability fluctuation state or normal probability state) and the address of probability data according to the set value, and acquires the probability data corresponding to the specified address from the lottery table. and store it in the register. Then, the process advances to the next step S1026.

Proceeding to step S1026, the main CPU 501 makes a validity determination. Here, the main CPU 501 first stores the random value obtained when winning a prize in the starting slot for judgment of success or failure in a comparison register for lottery (for example, DE register), and then acquires it in step S1025. The value stored in the calculated probability data is subtracted from the value of the comparison register, and the value is set as a new value of the comparison register. In this way, the value of the comparison register is updated.

In the next step S1027, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the prize has been won. Here, by subtracting the probability data from the value of the comparison register (for example, the DE register), if the value of the DE register becomes smaller than "0" (when a downgrade occurs), "1" is set in the carry flag of the flag register. Set. In other words, a carry flag is set. Furthermore, "carry occurs" means that "1" is set in the carry flag. Then, in step S1027, the main CPU 501 determines whether the prize has been won by determining whether the carry flag is set to "1".

Here, if the carry flag is not set to "1", the main CPU 501 determines that the prize has not been won (No) and proceeds to the next step S1028. On the other hand, when the carry flag is set to "1", the main CPU 501 determines that the prize has been won (Yes), skips steps S1028 to S1033, and ends the processing according to this flowchart. Here, the winning number data set when "Yes" in step S1027 indicates the winning number determined by lottery determination (for example, winning number 1 is a jackpot, winning number 2 is a small win). That will happen.

In the next step S1028, the main CPU 501 updates the winning number data. Specifically, the main CPU 501 adds "1" to the value of the winning number data (for example, C register), and sets the value as a new winning number data (for example, C register). That is, the value of winning number data (for example, C register) is updated. Then, the process advances to the next step S1029.

Proceeding to step S1029, the main CPU 501 updates the repetition count data. Specifically, the main CPU 501 subtracts "1" from the value of the repetition count data (for example, B register) to obtain a new value of the repetition count data (for example, B register). That is, the value of the repetition count data (for example, B register) is updated. Then, the process advances to the next step S1030.

Proceeding to step S1030, the main CPU 501 determines whether the number of repetitions has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 501 determines whether the value of the repetition count data (for example, B register) is "0". Here, when the value of the repeat count data (for example, B register) is "0", it indicates that the repeat count has ended, and the repeat count data (for example, B register) is not "0" ("0"). (greater than), it indicates that the number of repetitions has not ended. Then, in step S1030, the main CPU 501 determines whether the number of repetitions has ended by determining whether the value of the number of repetitions data (for example, B register) is "0".

Here, when the value of the B register is "0", the main CPU 501 determines that the number of repetitions has ended (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1033. On the other hand, if the value of the B register is not "0", the main CPU 501 determines that the number of repetitions has not been completed (No), and returns to step S1025.

Moreover, when "No" is determined in step S1030, the validity determination in step S1026 is performed again using the same probability data as the previous time. In the next step S1033, the main CPU 501 sets "00 (H)", which is non-winning data, to the value of winning number data (for example, C register), and ends the processing according to this flowchart.

With the above configuration, as described in step S1028, since the process of updating the winning number data is included in the lottery determination process, there is no need to store the winning number data in the lottery table. Furthermore, by determining the winning number using the number of repetitions and the same probability data, it is not necessary to repeatedly set the same probability data in the lottery table, so the amount of ROM used by the lottery table can be reduced.

In addition, in this example, one winning number is provided for each small hit and one jackpot, and when a win is won, the type of jackpot or small hit is determined by the separately obtained symbol random number, but these types can be determined by this process. is also possible. In that case, if the value of the repetition count data in step S1024 is changed according to the number of types and probability data for each winning number (range value corresponding to each winning number) is set, the same determination routine can be used. It is also possible.
<Power-off processing>

Next, a description will be given of a power-off process that is executed when a power-off occurs. As shown in FIG. 19, in the power-off process, the data of all used registers is saved to RWM (S81), and the interrupt enable/disable state before the power-off is saved (S82). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the information of power-on normality is stored in the RWM (S83), and if it is not stored (S83: NO), the information of power-off abnormality is stored in the RWM (S84), The process moves to RWM access prohibition processing (S88). On the other hand, if the stack pointer value has been saved (S83: YES), the stack pointer value is saved in the stack pointer buffer (S85), information on normal power off is saved in the RWM (S86), and the checksum of the RWM is calculated. and saves the checksum data (S87). Then, access to the RWM is prohibited (S88), and the control process is looped while waiting for the CPU 501 to be reset.

In addition, in this power-off process, even if the settings of both the first recursion information and the second recursion information described above have not been completed, the CPU 501 functions as a forced recursion means and sets the first recursion information and the second recursion information. The information is set, the monitoring time of the interrupt processing time monitoring means is forcibly initialized, and the time is repeated. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the forced setting of the first recursive information and the second recursive information is performed immediately after the start of the power-off process and before the process of saving all used registers (S81). It is being said. Then, when the power supply is restarted, the control process is started with the monitoring timer recursive. In other words, by forcing the monitoring timer to recurse when a power outage occurs, it is possible to prevent the control processing from proceeding without the monitoring timer recursing immediately after the power supply is resumed. It has become.
<Other control processing modes related to the main board>
<<Control mode related to command transmission timing>>

In this embodiment, the production control command output from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 is temporarily stored in a command buffer in response to a command request before being transmitted. The command buffer is made up of multiple buffers that function as a ring buffer, and in the control process for sending commands (in this case, production control command sending process (S69)), data is sent once in the order in which they are accumulated in the command buffer. In the game progress interrupt process, one command (a pair of MODE and EVENT data) is taken out from the command buffer and transmitted. Note that it is also possible to adopt a method in which commands with a higher priority are transmitted first. Furthermore, when a command that requires transmission occurs in various control processes, it is also possible to transmit the command at any time. When such a method is adopted, production commands are collectively transmitted within one control processing module, such as production control command transmission processing (S69), during one game progress interruption process. Instead, commands are sent sequentially within each control processing module each time a command needs to be sent. Therefore, a situation in which command transmission is carried over to the next game progress interrupt process is unlikely to occur. For example, there is no delay in sending a command at the time of starting a prize winning or a command at the start of fluctuation of a special symbol, and quick command processing is possible.
<<Control mode related to updating of suspended memory>>

In this embodiment, as described above, a configuration is adopted in which the second game is prioritized, and since there is a regularity in the execution order of the first and second games, the pending memory is updated. are performed in order for each second game or first game. Therefore, by only updating the suspended information for each second game or first game, the updating of the suspended information is completed. However, the invention is not limited to this, and for example, instead of prioritizing the first game or giving priority to any game, the suspended memories are consumed in the order in which the starting winnings occur and are stored in the suspended memory (disposal in the order of winnings) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which Among these, if a configuration is adopted in which the pending memory is consumed in the order in which starting winnings occur, the pending memory information is updated according to the consumption, the total number of pending games for multiple games is updated, and the winning order is memorized. As a result, the information stored as a whole can be updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to notify the sub-main board 301 that the pending memory has been updated, a request is made for the symbol memory number command (symbol 1 memory number command and symbol 2 memory number command) as described above. By including both the symbol 1 memory number command and the symbol 2 memory number command in one command, the required program and memory capacity can be reduced.
<<Control mode related to variation pattern lottery>>

Next, various aspects related to the fluctuating pattern lottery will be explained. Any of the modes of determining the variation pattern described here may be selected and applied in one pachinko gaming machine 10, or may be used in combination as appropriate. When a plurality of modes are used together, it is possible to use the modes properly based on factors such as the success or failure results, for example.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the win/fail result, the number of reserved balls, the special symbol (sometimes a group of symbols), and the fluctuation pattern selection state (status information of the special symbol), as described above. Although used as elements, a variation pattern table corresponding to a combination of these determining elements is selected. Then, along with the determination of the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation time associated with and paired with the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern random number. Furthermore, in this embodiment, regarding the determination of the variation pattern, the variation pattern table is made different depending on whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or a loss. That is, in the case of a jackpot, a variation pattern table is selected from among those linked based on the status information of special symbols such as the number of reserved balls, the special symbol (group), and the win/fail random number. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, a variable pattern table is selected from among those linked based on the gaming state, special symbols, number of reserved balls, and winning/losing random numbers. Among these, in the case of a jackpot, the variable pattern in which the re-lottery time is given is based on the production status (presence or absence of a specific production, etc.) and the special symbol group. The presence or absence is determined, and the determined result is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301.

Further, when determining the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time, it is possible to determine the fluctuation additional information according to the determined fluctuation pattern number, and to determine the subsequent fluctuation time based on the fluctuation additional information. For example, when the selected variation pattern corresponds to a limited frequency pattern performance, it is conceivable that an extension of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern is determined after the fact.

In addition, by setting the command of the variation additional information as the command at the start of the symbol variation of the special symbol as described above, the variation previously determined in relation to elements such as the gaming state and the winning symbol can be displayed on the sub-main board 301. An effect can be performed in which additional time is subsequently added to the time. In this manner, when determining the fluctuation time of the overall performance symbol, it is possible to create a variety of fluctuation patterns while keeping the number of pre-set fluctuation patterns small, as shown below. It is. In other words, if we consider the case where the aforementioned pseudo-continuous notice (so-called "pseudo-continuation") is performed, if the variation patterns of the pseudo-continuation are simply set individually, the same number of variation patterns as the number of types of effects are set in advance. It is necessary to keep it. If production patterns such as production patterns are prepared on the sub-main board 301 for each variation pattern individually determined on the main board 102 in this way, the total number of variation patterns on the main board 102 will be large. Therefore, it is conceivable that the number could exceed, for example, 256. Therefore, in order to give distinguishable codes to a large number of variation patterns, it is necessary to increase the number of bits and bytes for representing the codes compared to the conventional techniques.

However, by using additional fluctuation information (additional fluctuation pattern), it is possible to form a fluctuation pattern after the fact by connecting, for example, additional fluctuation information drawn by random numbers to a relatively small number of basic fluctuation patterns. It is. As a result, a new variation pattern can be formed by combining variation patterns, so that a variety of variation patterns can be created without increasing the number of variation patterns provided in advance. Incidentally, the random value related to the variable additional information can also be transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 as a command for pre-reading performance when a starting winning occurs. Further, it is also possible to set the appearance probability of the variable additional pattern so that the variable additional information is easily added when the limited frequency pattern effect is executed. Further, to give an example of using the variable additional information, if "777", which is a probability variable symbol, is displayed from the beginning as a combination of the production symbols 190, the variation additional information is not set, and as a combination of the production symbols 190. , Once the non-probable variable symbol "666" is displayed, the effect (for example, the effect of swing variation or the development of variation mode) until the result of whether or not to promote it to "777" is displayed. etc.) may be performed by setting variable additional information.

Further, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the number of balls on hold, and the referenced fluctuation pattern table differs depending on the number of balls on hold. The fluctuation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of reserved pitches 0 to 4. The reason why a variation pattern table corresponding to reservation 4 is provided in addition to the four reservations 0 to 3 is as follows. For example, consider a case where a new variable display is started from a situation where the number of balls on hold is four, and the number of balls on hold is three. A state in which the number of pending balls is 3 at a stage where the control processing during the game progress interrupt processing being executed at that point has not yet reached the determination of the fluctuation pattern, which is the processing during the subsequent game progress interrupt processing. When a new starting prize occurs, the number of reserved balls is added to 4 when the fluctuation pattern is determined. Therefore, a fluctuation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of reserved pitches 0 to 4 so that such a situation can be used as a factor in determining the fluctuation pattern.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern table may be provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls from 0 to 3. In this case, it is possible to configure the control process so that the starting winnings from the state where the number of pending balls is 3 to the determination of the fluctuation pattern are not added. It should be noted that any of the aspects can also be applied to a type of Pachinko game machine in which a maximum number of reservations other than 4 (for example, 8) is set.

Moreover, the acquisition timing of the fluctuating pattern random number can be at the time of fluctuating pattern lottery. In other words, the fluctuating pattern random number is not a random number related to the operation of special electric accessories, etc., so it is more important than a win/fail random number as an element for playing a proper game, for example, in aiming for a fair game. There is less need to set constraints. Therefore, it is conceivable that the variable pattern random numbers are not intentionally acquired at the time of starting winning, but are acquired and stored at a separately provided timing, for example, at the time of the variable pattern lottery. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the number of information to be stored at the time of starting winning, and it is possible to reduce the capacity of programs and memory.
<<Control mode related to designation of design>>

In drawing a symbol, a symbol determination table to be used is determined based on the value of the upper byte of a code indicating a symbol random number, and thereafter, a symbol is determined from the determined symbol determination table based on the value of the lower byte of the symbol random number. is also possible. In this embodiment, since the numerical range of the symbol random number is set to "0 to 999", the binary code of these numerical values can be used. By doing so, the memory and program capacity can be reduced. In addition, the game status such as the number of rounds and the number of time savings is assigned to the winning symbols (which may be a group of symbols), and depending on the winning symbol, the number of subsequent rounds, the number of time savings, and the opening time of the big prize opening. Alternatively, an opening pattern or the like may be determined. By doing so, it is not necessary to store data unique to the game state or perform control processing, and the capacity of memory and programs can be reduced. Furthermore, information conveying the gaming state (gaming state designation information ) can also be added. This command is not sent to the sub-main board 301 immediately after being created, but is created, temporarily stored, and sent to the sub-main board 301 after waiting for a predetermined timing.
＜＜Relationship between the variation time of special symbols and production symbols＞＞

As mentioned above, the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) and the corresponding production symbol 190 are controlled to start and stop fluctuating in synchronization with each other, but depending on the situation Depending on the situation, the variation time of the performance symbol 190 may be shorter to some extent than the variation time of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol).

That is, when the special symbol variation and variation pattern are determined and the special symbol variation is started, a production symbol variation start command (command at the time of variation start) is sent from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. However, the time required to send and receive a predetermined command (for example, the first command at the start of fluctuation), and the time required to set it in the command buffer (a ring buffer type is used in this example) and wait. Due to the influence of the time it takes for all commands (first-in commands) to be sent out, it is possible that the start of the variation of the production symbols will be delayed compared to the start of variation of the special symbols. Furthermore, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, a fluctuation stop command (a command when the special symbol is confirmed) is sent to the sub-main board 301, but a predetermined command (for example, the first command of the command when the symbol is confirmed and the variation is started) is sent to the sub-main board 301. ), and the congestion of the command buffer (the number of commands waiting to be sent), it is conceivable that the stoppage of the effect pattern fluctuation may be delayed.

In this way, the fluctuation time of the production symbol is set to a certain extent relative to the fluctuation time of the special symbol based on the command sent at the start of the fluctuation, and by performing the swing fluctuation, the special symbol starts the next fluctuation. This is to avoid a situation where the last symbol is stopped and displayed afterwards. Due to processing delays due to the number of commands, there is a risk that the display during shaking fluctuation may cross over to the next fluctuation, but since fewer commands are sent to the sub-main board 301 at the end of the fluctuation than at the beginning of the fluctuation, the amount of delay is is suppressed, and the production pattern can be fixed almost reliably during the display fixing time of the special symbol (design fixing time related to the special symbol).
<<Preliminary judgment of lottery results>>

First, in this embodiment, as described above (FIG. 9(a), FIG. 12), the winning/losing random numerical value range in the first lottery and the second lottery is "0 to 65535", and this winning/failing random numerical value range " 0 to 65535" is divided into a plurality of random value ranges (here, A to N), as shown in FIG. 13(a).

As shown in FIG. 13(a), among the valid/invalid random numerical value ranges of "0 to 65535," "0 to 205" belongs to the prefetch code A classification, and "206" belongs to the prefetch code B classification. belongs to. Further, the correct/incorrect random numbers "207" to "210" belong to the prefetch codes C to F, respectively. Furthermore, the correct/inappropriate random numbers “211 to 615” belong to the pre-reading code G classification, and the correct or incorrect random numbers “616 to 618” belong to the pre-reading code H classification.

Subsequently, the correct/incorrect random numbers "619-621," "622-624," "625-627," and "628-630" belong to the prefetch codes H to L, respectively. Furthermore, the correct/incorrect random numbers “64874 to 65534” belong to the prefetch code M classification. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the valid/false random numbers "631 to 64873" and "65534" belong to the prefetch code M classification.

FIG. 13(b) shows the contents of each prefetch code. As shown in the figure, the look-ahead code A means that regardless of the setting value, it will be a hit (jackpot) with all settings. Next, look-ahead code B means that if the set value is "2" or more, it will be a win whether it is normal or variable probability. In other words, if the pre-reading code B is equal to or greater than the set value of "2", it indicates a hit in both normal probability and high probability cases, but if the set value is "1", it indicates a loss. Furthermore, if the pre-reading codes C to F have set values of "3" or more to "6", it means that the game will be a hit in both normal and high probability situations, regardless of the probability state.

Next, the look-ahead code G means that if the probability is changing, it will be a win regardless of the set value. In other words, the look-ahead code G indicates a hit when the probability is high, but indicates a loss when the probability is normal. Further, the look-ahead code H means that if the probability is changing, a set value of "2" or more will be a hit. Furthermore, the look-ahead codes I to L mean that if the probability is changing, a set value of "3" or more to "6" will result in a win. Moreover, the look-ahead code M means that it will be a small hit, and the look-ahead code N means that it will be a loss regardless of the setting value or probability state.

Using the prefetch codes classified and grouped in this way, the main board 102, for example, determines the prefetch code to which the obtained random value belongs, and the information (command) corresponding to the determined prefetch code is used as the above-mentioned advance notification information. It is possible to send it to the sub-main board 301. Then, on the side of the sub-main board 301, it is possible to perform a win notice performance as a pre-read performance in relation to the result of the validity determination without waiting for the suspension to expire.

In addition, in this embodiment, the preliminary determination of the type of special symbol and the type of fluctuation pattern related to the special symbol are performed based on the random number range, as in the case of the results of the winning/failure lottery described above. It is about to take place. In addition, there are many types of special symbols and variation patterns related to special symbols compared to the types of results of the lottery, and the number of pre-read codes (number of groups) is also larger than in the case of the lottery. It has become. However, as a preliminary judgment method based on a random number range, although the random number range and the type of lottery results to be grouped are different, it is possible to perform the same method as the preliminary judgment related to the validity judgment described above. . Therefore, a detailed explanation of the preliminary determination based on the random number range regarding the symbol preview performance and the pattern preview performance will be omitted here.

By performing preliminary determination based on such a random value range, it is possible to round up information, and it is possible to create commands related to preliminary determination with a small amount of information. In other words, when the number of random numbers exceeds 256, the number of bytes required to represent the random numbers exceeds 1 byte. Therefore, if the random number information is sent as is (as raw information) to the sub-main board 301 for preliminary determination, information for identifying which random number has been sent is sent using MODE, and the random number is In order to store and transmit the 2-byte command (MODE, EVENT) in EVENT, there may be a case where the command (MODE, EVENT) must be transmitted twice in order to notify the random value.

However, as in this embodiment, by converting the obtained random value into information indicating the range to which it belongs and transmitting it to the sub-main board 301, the amount of information to be transmitted can be reduced compared to the number of random values, and Even if the number of numerical values exceeds 256 (1 byte), it is possible to convert the attributes of the acquired random numerical value into a command with the amount of information of 1 byte. In addition, on the main board 102 side, in case a situation arises in which it is not desired to send pre-read information, as will be described later, a code indicating this (for example, undefined or undetermined) is provided. , it is also possible to send a command indicating the code to the sub-main board 301 side.

Here, the above-mentioned "situation in which you do not want to send pre-reading information" includes, for example, a case where the priority extinguishing side (e.g. special map 2 side) is put on hold during normal play in a priority extinguishing type 1+1 type gaming machine. can be exemplified. The "priority consumption type" in the above explanation is, for example, one in which one of the second game and the first game (here, the second game) is prioritized over the other (here, the first game). It means something like. Furthermore, the "1+1 type gaming machine" in the above description refers to a gaming machine that has a game feature in which multiple (in this case, two) games corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machine are mixed. There is.

In addition, another "situation in which you do not want to send pre-reading information" is the hold on the non-priority consumption side (for example, the special map 1 side) during a specific game (high base medium) in a 1 + 1 type gaming machine of the priority consumption type. Here are some cases where this has occurred. In addition, as mentioned above, when a hold on the priority play side (for example, the special map 2 side) occurs during a normal game in a priority play type 1+1 type gaming machine, a pre-reading effect related to the hold on the special map 1 side is executed. If the game machine is in If a hold on the non-priority extinguishing side (e.g. special drawing 1 side) occurs during a specific game (during high base), even if the pre-reading effect related to the holding on the special drawing 2 side is being executed, the pre-reading The performance may not be canceled (for example, the reserved image of special map 2 that has changed to red may be maintained as it is).
<Main control processing of sub-board>

Next, the main control processing of the aforementioned sub-board 104 will be explained. Here, as main control processing, various interrupt processing, which is exception processing, and processing related thereto will be explained based on FIGS. 22 to 24.
<<Interrupt factors and priority levels>>

First, in this embodiment, in the sub-main board 301 constituting the sub-board 104, a predetermined signal (reset signal) is sent to a reset terminal provided on the CPU 521 as an interrupt factor (factor generation source) given top priority by the CPU 521. Input and various abnormalities occur. Among these, the reset signal is input when the power is turned on, when an external reset is performed, when the watchdog timer times out, etc. When the reset signal is input, the sub-main initial setting process described below (See FIG. 22) is executed.

On the other hand, interrupts when various abnormalities occur are executed depending on whether the watchdog timer function (watchdog function) is enabled or not. That is, if the watchdog function is enabled, when a predetermined abnormality occurs, the processing of the CPU 521 shifts to, for example, a predetermined infinite loop so that the processing time exceeds the set time of the watchdog timer. do. When a runaway is detected due to a timeout in the watchdog function, submain initialization processing (see FIG. 22), which will be described later, is executed. If the various abnormalities described above and the input of the reset signal occur at the same time, priority is given to the reset (sub-main initial setting process) due to the input of the reset signal.

Another cause of interrupt occurrence in the sub-main board 301 is reception of a command (main command) from the main board 102. Whether a command is being received from the main board 102 is determined by detecting the rising edge of a strobe signal (performance data strobe signal serving as a timing signal) from the main board 102. When this main command reception interrupt occurs, main command reception processing (not shown) is executed. The priority level of the main command reception interrupt is set to level 7, which is the next highest level after the above-mentioned highest priority.

In addition, when the watchdog function described above is enabled, an interrupt will be generated if a runaway is detected in the CPU 521 without going through a process that intentionally causes a timeout, as in the case of various abnormalities described above. (Runaway detection interrupt) occurs, and sub-main initial setting processing (see FIG. 22), which will be described later, is executed. The priority level of such a normal watchdog timer interrupt is level 3, which is four steps lower than level 7 described above. Note that in this embodiment, interrupts at levels 4 to 6, which are between this level 3 and the above-mentioned level 7, are not executed.

In addition, transmission/reception with the sub-sub board 302 is another cause of interrupt occurrence. An interrupt related to transmission and reception with the sub-sub board 302 (sub-sub command reception interrupt) occurs when a receive command (sub-sub command) from the sub-sub board 302 is input. When the sub-sub board 302 receives a command (sub-main command) from the sub-main board 301, the command received from the sub-sub board 302 is used to notify the sub-main board 301 that the command has been successfully received. Then, when an interrupt related to transmission/reception with the sub-sub board 302 occurs, command transmission/reception management processing is executed. Note that the command transmission from the sub-main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302 is performed when a monitoring toggle signal is normally sent from the sub-sub board 302, as will be described later. The priority of interrupts related to transmission and reception with this sub-sub board 302 is level 2.

Furthermore, communication with the sub-sub board 302 is another cause of interrupt occurrence. Interrupts related to communication with the sub-sub board 302 (sub-sub communication interrupts) occur at predetermined intervals (500 μs in this embodiment) as described later. Then, when an interrupt related to communication with the sub-sub board 302 occurs, communication processing with the sub-sub board is executed. The priority of interrupts related to communication with this sub-sub board 302 is level 2, which is the same as the interrupts related to transmission and reception with the above-mentioned sub-sub board 302.

Furthermore, other interrupt generation factors include communication with the RTC clock (real-time clock), generation of timer interrupts (sub-main timer interrupts), interrupt requests for various lamps, etc., and these are given the lowest priority level. It is set to 1. Among these, in the case of an interrupt related to communication with the RTC clock, communication processing with the RTC clock is executed. Further, the above-mentioned timer interrupt is used in general game performances such as solenoid output processing, motor output processing, and game timer management processing. The timer interrupt is activated immediately according to the initialization settings (initial settings), and the timer interrupt is repeated at predetermined intervals (approximately 1 ms in this embodiment). When a timer interrupt occurs, timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is executed.
<<Submain initial setting process>>

When the power of the sub-main board 301 is turned on, such as when the power of the Pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on, the sub-main initial setting process shown in FIG. 22 is executed. In this submain initialization process, first, a predetermined address is set as a stack pointer (S201), and then all interrupts are prohibited until various initializations are completed (S202). Furthermore, in hardware initialization processing (S203), basic hardware settings (register settings, port initialization, etc.) are performed, and in RWM initialization processing (S204), RWM initialization is performed according to predetermined conditions. will be held. In this RWM initialization, initial values are prepared for variables with initial values, and variables without initial values are cleared to 0. Furthermore, in the RWM initialization process (S204), ROM data (control program, etc.) is expanded into the RWM.

Further, in S205, interrupts other than reception of the main command are prohibited, and then a power failure recovery error detection process (S206) is executed to set various error information. In this power failure recovery error detection processing (S206), processing is performed depending on circumstances such as game quality. That is, the sub-main board 301 is equipped with a function to deal with various errors including vibration errors, radio wave errors, and the like. However, functions for dealing with these various errors are selected in advance, and the error detection function is activated only for errors that are considered valid. For example, the so-called 1 type 2 type which combines the so-called 1 type and 2 type game characteristics, the so-called ball sure spec, etc., which determines whether or not a predetermined hit will occur when the game ball passes through a specific area. The vibration error detection function is effective for models where the However, in a type of pachinko gaming machine such as the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment, in which the winning/losing lottery is performed only by random number lottery, even if the machine has a vibration error detection function, that function is selectively disabled in advance. Therefore, no special measures are taken for vibration errors, etc.

Subsequently, in all lamps extinguishing processing (S207), a lights out request is made to turn off all lamps, and in watchdog timer operation start processing (S208), based on the setting to use the watchdog timer as a watchdog timer, A watchdog timer is started. In addition, in FIG. 22, the main processing (S209) is shown connected to the processing from S201 to S208, but the processing from S201 to S208 is the sub-main initial setting processing, and the main processing (S209) is performed following this sub-main initial setting process (S201 to S208). Furthermore, in the main process (S209), the main process of the game is managed, and the details of this main process (S209) will be described later.

A sleep process (S210) is arranged after the main process (S209). Normally, this sleep process (S210) is not executed because the main process (S209) does not return to the reset operation that performs the sub-main initial setting process, but as shown by the dashed arrow in the figure, If this sleep processing (S210) is to be executed for some reason, a transition to low power consumption mode is performed.
<<Main processing on sub-main board>>

In the above-mentioned main processing (S209), as shown in FIG. 23, RWM allocation address acquisition processing (S221) is executed, and in this RWM allocation address acquisition processing (S221), the program area developed in RWM is checked. The start address of the expanded program area is obtained so that the program area can be expanded.

Next, to enable interrupts in subsequent processing, all interrupts are permitted (S222). Furthermore, in device initialization processing (S223), various devices such as motors, solenoids, lamps, etc. are initialized. In the subsequent watchdog clearing process (S224), if the watchdog timer is set to be used, the watchdog timer is cleared. Furthermore, in the symbol update process (S225), a losing symbol related to the effect symbols 190a to 190c is determined by the counter.

An example of a counter used here is a three-digit counter from "111" to "999". For example, if the acquired counter value is "757", the effect patterns 190a to 190a are stopped and displayed. 190 may become "757". If the acquired counter value is a combination of diagonal numbers such as "111", it is possible to offset the numerical value of a predetermined digit such as "121" to make the combination a mismatch.

This symbol update process (S225) may not be executed depending on the adopted losing symbol determination method. For example, if a losing symbol is determined by lottery, it is not executed. Specifically, it has data on a lottery sheet (lottery table) that incorporates all symbol combinations, and uses the lottery sheet to determine a losing symbol. An example of a control mode for determining this can be given.

In the subsequent error effect management process (S226), error conditions are monitored, and various error notifications are executed according to the monitoring results.

Next, in the preview lottery management process (S228), a lottery is executed to determine the preview performance. It is done in several parts to increase efficiency. In other words, if multiple preview performances are executed during one fluctuation, the lottery process related to the multiple preview performances is not performed entirely in one main loop, but is performed in multiple main loops. The lottery will be held multiple times. Further, the timing of the lottery is related to the timing of the appearance of the preview performance during the fluctuation. For example, for preview effects that appear at a relatively early timing, such as immediately after the start of fluctuation, the priority of the lottery timing is set high, and by holding the lottery at the timing according to the priority, the image control is performed as quickly as possible. Commands can be sent to the sub-sub board 302 on the side. Note that various processes performed in the preview lottery management process (S228) will be described later.

Next, in device management processing (S229), when there is a request to operate a device such as a real-time clock (RTC), lamp, speaker, etc., processing for operating the corresponding device is executed.

Furthermore, in the command analysis process (S230), if it is necessary to start processing in response to the command (main command) received from the main board 102, or if command data exists in the command buffer, the command analysis may be performed. conduct. If the command has been analyzed (S231: YES), the process returns to the watchdog clear process (S224) and the main loop is executed. Immediately after receiving the command from the main board 102, there is command data in the command buffer, so the main loop is executed and the process returns to the watchdog clearing process (S224) and subsequent processes. However, if the command buffer becomes empty after the main loop is repeated until the next timer interrupt, which will be described later, is executed, there is no need to perform command analysis, and command analysis will not be performed. In such a case, the process does not proceed to the main loop (S231: NO), and uses the generated time to execute random number update processing (S232), which has a lower priority than command analysis. This random number update process (S232) is a soft random number update process. Furthermore, in this command analysis process (S230), a variation pattern (sub variation pattern) in the sub main board 301 is determined. In addition, if a control mode is adopted in which data of a lottery sheet (lottery table) that incorporates all symbol combinations is adopted and the lottery sheet is used to determine losing symbols, the command analysis process (S230) Decide on the design.

Regarding the processing related to these command analysis (S230, S231), in other words, for a certain command, immediately after the command is received, the main processing is performed without proceeding to the subsequent processing (here, the random number update processing (S232)). The other processes (S224 to S231) in the loop process (S224 to S232) are repeated, and when there are no more commands in the command buffer, the process proceeds to the subsequent processes, and as a result, command analysis processing is performed for a certain main command. Immediately after the start of (S230), command analysis is executed, so the process does not proceed to the program module placed later, and when command analysis is not performed in the command analysis process (S230), the process proceeds to the program module placed later. It can be said that it is something that progresses. Note that, if a process such as calculating a checksum is performed after the process of determining whether the command has been analyzed (S231), this process is also executed immediately after receiving the command, similar to the random number update process (S232). It can be said that this is a process that is not performed.

In the random number update process (S232), the lottery random number (software random number) related to the performance is updated, and each time this random number update process (S232) is executed, the software random number related to the sub-main board 301 is updated to a new value. will be updated to. The values that are sequentially updated in the random number update process (S232) are used as random numbers for lottery of various presentation modes in the aforementioned preview lottery management process (S228) and the like. Furthermore, the value generated in the random number update process (S232) is calculated with the hardware random number for the lottery of various performance modes, similar to the generation of the predetermined random number on the main board 102 described above, and is used for the lottery. It is also sometimes used as a random number.
<<Sub-main timer interrupt processing>>

Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained based on FIG. 24. The timer interrupt process occurs every 1 ms, which is a predetermined period. Since this timer interrupt processing is an interrupt processing of level 1, which has the lowest priority, first, as shown in the figure, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher are permitted (S261). Furthermore, port input processing (S262) is executed, and port data input processing and output processing are performed. In this port input processing (S262), processing (input processing) for checking ports connected to various sensors (magnetic sensor, vibration sensor, position sensor of movable performance member, push button input detection sensor, etc.); Information is output (output processing) from ports connected to various devices (motors, solenoids, lamps, etc.).

In addition to these ports, in the port input processing (S262), processing related to power supply voltage monitoring ports to which a signal indicating a power outage (power outage signal) is input in the event of a power outage is also performed. . When this power interruption signal is input, the processing of the CPU 521 prohibits all interrupt processing and shifts to transfer processing for backing up the stored information. Note that the backup function of this sub-main board 301 will be described later.

Subsequently, device control data output processing (S263) is executed to output device control data for driving various motors, solenoids, lamps, etc. For example, in the device management process (S229) of the main process shown in FIG. 23, if a drive control pattern is determined in which a predetermined motor is energized for 100 ms and then demagnetized for 100 ms, this device In the control data output process (S263), a time count process of 100 ms is performed.

Further, a performance timer update process (S264) is executed, and a timer value update process (S265) for measuring predetermined timing in various performances is performed. Then, the button control timer is updated, and the valid time management timer for managing the period during which the operation of the push button (operation button 22) is valid is updated.

Further, push button monitoring control processing (S266) is executed. This push button monitoring control process (S266) is for controlling the above-mentioned operation button 22, which is a production sub-button (push button), and is a process according to the input state (operation state) of the operation button 22. Execute.

Next, the task control counter is updated (S267), and a control counter (multitask counter) used for a plurality of predetermined tasks is updated. This control counter updates the count value once every 1 ms, which is the timer interrupt period, with 16 times as one unit. In this embodiment, the task control counter sequentially counts the values from 0 to 15 every 1 ms, and loops the counting of the values from 0 to 15.

Furthermore, one of the predetermined tasks may be related to game effect lamps. Many game effect lamps are driven in synchronization with the images on the effect display device 60, and the switching of the display of one frame (one unit of image frame) of the video takes approximately 16ms or approximately 32ms (approximately 33ms). (in this embodiment, the period is 16 ms). For this reason, the control counter is designed so that the generation cycle of the control counter related to the game effect lamp forms a relationship such as an integral multiple or an integral fraction of the control unit time (16 ms or 32 ms) in video display. ing. As a result, it becomes easy to design a lamp effect that matches the timing with the image.

Regarding the control counter, for example, if a certain process related to a game effect lamp is performed at an interval of 16 ms, the process is performed at the timing when the value of the control counter reaches one predetermined value such as 3. . In addition, for processes that are performed at 8ms intervals, such as the image CPU runaway monitoring process described later, the process is performed at two timings with a difference of 8, such as when the control counter becomes 1 and when it becomes 9. It will be done.

In addition, if the cycle generated by the control counter is set to a relatively short cycle, such as one cycle (1 ms) of a timer interrupt (sub-main timer interrupt), for example, if the cycle is set to a relatively short cycle (1 ms), it may take about 30 seconds to If control is performed to count a relatively long period of time, the data length that must be secured to count 30 seconds will become long, and the number of memories required will also become large. For this reason, the cycle of the control counter is set longer than one cycle (1 ms) of the timer interrupt, and the relationship between the control cycle of other superimposed effects (image effects) and integral multiples or fractions of an integer is set. The cycle of the control counter is set to a predetermined cycle (here, 16 ms) so that the control counter completes one cycle. Note that another use of the control counter updated in the process of updating the task control counter (S267) is to monitor runaway on the sub-sub board 302 (described later).

Next, image CPU runaway monitoring processing (S268) is executed, and runaway monitoring processing for the image CPU of the sub-subboard 302 is performed. In this embodiment, the CPU of the sub-sub board 302 is integrated into the image controller 526 in FIG. 4. As described above, the sub-sub board 302 outputs a predetermined signal (monitoring toggle signal) that repeats on and off for each frame of video control. If the toggle signal from the sub-sub board 302 does not change continuously for a predetermined period (for example, 1600 ms, which corresponds to about 50 to 100 frames), it is determined that an abnormality such as a runaway of the image CPU has occurred, and A reset signal (external reset signal) is transmitted from the main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302. After receiving this reset signal, the sub-sub board 302 executes a reset process (sub-main initial setting process) for initializing the state of the sub-sub board 302.

Following this image CPU runaway monitoring process (S268), error management timer process (S269) is executed. In this error management timer process (S269), the error management timer is decremented, and upon timeout, a predetermined process is executed. Examples of the process at the time of timeout include the process of terminating the error notification described above. Note that this error management timer counts once for every 16 timer interrupts, and the processing related to error management using the error management timer is also one of the predetermined tasks using the control counter described above. There is one. When this error management timer process ends, the process returns to the original process before the timer interrupt in the main process of the submain (see FIG. 23). Here, since restrictions are placed on the objects for which interrupts are permitted in S261, although not shown, all interrupts are permitted before returning to the main processing of the sub-main.
<<Communication processing with sub-sub board>>

Next, communication processing with the aforementioned sub-sub board 302 will be explained. Sending a command from the sub-main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302 (sending a sub-main command) generates an interrupt (sub communication interrupt) related to communication with the sub-sub board 302 at regular intervals (here, 500 μs), and This is performed by executing communication processing with the sub-sub board 302 at each time. In the communication process with the sub-sub board 302, a buffer check is performed in order to confirm the existence of data to be transmitted, and if there is data, this data is read. Then, the read data is set in the transmission buffer, settings related to command transmission are updated, and the communication process with the sub-sub is completed.
<<Command transmission/reception management processing>>

Also, when the sub-main board 301 sends a command to the sub-sub board 302, the above-mentioned received command (sub-sub command) indicating that the command (sub-main command) was successfully received from the sub-sub board 302 side is sent to the sub-main board 302. It is transmitted to the board 301 side. In this command transmission/reception management process, a command is read, command analysis is executed, and then the command is saved. When receiving a sub-sub command, command reception interrupt processing is executed in the sub-sub board 302, but this command reception interrupt processing requires setting a flag for executing the command reception interrupt processing within the aforementioned sub communication interrupt. Executed by In other words, since the input of the sub-subcommand from the sub-sub board 302 occurs after the sub-main command is transmitted from the sub-main board 301, the command reception interrupt processing is performed incidentally to the processing related to the sub-communication interrupt. It has become something that can be seen.
<<Control processing on sub-sub board>>

Similar to the sub-main board 301, the sub-sub board 302 includes a sub-sub initial setting process that starts after the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the sub-sub initial setting process, and a sub-sub timer interrupt that occurs at a predetermined period for the main process. A timer interrupt process that is executed in conjunction with the sub-main command, a sub-main command reception process that is an interrupt process that occurs in response to the reception of the sub-main command, etc. are executed. Among these, in the sub-main command reception process, when a sub-main command is received from the sub-main board 301, a process of transmitting the above-mentioned reception command (sub-sub-command) indicating that the sub-main command has been successfully received is performed. executed.
<Production control mode related to operation input>
<<Specific aspects of the auto continuous hit function>>

1. Next, various production modes and control modes of production related to operation input will be explained. Note that the "operation input" described here refers to generating a signal or changing the level of a signal by human operation on various operation input means such as the operation button 22, lever L, and cross key 96 described above. It has the meaning of causing.

In this embodiment, as described above, an automatic repeated press function regarding the operation button 22 is installed. The operation mode (button operation mode) of the operation button 22 in which this automatic repeated press function is performed is a continuous operation for a predetermined time or more (long press operation, continuous press operation). If a long-press operation that exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is detected during the effective period of the continuous press (for example, about 3 seconds), the long-press operation after the predetermined time (continues after the predetermined time) Control is performed based on the assumption that a continuous press operation has been performed. Here, at the time when the long-press operation is started (long-press operation start timing), one single operation has actually been performed, so that an effect corresponding to the single operation is executed. Then, when the long press operation reaches a predetermined time (for example, when the long press operation continues for 0.5 seconds), it is assumed that one single operation in the continuous press operation has been performed (the actual single operation is However, once 0.5 seconds have elapsed, it is assumed that a single operation was performed), and long-press operations that exceed the predetermined time will be performed once every specific time (for example, 0.2 seconds). It is assumed that a single operation has been performed (although no actual single operation has been performed, it is assumed that a single operation has been performed every 0.2 seconds after 0.5 seconds have elapsed), and this Auto-repeat (auto-repeat effect, auto-repeat function) is when a single-shot operation is performed multiple times.

FIG. 27(c) shows a time chart illustrating the flow (progress) of the game when the automatic continuous hitting operation is performed. In addition, for comparison with the automatic repeated hitting operation shown in FIG. 27(c), FIGS. 27(a) and 27(b) show an example of game progress when a single operation is performed (FIG. 27(a)), and a repeated tapping operation. An example of the progress of the game (FIG. 27(b)) is shown when (a normal consecutive hitting operation which is a normal consecutive hitting operation) is performed.

First, in the example of a single operation (the example in FIG. 27(a)), which is the basic operation mode of button operation, a variable effect is started (variation start), a normal reach occurs (the normal reach effect starts to be executed), A button effect that prompts the player to perform a single operation is being executed. The button effect here is the single-shot effect mentioned above. Then, when a button operation is performed by the player, a performance triggered by the button operation is executed, the performance develops, and the state shifts to an SP (here, special) reach performance state.

Here, examples of effects triggered by a button operation include those in which the display content of the effect display device 60 moves to the next situation, or a movable effect member hidden inside the center decoration 64 that changes to the effect display device 60. Examples include those that appear on the front and perform operations for deformation and merging, and those that combine these. Regarding button effects, the effects up until the button operation is performed are called, for example, the "first half effect" or the "pre-operation effect," and the effects after the button operation is performed (the effect triggered by the button operation starts). It is possible to refer to the presentation (after operation) as, for example, "second half presentation" or "post-operation presentation."

Subsequently, in the example of the normal repeated press operation shown in FIG. 27(b), the button effect is executed after the variable effect is started (variation start) and the normal reach occurs. This button presentation is accompanied by words such as ``hit repeatedly'' to encourage the player to repeatedly press the button. Further, the button effect at a stage before a button operation is performed can be referred to as a "pre-sequential press effect," for example.

Then, when the player repeatedly presses the button at short intervals (for example, every 0.2 seconds), a button effect that changes the image at short intervals is executed. The button effect when such an operation is performed can be called, for example, a "continuous press effect." A specific example of this "during consecutive hits" will be described later. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 27(b), the performance develops thereafter and shifts to the SP (here, special) reach performance state.

In contrast to such a repeated hitting operation (normal repeated hitting operation), in the automatic repeated hitting operation shown in FIG. 27(c), a button presentation that prompts the player to perform a repeated hitting operation is executed as a button presentation after the normal reach occurs. The performance at this stage can be similar to the pre-sequence-hit performance related to the normal multiple-hit operation described above.

After the button effect has started, if the player presses the button for a predetermined period of time or more, if the player continues to press the button, the player can perform the above-mentioned normal continuous press operation without repeatedly pressing the button. A similar effect (here, it means the same or similar effect) to the effect during continuous hits is executed. In the example of FIG. 27(c), similarly to FIG. 27(b), the presentation develops thereafter and shifts to the SP (here special) reach presentation state.

In the normal repeated tapping operation and the automatic repeated tapping operation illustrated in FIGS. 27(b) and (c), for example, the time that the operation button 22 continues to be pressed (press duration time) may be measured in order to detect the button operation. is possible. Among these, in the case of a normal repeated hit operation (FIG. 27(b)), the duration of the press of the operation button 22 is is for a short period of time (for example, less than 0.5 seconds or 0.5 seconds), one normal continuous tap operation (intermittent operation) is performed (in other words, one single operation is performed in a continuous tap operation presentation) It is determined that this short-term press is repeated multiple times (after the short-term press is continued, the press is released once, and then the press is continued for a short time again, and then repeated). It is possible to control operations.

On the other hand, in the case of the automatic repeated press operation (FIG. 27(c)), in order to detect the button operation, for example, in a situation where a repeated press effect is being performed (such as a situation where the continuous press effect flag is set), When the duration of pressing the operation button 22 exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), it is determined that a long press operation has been performed, and it is possible to perform control related to the automatic continuous press operation. The control related to this automatic repeated tapping operation continues even after the duration of pressing the operation button 22 reaches a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds, etc.) and the first condition regarding the automatic repeated tapping operation is met. By maintaining the continuation, the control related to the automatic continuous press operation will be performed until the continuation of the press is canceled or until the button operation valid period is reached in the situation where the press is continued. Furthermore, even if you stop pressing once the first condition is met and then continue to press again, the automatic continuous press will continue until the second condition is met again after the predetermined pressing duration time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is met. It's not a judgment.

In FIG. 27(c), the timing at which the operation button 22 starts to be pressed is described as "button press (long press for a predetermined period of time or more)", but after this (after the first condition is satisfied) the button continues to be pressed. By satisfying the two conditions, after the first predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed during this continuous press, even if you are not performing the normal continuous press operation (instead, the press is continued). However, it is possible to generate the same effect as when performing a normal continuous tapping operation at specific time intervals (for example, 0.2 seconds).

In other words, when the single operation of the operation button 22 is performed 5 times in a row in the normal continuous press operation as shown in FIG. 27(b), the first single operation, the second single operation, the third single operation, the 4 If the effects that occur for the 1st single operation and the 5th single operation are 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 (however, effects 1 to 5 must not be all different). In other words, any aspect may be the same; for example, effects 1 and 2 may be displayed with a blue effect, effects 3 may be displayed with a green effect, effects 4 and 5 may be displayed with a red effect, etc.), FIG. When the duration of pressing the operation button 22 exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds, etc.) in the automatic repeated press operation as shown in FIG. The effect that occurs when the time (for example, 0.5 seconds, etc.) is reached is the effect 2, and from there, each timing (for example, the press duration is 0.7 seconds) at a specific time interval (for example, 0.2 seconds). , 0.9 seconds, and 1.1 seconds) are effect 3, effect 4, and effect 5, respectively.

In other words, when performing an automatic repeated press operation, the time when the operation button 22 starts to be pressed is considered to be the first single operation (first consecutive press), and the timing when the subsequent press duration reaches 0.5 seconds is It is considered as the second single-shot operation (second consecutive press), and after that, every time the button is pressed for 0.2 seconds, it becomes the 3rd, 4th, 5th, etc. N-time single operation (Nth single-shot operation). It will be considered.

Note that the term "auto-repeating operation" can mean an operation for satisfying the above-mentioned first condition (in this case, the button is continuously pressed for 0.5 seconds or more). Furthermore, it is also possible to include the fact that the button is pressed continuously even after the first condition is satisfied (the second condition described above) to be referred to as an "auto continuous press operation." In the following, the term "auto continuous press operation" means that an operation that satisfies the first condition is performed, and then a continuation of the button operation is detected. Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is assumed that 0.5 seconds are required for the first condition to be satisfied, but the time required for the first condition to be satisfied is not limited to this.

Here, FIGS. 27(a) to 27(c) are schematic illustrations of features of the auto continuous hit function, along with the single shot function and the continuous hit function. Further, the automatic repeated hit function, single shot function, and repeated hit function are not limited to those exemplified here, and various modes can be adopted.

FIG. 28(a) shows a more specific example (concrete example of the automatic repeated tapping operation) regarding the flow of button operations and effects related to the above-mentioned automatic repeated tapping function. In FIG. 28(a), the variation time of the variation pattern drawn on the main board 102 is several tens of seconds or more (for example, about 60 seconds), and the sub side performs a performance corresponding to this variation pattern. Part of the flow of the production is shown.

In the example of FIG. 28(a), as shown at the left end in the figure, symbol variation has started in the effect display device 60. Thereafter, a predetermined period of time (3 seconds in this case) is a button operation invalidation period in which the operation of the operation button 22 is invalidated, that is, a period in which no button effect occurs. When 3 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation and the above-mentioned button operation invalid period has passed, the button operation valid period is reached, that is, the button effect is generated (started). Here, this button operation valid period is an automatic repeated press valid period.

At this point, it is possible to start an effect accompanied by a guide display such as a button image and perform a front button effect, and in the example of FIG. A production (pre-series production) is being performed. Regarding this performance before consecutive hits, an example of the performance before consecutive hits is shown in FIG. 31(a).

The pre-sequence-hit presentation starts as a front button presentation accompanied by a guide display. Here, it is possible to start displaying the automatic consecutive hit valid period and the pre-multiple hit presentation at the same timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timings of both may be made different. If the start timings of the two are different, for example, it is conceivable that the pre-multiple-hit performance starts a predetermined time after the start of the auto-multiple-hit valid period (for example, 0.5 to 1 second after the start).

It is also conceivable that the pre-speech effect is started a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 to 1 second) earlier than the auto-sequence effective period. Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 28(a), the button operation valid period and the automatic repeated press valid period are the same, but this is not limiting. ) It is also possible to start the automatic continuous hit valid period after a delay.

When a button operation on the operation button 22 is detected by the sub-main CPU 521 (FIG. 4) of the sub-main board 301, a time measurement related to the duration of the button operation is performed. Then, when the duration of the button operation reaches a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this case), the first condition is met, and it is determined that the long press has satisfied the auto continuous press start condition. Continuation of button operation (continuation of pressing for 0.5 seconds or more that satisfies the second condition) is regarded as a normal continuous press operation, and a continuous press effect is executed. For example, after the duration of the button operation reaches a predetermined time (0.5 seconds here), the continuation of the button operation (continuation of pressing that satisfies the second condition) is performed at a specific time interval (here, 0.5 seconds), as described above. It is assumed that a normal continuous hitting operation is being performed at intervals of 0.2 seconds, and a continuous hitting effect is executed as if a normal repeated hitting operation is being performed at specific time intervals.

As the above-mentioned continuous hit performance (here, continuous hit performance related to automatic continuous hit), the one shown in FIG. 31(b) can be exemplified. In FIG. 31(b), a glitter image 404 serving as an effect element is displayed around the button image 401. A glitter image 404 in the figure expresses the glitter emitted from the button image 401 to the periphery. Then, the luminous image 404 is colored white or white-based, and the luminous image 404 appears and disappears at a relatively short period (for example, at an interval of 0.2 seconds, which is the same as the interval of automatic continuous hits). (blinking display) is repeated during the continuous hit performance. However, the luminous image 404 may also be made to blink at the start of the button operation and at the timing when the duration of the button operation reaches a predetermined time (here, 0.5 seconds) (timing when the first condition described above is satisfied). Can be done. In other words, at the beginning of the button operation (the first button operation) until the automatic repeated press starts (until the automatic continuous press occurs at a specific interval of 0.2 seconds), the button operation (single-shot operation) is actually performed in the first place. , the luminous image 404 is blinked, and the button is actually operated from the timing when the start condition (first condition) for subsequent automatic continuous presses is satisfied (the timing when the duration of button operation reaches the predetermined time of 0.5 seconds). Even if you do not perform a button operation (single operation), it is assumed that a button operation (single operation) has been performed, and after that, automatic button presses occur at specific intervals of 0.2 seconds (single operation is performed at 0.2 second intervals). considered to be carried out).

Note that the effect element is not limited to one that appears or disappears, and for example, it is also possible to cause the button image 401 to blink as a part of the effect element. Furthermore, it is also possible to use images other than the button image 401 and the glitter image 404 as effect elements. Here, it is also possible to capture both the button image 401 and the glitter image 404 as one button image 401.

Such a brilliant image 404 of the continuous hit effect is displayed not only in the continuous hit effect related to automatic continuous hits, but also when normal continuous hits (actual continuous hits) are performed. In other words, it is possible to use the same image to be displayed for the continuous hitting effect related to automatic continuous hitting and the continuous hitting effect related to normal continuous hitting. In the continuous-hitting effect related to normal repeated hitting, the glittering image 404 can be made to blink at the timing in response to button operation. Further, the continuous hit effect that allows automatic continuous play is a continuous play effect that allows normal continuous play. As a modification, part of the continuous hit performance that allows normal continuous hits may be a continuous hit performance that does not allow automatic repeated hits.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and even in the case of a continuous hit effect related to a normal continuous hit, after the bright image 404 is displayed in response to the first button operation, the flashing of the bright image 404 is automatically performed at a certain period. It is also possible to display the information. This mode of performance control can be said to be the same mode for the continuous hit performance related to automatic continuous hits and the continuous hit performance related to normal continuous hits.
<<<Relationship between the auto repeated press valid period and the button repeated press valid period (if they are the same)>>>

Furthermore, it is also possible to perform the following control regarding the valid period of automatic consecutive hits (automatic consecutive hits valid period). For example, as shown in FIG. 28(a), it is possible to make the automatic continuous press valid period the same as the normal continuous press valid period (herein referred to as "button continuous press valid period"). It is also possible to set the automatic repeated press valid period and the button repeated press valid period to have the same start timing and end timing. The button operation valid period in such specifications can be said to be both the auto repeated press valid period and the button press valid period. In other words, it is appropriate to simply refer to the period during which both automatic and normal repeated hits are possible as the "button operation effective period" (although it may be described separately for convenience, it is The "validity period" can be said to be a period that is both the "auto repeated press valid period" and the "button repeated press valid period"). Here, it is also possible to make the automatic repeated press valid period and the button repeated press valid period different, but such an example (such as the example shown in FIG. 28(b)) will be described later.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide no distinction between the automatic repeated press valid period and the button repeated press valid period, and provide both as a common repeated press valid period. In the example of FIG. 28(a), it can be said that the automatic repeated press valid period and the button repeated press valid period are provided as a common repeated press valid period.
<<<Relationship between auto continuous hit performance (auto continuous hit performance) and normal continuous hit performance>>>

In addition, the continuous hit effect related to automatic repeated hits can be such that the flashing of the glittering image 404 is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) and ends. The operation can be executed multiple times (repeatedly) by button operation until the operation validity period ends. Here, the continuous hit effect related to this automatic continuous hit can be referred to as, for example, "auto continuous hit effect" or "auto continuous hit effect." In the following, when explaining the continuous hit effect related to auto continuous hit, the term ``auto continuous hit effect'' will be used preferentially, and if it is necessary to use it properly, the term ``auto continuous hit effect'' will be used. .

In addition, the continuous press effect related to normal continuous presses can be similarly configured to end when a predetermined number of button presses (for example, 10 times) are detected, and other specifications include button operations. It can be executed multiple times (repeatedly) by button operation until the validity period ends. Here, the continuous hit performance related to this normal continuous hit can be referred to as a "normal continuous hit performance", for example. In the following description, the term "normal continuous hit effect" will be used as necessary to distinguish it from "auto continuous hit effect" (and "auto continuous hit effect").
<<<Relationship between the auto continuous press valid period and the button continuous press valid period (in case of discrepancies) >>>

Furthermore, the relationship between the automatic repeated press valid period and the button repeated press valid period as described above may be different in at least one of the start timing, end timing, or length of the period. For example, FIG. 28(b) shows an example in which the automatic repeated press valid period and the button repeated press valid period are different. It should be noted that the explanation here is based on the specific example of the auto-repeat operation shown in FIG. 28(a), so the explanation of similar parts will be omitted as appropriate.

In the control example shown in FIG. 28(b), first, the operation of the operation button 22 is disabled for a predetermined period of time (here, 3 seconds as in the example of FIG. 28(a)) after symbol variation is started. It has become. After that, the automatic continuous press valid period starts, and the automatic continuous press operation is performed. If the second condition is satisfied by continuing to press the key for 0.5 seconds or more), a continuous-hit effect related to automatic continuous hits (auto continuous-hit effect) is executed.

At this time, the valid period of button presses related to the normal press operation has not yet started, as shown in a state slightly biased toward the right side in the figure. Then, a predetermined period of time (here, 2 seconds) after the automatic button press valid period starts, the button press valid period starts. In FIG. 28(b), the start timing of the valid button press period is indicated by a two-dot chain line. In this way, a control example in which the automatic repeated press valid period and the button repeated press valid period are different can be said to be an example in which the automatic repeated press valid period and the button repeated press valid period are provided as non-common repeated press valid periods.

Further, in the example of FIG. 28(b), the automatic repeated press valid period and the button repeated press valid period end at the same timing after a predetermined period of time (for example, 8 seconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the automatic repeated press valid period may end before (or after) the button repeated press valid period. Furthermore, the automatic repeated press valid period may start after the button press valid period.
＜＜＜Other relationships between the auto continuous press valid period and the button continuous press valid period＞＞＞

Further, although not shown in the drawings, for example, the automatic repeated press valid period or the button repeated press valid period may exist multiple times during one change. In this case, the button operation valid period related to the repeated press operation (a set of the automatic repeated press valid period and the button press valid period) is set as one set, and these sets are set during one variable period with the button operation invalid period in between, for example. One possibility is to prepare three times.

In addition, during one button performance during one variation, there is a continuous press effect related to automatic continuous presses (referred to as "auto continuous press effect" in this explanation) and a continuous press effect related to normal continuous presses (normal continuous press effect). It is also conceivable that the timing of the production (mid-stage production) may be staggered so that they do not overlap on more than the time axis. For example, a case can be exemplified in which a player first performs a normal repeated hitting operation, but changes his mind midway through and switches to an automatic repeated hitting operation, or vice versa. In these cases, it is possible to continue the automatic continuous hit performance after the normal continuous hit performance, or conversely, to continue the normal continuous hit performance after the automatic continuous hit performance. . When continuing the auto continuous hit performance after the normal continuous hit performance, the number of consecutive hits related to the normal continuous hit performance (number of single-shot operations) and the subsequent number of consecutive hits related to the auto continuous hit performance (start of pressing the button to perform the auto continuous hit operation) The number of consecutive presses (the first time the time is pressed repeatedly, the second time when the predetermined time has elapsed, and the third time after that at a specific interval) is the number of consecutive presses during one button performance (during continuous press performance), and the number of consecutive presses during one button performance (during continuous press performance). If you want to continue the normal continuous hit performance later, the number of consecutive hits related to the automatic continuous hit performance (the start of pressing the button to perform the automatic repeated hit operation is the first consecutive hit, the elapse of a predetermined time is the second time, and the specific interval after that is the third time) The sum of the number of consecutive presses (the number of times that occurs) and the subsequent number of consecutive presses (the number of single-shot operations) related to the normal consecutive press presentation becomes the number of consecutive presses during one button presentation (during the continuous press presentation).

It should be noted that, as explained here, the repeated-hit performance accompanied by the guide display can be referred to as, for example, a "repeat-hit performance as a front button performance." However, the invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to perform a back button effect (described later) that does not involve a guide display at least at the time before the button is operated. Such a continuous hit performance without a guide display can be referred to as, for example, a ``repeat hit performance as a back button performance.'' This "repeat hit performance as a back button performance" will be described later.
<<Relationship between repeated press operations and other types of button operations>>

2. Next, it is possible to consider the relationship between the continuous press operation (here, both automatic continuous press operation and normal continuous press operation) and other types of button operations related to the operation button 22. For example, the button operation valid period related to the repeated press operation (here, the continuous press operation valid period, which is a period that is at least one of the automatic repeated press valid period and the button press valid period) is set to about 6 seconds to 10 seconds. . On the other hand, the button operation valid period for a single operation (single operation valid period) is set to about 3 seconds. In other words, it is possible to set the effective period of the continuous-hit operation to be relatively long compared to the effective period of the single-shot operation. In addition, as mentioned above, multiple types of button operation validity periods may be provided depending on the type of button performance. For example, when comparing a single-shot operation performance and a repeated-press operation performance, the button operation validity period will be longer for a repeated-press operation performance. (If multiple types of single-shot operation effects and multiple types of repeated-press operation effects are provided, the average value of the button operation valid period for the multiple types of single-shot operation effects is longer than the average value of the button operation validity period for the multiple types of continuous-press operation effects. (It is possible to configure the device so that the average value of the button operation valid period is relatively long.)
<<Combination of back button function and auto continuous press function>>

3. Next, it is possible to consider a performance mode and a control mode that combine the automatic repeated hit function and the above-mentioned back button function. The back button effect is a effect in which no guide display is performed or the guide display is limited, as described above. For example, it is possible to perform a back button effect while enabling the auto-repeating function.

FIG. 29(a) schematically illustrates the relationship between the automatic repeated hit function and the back button effect. Note that since the explanation here is based on the case of the front button effect shown in FIG. 28(a), the explanation of similar parts will be omitted as appropriate. In the example of FIG. 29(a), as shown on the left end of the figure, symbol fluctuations start on the effect display device 60, and after passing through a button operation invalid period, a button operation valid period (valid period of repeated hit operation) is reached. There is.

At this point, there is no performance accompanied by a guide display such as a button image, and no performance before consecutive hits is performed. Thereafter, when a button operation on the operation button 22 is detected, the sub-main CPU 521 (FIG. 4) determines that the condition (first condition) for the automatic continuous press function is satisfied by pressing the button for a predetermined period of time (such as 0.5 seconds). As mentioned above, by continuing to press the button after a predetermined time (and continuing to press the button for 0.5 seconds or more, which satisfies the second condition), an automatic continuous press is performed as a continuous press effect. The middle effect, the automatic continuous hit effect, is executed.

In addition, if a button operation for a shorter time (such as 0.2 seconds) is detected instead of a long press, the sub-main CPU 521 will detect the normal continuous press condition (a continuous press consisting of multiple single operations). It is determined that the condition for a single operation for one of the operations is satisfied, and as the button operation is repeated, a normal continuous press effect, which is a normal continuous press effect, is performed as a continuous press effect. executed.

To give a specific example of a production related to a back button production, first, when a predetermined production (for example, a predetermined character appears) is executed, even though there is no production accompanied by a guide display such as a button image, etc. The button operation valid period is now in effect, and the operation button 22 is operated by the player. When the operation button 22 is operated by the player while the predetermined performance is being performed, the predetermined character performs a specific action (for example, starts running, waves his hand, or (such as picking up a predetermined item), displaying a cut-in image in which a predetermined image is suddenly inserted in front of a predetermined character (cut-in display), Examples include: In this embodiment, a back button effect related to a continuous press operation will be mainly described later, but a back button effect related to a single press operation may also be included. In other words, even though there is no effect accompanied by a guide display such as a button image, the button operation is still valid, and if a single operation is performed during the button operation valid period, the predetermined character as described above performs a specific action (for example, starts running, waves, or picks up a certain item), or a certain image is suddenly inserted in front of a certain character. A cut-in image may be displayed (cut-in display), or a special sound may be output depending on the level of expectation of a jackpot (the effect is generated by a single operation without the need for repeated tapping operations). Here, depending on the behavior of a predetermined character (for example, whether it starts running or waving its hand), the mode of cut-in display (for example, whether the cut-in is blue or red), and the mode of special audio ( For example, it is preferable that the jackpot expectation levels are different (voices such as "Jackpot expectation level 10%!" and "Jackpot expectation level 90%!"). In this case, in the back button effect related to the repeated press operation, the effect that occurs due to the repeated press operation (for example, the blinking display in which the luminous image 404 appears and disappears during SP reach), and the single-shot A performance that occurs when a single operation is performed in the back button performance related to the operation (for example, by performing a single operation at the timing when a predetermined character appears before SP reach development, the predetermined character performs a specific action as described above) It is preferable to have different effects (such as performing a cut-in image, displaying a cut-in image, or outputting a special sound).

The player's behavior when operating the operation button 22 is to try the operation based on intuition, although it is not known whether or not the performance triggered by the button operation will be executed. Further, among the back button effects, examples of effects such as limiting the above-mentioned guide display include those using only LED light emission. In other words, an example is one in which a guide display such as a button image is not performed, and only LED light is emitted (for example, light is emitted from a light emitting member or decoration attached to the operation button 22).

Here, such a repeated hit performance without or with limited guide display can be referred to as a "repeated hit performance as a back button performance" as described above. In addition, the control mode of the sub-main CPU 521 that performs a performance by combining the back button function with the auto-repeated-hit function is such that it has a repeat-hit performance as the back button performance and enables execution of the auto-repeat function. Is possible. Furthermore, such a control mode can be said to be a combination of the back button function and the automatic repeated press function (the reverse button and the automatic repeated press).

Also, in the repeated press effect as a back button effect, as mentioned above, the effect before (or up to) the button operation is the first half effect (pre-operation effect), and the effect before the button operation (or after the button operation) is the first half effect (pre-operation effect). It is possible to make the presentation (only) the second half presentation (post-operation presentation). To give a more specific example, in the first half performance (pre-operation performance), in a situation where the normal reach performance is being performed after the start of variation, the player performs a button operation for repeated hits or automatic repeated hits. Then, the performance becomes the second half performance (post-operation performance) and develops from normal reach to SP reach. In this case, in this embodiment, the performance during button operation constitutes a part of the second half performance. For example, if a symbol effect, etc. is displayed in conjunction with a button operation, and then progresses to SP Reach, the display of a symbol effect, etc., which is the effect during the button operation, or the SP Reach effect, which progresses after the button operation, is displayed. It is possible to include this in the second half of the performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to distinguish the performance during the button operation triggered by the button operation, for example, by calling it "operation performance" or "middle stage performance" to distinguish it from the second half performance.

Here, the back button effect as described above can be said to be a relatively inconspicuous effect compared to the front button effect. For example, the back button performance is not a performance that is actively performed like the display of a button image in the front button performance, but can be said to be a performance that does not specifically prompt the player to perform a specific operation. Furthermore, a back button performance can be a performance in which the player cannot specify which part of the performance is related to a button operation. Furthermore, a situation in which a predetermined character performs a specific action (e.g., running, waving, etc.) or a predetermined cut-in display on a video can be referred to as a back button effect. It is possible.

Further, the above-mentioned first half effect can be referred to as a back button effect. In this case, the performance during a part of the first half performance (here, the final stage) can also be referred to as a back button performance.

Furthermore, it is also possible to refer to the above-mentioned second half performance as a back button performance, or to refer to a performance during a part of the second half performance (for example, the beginning or the period from the beginning to the middle) as a back button performance. Furthermore, in a broader sense than these, the first half performance and the second half performance can be collectively referred to as a series of back button performances. Furthermore, it is also possible to consider the back button presentation as a passive presentation, and the front button presentation accompanied by a guide display such as a button image as an active presentation.

Furthermore, the effects performed in response to a button operation (the effects when transitioning from the first half to the second half) include, for example, those in which the display content of the effect display device 60 moves to the next situation, and the inside of the center decoration 64. Examples include a movable performance member that is hidden in the display device 60 and appears in front of the performance display device 60 to perform transformation and merging operations, and a combination of these. Note that, in this embodiment, the performance performed in response to a button operation (the performance when transitioning from the first half performance to the second half performance) constitutes a part of the second half performance, as described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effects that are triggered by button operations (the effects when transitioning from the first half to the second half) are referred to as "operation effects," "middle effects," etc., and are referred to as the second half effects. It is also possible to differentiate.

Furthermore, for example, if a button performance is performed in the SP reach situation, it is possible to say that the SP reach continued (or was promoted) in the second half performance. Furthermore, there are cases where there is no development of reach or continuation of SP reach even if there is a button operation (including automatic repeated press operation), but in such cases, the effect may not progress to the second half of the effect. can.

Note that although an automatic repeated press effect is described here as a back button effect, other button effects as a back button effect may also be executed. For example, it is possible to perform a normal continuous press effect as a back button effect, a single button effect as a back button effect, and the like.
<<Relationship between the automatic continuous press effect as a back button effect and subsequent effects>>

4. Next, as mentioned above, in the automatic repeated hit function as a back button effect, depending on the mode of the effect during repeated hits, the possibility that a specific effect will occur after that variation (the variation) and the possibility of development of the effect. It is possible to have different genders. This multi-hit effect will mainly be explained here as an auto-multiple hit effect, but a continuous-hit effect that allows automatic continuous hits is a continuous-hit effect that allows normal continuous hits, so it can be used not only for automatic continuous hits but also for normal continuous hits. It should be noted that it is possible to generate effects (effects are executed during continuous hits).

For example, a plurality of types are provided for the mode of the continuous hit performance by automatic continuous hit and the subsequent performance (post-multiple hit performance that may be performed after the continuous hit performance ends). When a predetermined type of performance is selected from among multiple types as a performance during repeated automatic hits (actually, by performing repeated hits, that is, by repeating the operation, the performance will be changed in stages. If the mode changes), a subsequent performance (performance after continuous hit performance) that corresponds to the mode of the continuous hit performance by automatic repeated hits is executed. Regarding the continuous press effect in this type of effect, it can be said to be an ``auto continuous press effect as a back button effect.'' On the other hand, when performing the same effect as a front button effect, it is called ``as a front button effect.'' It can be said that it is an automatic continuous hit production.

To give a specific example, for automatic continuous hit performance, videos for multiple types of performance that differ only in effect elements are provided. As the effect element, the coloring in the aforementioned glitter image 404 (FIG. 31(b)) can be applied, but various other elements can also be used. First, the basic coloring of the luminous image 404 is set to a pale white or white-based color, and after the auto-repeating operation becomes effective (until then, as described above, the timing of the button press start and It is determined that the operation has been performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and a flashing display is also performed at each timing), and a luminous image is displayed at a predetermined period (for example, at 0.2 second intervals) to imitate the actual repeated tapping operation. A flashing display in which 404 appears and disappears is repeated during the continuous hit performance.

Furthermore, in the automatic continuous hit performance during normal reach, the above-mentioned effect element (here, the luminous image 404) can be used in addition to white or white color, such as blue or blue color, yellow or yellow color, green or green color. Coloring, red or red coloring, and even giraffe patterns may cause flashing.

Furthermore, this effect element is configured so that the mode of production can be changed in stages by repeated hits, that is, by repeating the operation. For example, it is desirable that the appearance changes such that the first to third consecutive hits are white or white-colored, the fourth consecutive hits are blue or blueish, and the fifth consecutive hits are yellow or yellowish. Also, although the details will be described later, depending on the final mode (here, the type of color that was last displayed within the button operation validity period), whether or not subsequent effects (effects after repeated press effects) will be executed or not. It is configured such that the level of expectation is different, and when a subsequent performance is executed, the tendency of what kind of subsequent performance will be executed is also configured to be different.

The degree of expectation that the subsequent performance will be executed increases in the following order: white or white-based < blue or blue-based < yellow or yellow-based < green or green-based < red or red-based < giraffe pattern. In addition, regarding the tendency of what kind of subsequent productions will be executed, if the possible subsequent production candidates are, for example, production A, production B, and production C (for example, productions A to C are Each type of SP reach performance is different, and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of performance A < performance B < performance C), and the expectation level for subsequent performances with high jackpot expectations to be executed is white or white. The ranking is higher in the order of system < blue or blue color < yellow or yellow color < green or green color < red or red color < giraffe pattern. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform a performance lottery each time a button is pressed, and to execute a predetermined performance (for example, a high expectation performance) if a winner is selected.Furthermore, it is also possible to perform a performance promotion lottery each time a button is pressed. , it is also possible to promote the current mode to a mode with higher expectations (for example, promote from blue to yellow, promote from green to red, etc.) if the current mode is won.

In addition, we will explain a series of effects that can be developed from normal reach to the first half of SP reach, there is an automatic repeated hit effect as a back button effect in the first half of SP reach, and it is possible to further develop from the first half of SP reach to the second half of SP reach as an example. do. In the automatic continuous hit performance during the first half of SP reach, the above-mentioned effect element (here, the luminous image 404) can be used in addition to white or white-based colors, such as blue or blue-based coloring, yellow or yellow-based coloring, green or greenish coloring. Coloring, red or red coloring, and even giraffe patterns may cause flashing. In addition, the automatic repeated hit performance during normal reach is a front button performance, and the automatic repeated hit performance during the first half of SP reach may be a back button performance. In that case, the automatic repeated hit performance during normal reach and the automatic repeated hit performance during the first half of SP reach are the same. It is preferable that these should be handled differently (for example, the automatic repeated hit effect during normal reach is an effect element that occurs on the button image 401 mentioned above, but the automatic repeated hit effect during the first half of SP reach is an effect element that occurs for a specific character). ). Alternatively, the auto-repeat effect may not be performed during normal reach, and the auto-repeat effect may be performed as a back button effect during the first half of SP reach.

Furthermore, this effect element is configured so that the appearance of the effect can be changed in stages by repeated hits, that is, by repeating the operation, similar to the automatic repeated hit effect during normal reach. For example, it is desirable that the appearance changes such that the first to third consecutive hits are white or white-colored, the fourth consecutive hits are blue or blueish, and the fifth consecutive hits are yellow or yellowish. Also, although the details will be described later, depending on the final mode (in this case, the type of color that was last displayed within the button operation validity period), whether or not subsequent effects (effects after repeated press effects) will be executed or not. It is configured such that the level of expectation for each subsequent performance is different, and when the subsequent performance is executed, the tendency of what kind of subsequent performance will be executed is also configured to be different.

The expectation level for the subsequent performance is similar to the auto continuous hit performance during normal reach. increasing in order. In addition, regarding the tendency of what kind of subsequent productions will be executed, if the possible subsequent production candidates are, for example, production A, production B, and production C (for example, productions A to C are Each type of SP reach second half performance is different, and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of performance A < performance B < performance C), and the expectation level for subsequent performances with high jackpot expectations is white or The ranking increases in the following order: white color < blue or blue color < yellow or yellow color < green or green color < red or red color color < giraffe pattern. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform a performance lottery each time a button is pressed, and to execute a predetermined performance (for example, a high expectation performance) if a winner is selected.Furthermore, it is also possible to perform a performance promotion lottery each time a button is pressed. , it is also possible to promote the current mode to a mode with higher expectations (for example, promote from blue to yellow, promote from green to red, etc.) if the current mode is won.

As mentioned above, when the effect element (glossy image 404) is displayed in red, red (red effect), or giraffe pattern (giraffe pattern effect), it is better than when it is displayed in other colors. Also, it is conceivable that when an auto-repeat operation is performed, SP reach occurs at a high rate. In this case, it can be said that the red effect display is a display with a higher expectation level than the white effect display, the blue effect, and the like.

Also, when the effect element (radiant image 404) becomes a giraffe pattern effect, it will develop into SP reach at a higher rate than when it becomes a red effect. It is possible to do so. In this case, the giraffe pattern effect display can be said to be displayed in a manner with higher expectations than the red effect display.

Further, if the effect is displayed in a predetermined manner (for example, red, red color, giraffe pattern, etc.), it is possible to perform an effect in such a manner that the development to SP reach is confirmed. In this case, red, red-colored effect displays, or giraffe-patterned effect displays are more likely to improve reach than other colors (for example, blue, blue-ish, yellow, yellow-ish, green, green-ish, etc.). The effect is displayed in such a highly anticipated manner.

Furthermore, it is possible to vary not only the expected degree of reach development (the expected degree of reach development) but also the expected degree of jackpot for subsequent performances depending on the mode of the automatic consecutive hit performance. For example, if the effect display related to the automatic continuous hit performance is performed in a predetermined manner (for example, a giraffe pattern), it is possible to perform the performance in such a manner that a jackpot is achieved at a rate close to 100%. In the case of this jackpot expectation level, for example, a giraffe pattern effect display can be said to be a presentation with a higher expectation level than the above-mentioned red or red effect display.

In addition, it is not limited to the relationship between normal reach and SP reach as described above, or the relationship between the first half of SP reach and the second half of SP reach, but also the relationship between normal reach and the second half of SP reach, and the performance before reach, normal reach, and before reach. It is also possible to apply the relationship between effect display and jackpot expectation as explained so far to the relationship between the production and the first half of SP reach, and the production before reach and the second half of SP reach, etc. .

Furthermore, when applying the above-mentioned performances A to C to the second half of SP reach, they can be called, for example, SP reach second half performance A, SP reach second half performance B, SP reach second half performance C, etc. The term "SP reach second half performance" is also used in the explanation that follows, but both terms "SP reach second half performance" refer to SP reach as the first half based on the predetermined timing and performance situation. It is used in the same sense in that it refers to the production of the latter part when considered separately.

Moreover, the following can also be exemplified as to the relationship between the first half of SP reach and the second half of SP reach. For example, the "first half of SP reach" is SP reach for a predetermined period of time (about 30 seconds, etc.), and the expectation of a jackpot is relatively lower than the "second half of SP reach", and the player is unlikely to hit the jackpot in the "first half of SP reach". Rather than wishing to be notified of such winnings, this is a performance that expects the transition to the "second half of SP reach", and "second half of SP reach" is longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time (about 30 seconds, etc.) of "first half of SP reach". This is a reach performance that lasts for a long predetermined time (about 60 seconds, etc.), and has a relatively higher degree of expectation for a jackpot than the "first half of SP reach", and is a performance in which the player expects to be notified of winnings related to the jackpot.
<<Various aspects related to back button production>>

Regarding the back button effect as described above, various effect modes and control modes can be adopted in addition to those described above. For example, as described above, an example in which the flashing cycle of the luminous image 404 (FIG. 31(b)) is set to a predetermined time (0.2 seconds) as an automatic repeated press effect, but in the case of an automatic repeated press effect as a back button effect, Unlike the automatic repeated press effect as a front button effect, it is conceivable to set the blinking period of the luminous image 404 to another predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (in this case, in the automatic repeated press effect as a front button effect, (0.2 second intervals).

By doing so, it is possible to perform the automatic repeated-hit performance as the back button performance and the automatic repeated-hit performance as the above-mentioned front button performance in different modes (perform them with different consecutive press intervals). In the case where the presentation modes are made to differ between the back button presentation and the front button presentation in this manner, the presentation manners may be made to differ due to differences in various other factors. For example, it is possible to vary the shape and form of the glitter image 404, or to use effect elements other than the glitter image 404, for example, in a repeated press effect as a back button effect. Furthermore, the automatic repeated press effect as a back button effect is an effect that causes the luminous image 404 to flash, but the auto repeated press effect as a front button effect is completely different from that, and may be an effect that gradually increases the meter in the meter image. , it is also possible to simply change the interval between consecutive hits during automatic consecutive hits (0.5 seconds for the former and 0.2 seconds for the latter).

Furthermore, the start timing of the automatic continuous hit valid period in the back button performance may be before or after the timing (execution start timing) of the first reach (here, normal reach). Additionally, the auto-repeated-hit effective period for the back button performance may be longer than the auto-repeated-hit effective period for the front button performance (what is the auto-repeated hit performance as the back button performance and the auto-repeated hit performance as the front button performance? This is a different effect; for example, an auto-repeat effect as a front button effect is executed before the normal reach occurs). Since the automatic repeated hit effect as a back button effect does not display a guide or is limited, there is a possibility that the player will not notice it, so it is desirable to make it relatively long. However, as a modified example, the automatic repeated press effect as a back button effect has a relatively short effective period because it can only be operated by a player who knows the automatic repeated press effect (in other words, it is unlikely to be operated by accident). It can also be used as time.

In addition, multiple types of auto-repeat effects (for example, auto-repeat effect A and auto-repeat effect B, etc.) are provided as auto-repeat effects as back button effects, and the flashing cycle of the luminous image 404 differs depending on the type of auto-repeat effect. It is possible to adopt a presentation mode such as: Such effects include, for example, flashing the luminous image 404 every 0.5 seconds when executing automatic repeated hitting effect A (first automatic repeated hitting effect), and blinking the luminous image 404 every 0.5 seconds when executing automatic repeated hitting effect B (second automatic repeated hitting effect). For example, the bright image 404 may be blinked every 0.2 seconds. Further, the same configuration may be applied not only to the automatic repeated press effect as a back button effect but also to the automatic repeated press effect as a front button effect. In other words, multiple types of automatic continuous hit effects (for example, auto continuous effect C and auto continuous effect D, etc.) are provided as automatic continuous press effects as front button effects, and the flashing cycle of the luminous image 404 differs depending on the type of automatic continuous press effect. It is possible to adopt a presentation mode such as: Such effects include, for example, flashing the luminous image 404 every 0.5 seconds when executing automatic repeated hitting effect C (third automatic repeated hitting effect), and blinking the luminous image 404 every 0.5 seconds when executing automatic repeated hitting effect D (fourth automatic repeated hitting effect). For example, the bright image 404 may be blinked every 0.2 seconds.

In addition, if the performance mode is made to differ depending on the type of automatic repeated hit effect, the valid period of button operation for automatic repeated hit effect A (auto continuous hit effect period) and the valid period of button operation for automatic repeated hit effect B (auto continuous hit effect period) It is possible to make the length of time different depending on the consecutive hit effective period). In addition, as a performance before an automatic repeated hit operation is performed, for example, in a case where multiple cut-in displays can be performed in succession, the number of cut-in displays is made different between automatic repeated hit performance A and automatic repeated hit performance B. , etc. can also be considered.

Furthermore, when the back button effect is executed, even if the player operates the button in a manner that would result in an automatic continuous press operation (in this case, a long press) during the front button effect, the automatic continuous press effect will not be executed. It is also possible to By doing so, it is possible to disable the automatic continuous hitting operation during the back button performance and prevent the continuous hitting performance from being executed unless the player performs the normal repeated pressing operation (intermittent operation).
<<Relationship between the variable preview performance, which is a pre-stage performance, and the automatic continuous hit performance>>

5. Next, it is possible to similarly consider the relationship between the possibility (proportion) of the display mode of the automatic repeated press effect as a back button effect becoming a high expectation mode and the effect that is performed at the stage before this automatic repeated press effect. be. Although the specifications for the back button presentation are explained below, it should be noted that the same configuration can be applied to the front button presentation as well.

For example, in the variation at that time (the variation in question), a situation in which the button operation validity period related to the back button effect has reached without performing the front button effect after the change has started (a situation in which the back button function is being executed). Think about it (for illustration purposes, the explanation is based on a situation where the front button effect is not performed and the button operation valid period has reached, but if the front button effect is performed, then the button operation invalid period occurs, and then the back button effect is activated) (This may also be a situation where the button operation validity period has expired). FIG. 29(b) shows the flow of a series of performances performed by combining a preview performance for the fluctuation (for example, the fluctuation preview performance such as a dialogue preview or a step-up notice that suggests the degree of jackpot expectation) and an automatic continuous hit performance. (Relationship between the auto continuous hit function and the variable notice performance) is schematically illustrated. It should be noted that the explanation here is based on the specific example of the auto-repeat operation shown in FIG. 28(a), so the explanation of similar parts will be omitted as appropriate.

In the example of FIG. 29(b), in the variation (the variation) at the time when the automatic continuous hit production is performed, the variation preview production is executed. Further, this variation notice performance is selected from a plurality of types. For example, using a notice (dialogue notice) effect in which the character display is colored, there are a white line notice, a blue line notice, a red line notice, etc. as a line notice group, and a white step-up notice, a step-up notice group, etc. There are blue step-up notices, red step-up notices, etc., and it is configured to select or not select any one from the line notice group, and also select or not select any of the step-up notice groups, and change the corresponding variable notice. As the performance, the system is configured such that no preview performance is executed at all, or at least either a line preview or a step-up notice is executed.

Then, depending on the type of the selected fluctuation notice effect, there is a possibility that the appearance of the subsequent automatic continuous hit effect will have a relatively high expectation level (the effect element may be white or white-based, blue or blue). It is possible to make the color red or red-ish or giraffe pattern different from the original, or to have different expectations as to whether or not the subsequent effect (effect after the continuous hit effect) will be executed. When it is executed, it is configured such that the tendency of what kind of subsequent effects will be executed will be different. Regarding the level of expectation that the subsequent performance will be executed, in the line preview group, the order of the increase is white line preview < blue line notice < red line notice, and in the step up notice group, white step up notice < blue step up notice < The price increases in the order of red step-up notices. In addition, regarding the tendency of what kind of subsequent productions will be executed, if the possible subsequent production candidates are, for example, production A, production B, and production C (for example, productions A to C are Each type of SP reach performance is different, and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of performance A < performance B < performance C), and the expectation level for subsequent performances with high jackpot expectations is determined by the line preview group. In the case of the step-up notice group, the highest values are in the order of white line notice < blue line notice < red line notice, and in the step-up notice group, the order is white step-up notice < blue step-up notice < red step-up notice. In other words, during the fluctuation, the performance performed as the fluctuation notice performance (for example, a predetermined cut-in display or a specific character It is possible to create a correlation related to the development of the performance (or jackpot) based on the behavior (for example, action, etc.) (which can also be called a basis or starting point).

In addition to the above, the coloring of the variation information display 198 in the variation information display section 195 (FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b)) described above is changed as the variation notice performance performed before the button operation validity period. Can give examples. In this case, before the button operation validity period, the case where the fluctuation information display 198 is displayed in a giraffe pattern (in the case where it is displayed in a high expectation mode) rather than the case where the fluctuation information display 198 is displayed in red or a red color ), when a repeated hitting operation (in this case, an automatic repeated hitting operation) is performed, the automatic repeated hitting performance with a high expectation level is performed at a higher rate. Thereafter, in the same way as described above, the rate of SP reach development (or jackpot) is made higher when the auto-repeat performance is a performance with a high expectation level than when it is not.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, but if the fluctuation notice performance (here, the notice by coloring the fluctuation information display 198) is performed in a predetermined manner (for example, red or red-ish), the SP reach will be reached after the automatic repeated hit operation. It is also possible to perform the production in such a manner that the development is certain. In this case, compared to the case where the fluctuation notice performance is performed in other colors (for example, blue or blue-ish, yellow or yellow-ish, green or green-ish, etc.), the display shows a high expectation level regarding reach development. It will be.

Furthermore, it is possible to vary not only the expected degree of reach development (the expected degree of reach development) but also the degree of jackpot expectation regarding the performance after the automatic repeated hit operation, depending on the variation notice performance. For example, if the variable notice effect is performed in a predetermined manner (for example, a giraffe pattern), the probability of winning is close to 100%, and if it is performed with a red or red effect display, the probability is 60%. It is possible to perform an effect in such a manner as to win a jackpot. When the jackpot expectation is set in this way, it can be said that the giraffe pattern effect display has a higher expectation level regarding the jackpot than the red or other effect display.
<<Relationship between the pre-reading performance, which is the pre-stage performance, and the automatic continuous hit performance>>

6. Furthermore, in addition to the above-mentioned various relationships between the variable preview performance and the subsequent automatic continuous hit performance, it is also possible to add relationships with other performances. For example, it is possible to predetermine the relationship between the hold look-ahead effect and the variation (change performed as the change) when the hold that was the target of the look-ahead becomes the target of consumption.

Figure 30(a) shows a schematic diagram of the flow of a series of effects (relationship between the auto continuous hit function and the advance notice effect) when the relevant variation is reached, in which the automatic continuous hit effect is performed after passing through the advance notice effect. For example: It should be noted that the explanation here is based on the specific example of the auto-repeat operation shown in FIG. 28(a), so the explanation of similar parts will be omitted as appropriate.

In the example of FIG. 30(a), the pending pre-read notice has been started in the two previous changes, targeting the change in which the automatic continuous hit effect is performed (the change in question). Here, the variation when the hold that was the target of pre-reading becomes the target of consumption (the variation) can be referred to as a "target variation" or the like.

For example, as a hold change that is a hold look-ahead effect, a blue hold change is performed, and then in a change (target change) when the hold that changed to blue is exhausted, the change notice change (here, the change information Let us consider a case where the colored preview of the display 198 becomes blue, and a blue or blue-colored colored effect (here, the effect display described above) is performed as a continuous hit effect in this variation. As mentioned above, blue or blue-colored effects can be used as effects with relatively low reach development expectations and jackpot expectations. For example, such a performance can be referred to as a weak performance. Regarding the performance mode in which both the pending look-ahead performance and the fluctuation notice performance (in this case, the notice by coloring the fluctuation information display 198) are blue or blue-ish, for example, the performance changes from weak performance to weak performance. It is possible to refer to

Further, let us consider a case in which a blue pending change is similarly performed as a pending change that is a pending look-ahead effect, but the subsequent change notice effect (here, a notice by coloring the change information display 198) becomes red. Red or red-colored performances (or giraffe pattern performances, etc.) have relatively high reach development expectations and jackpot expectations, and such performances are called strong performances, for example. Is possible. The performance mode in which the color becomes blue or blue-ish in the pending look-ahead performance and becomes red or red-ish in the variable preview performance can be referred to as a performance that changes from a weak performance to a strong performance, for example.

Further, regarding the performance that changes from weak performance to weak performance, it can be said that the look-ahead performance is a weak performance and the target fluctuation is also a weak performance. Furthermore, different from this, regarding a performance that changes from a weak performance to a strong performance, it can be said that the look-ahead performance is a weak performance and the target fluctuation is a strong performance. In the above example, a notice by coloring the change information display 198 was shown as the change notice performance, but a line notice (weak effect corresponds to a white line notice, strong effect corresponds to a red line notice). Also good. In that case, a performance that changes from a weak performance to a weak performance is a performance that is blue in the pre-reading performance and white lines as the variable notice performance, and a performance that changes from a weak performance to a strong performance is a performance that changes from a weak performance to a strong performance in the pre-reading performance. This is a performance with red lines as the variation notice performance with blue pending. Furthermore, different from this, for a performance that changes from a strong performance to a weak performance, for example, a red suspension change is performed as a suspension change that is a suspension look-ahead performance, and then when the suspension that changed to red is extinguished. Regarding the variation (target variation), when a white dialogue preview is executed as the variation preview performance, it can be said that the pre-reading performance is a strong performance and the target variation is a weak performance. In addition, regarding the automatic continuous hit performance, blue and blue-based performances can be said to be weak performances with relatively low reach development expectations and jackpot expectations, and red and red-based (or higher) giraffe-patterned performances. The production (such as production) can be said to be a strong production.

In addition, if the pending look-ahead effect and the automatic continuous hit effect that is executed afterwards have a correlation related to the development of the effect (or the jackpot), even if the hold look-ahead effect is a weak effect, If the variable notice performance is a strong performance, it is possible to predetermine the selection ratio of various performances (relationship between weak, strong, and high) so that the automatic continuous hit performance is likely to be in a high expectation mode.

In addition, different from this, if the pending look-ahead effect is a strong effect, even if the variable notice effect is a weak effect, the selection ratio of various effects is determined so that the auto continuous hit effect is likely to be in a high expectation mode. (strong/weak/high relationships). Furthermore, if both the pending look-ahead effect and the variable notice effect are weak effects, the automatic continuous hit effect is unlikely to become a high expectation mode (weak/weak/high relationship), and if both are strong effects, the relative It is also possible to make the automatic repeated hit performance have a high expectation level at a high percentage (e.g. 80% or more) (strong, strong, high relationship, more specifically, strong, strong, super high relationship). Therefore, the auto-repeat performance is more likely to be in a high-expectation mode than the case where only either the pending look-ahead performance or the variable notice performance is a strong performance). Here, the performance in a high expectation mode related to the automatic repeated hit performance can also be referred to as a strong performance related to the automatic repeated hit performance.

Note that, although here, a pending prefetch effect is taken as an example of the prefetch effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to employ other types of prefetch effects. For example, if the above-mentioned continuous notice (here the genuine one) is adopted as a look-ahead effect, the content of the continuous notice and the effect display (this effect display is an effect display that is displayed as a genuine continuous notice, for example, the screen It is possible to differentiate between a weak effect and a strong effect by changing the mode of the effect display (which is displayed in a small size at the four corners and is different from the effect display in a continuous hit effect). Further, a genuine continuous notice may be simply referred to as a prefetch continuous notice, and a pseudo continuous notice may simply be referred to as a pseudo continuous notice (pseudo continuous performance, pseudo continuous performance).

Here, in the previous section <<Relationship between auto-repeat effect as back button effect and subsequent effects>>, as an example of a series of effects, it is possible to develop from normal reach to the first half of SP reach, and in the first half of SP reach. He explained that there is a back button, and that it can be further developed from the first half of SP Reach to the second half of SP Reach. Regarding such effects, it is also possible to use sounds that apply the above-mentioned relationship of "weak, low, high." In other words, various performances are selected so that the hold look-ahead performance is a weak performance, the relevant fluctuation notice performance before reach or normal reach is a weak performance, and furthermore, the auto continuous hit performance in the first half of SP reach tends to be a high expectation state. It is possible to set a percentage.

Subsequently, similarly, regarding the relationship between the look-ahead performance, the variable notice performance, and the automatic continuous hit performance, it is also possible to determine the tendency of performance selection based on the look-ahead performance. For example, depending on the type of pending look-ahead performance, the rate at which the automatic continuous hit performance becomes a performance with a high expectation level can be made different. Then, if the pending look-ahead performance is a weak performance, it is difficult for the automatic continuous hit performance during target fluctuations to be performed in a high expectation mode (weak/low relationship), and if the pending look-ahead performance is a strong performance, the continuous hit performance during target fluctuations. It is possible to predetermine the selection ratio of both performances so that it is likely to be performed in a high-expectation manner (strong/strong relationship).

Furthermore, even when the look-ahead performance is used as a standard, it is possible to make the tendency of the automatic continuous hit performance different depending on the combination with the variable notice performance. For example, if the look-ahead preview performance is a weak performance, whether the fluctuating preview performance is a weak performance or a strong performance, the rate at which the automatic continuous hit performance becomes a high expectation mode will be relatively low. , it is possible to predetermine the selection ratio of various effects (weak, no question, high). In this case, it is preferable that the variation pattern in the target variation is a specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern that is scheduled to develop into a specific SP reach effect (effect C described above) with a variation time of 30 seconds or more). It is.

In addition, unlike this, if the look-ahead preview performance is a strong performance, regardless of whether the fluctuating preview performance is a weak performance or a strong performance, the proportion of automatic continuous hit performance in a high expectation mode will be relatively high. It is also possible to set the selection ratio of various effects so that the selection ratio is high (relationship between strong, unquestioned, and high).

Note that this is not limited to the above, but for example, if the look-ahead preview performance is a weak performance, the automatic continuous hit performance will have a higher expectation level if the variable preview performance is a strong performance than if the variable preview performance is a weak performance. It is possible to set the selection ratio of various effects so that the ratio of the mode becomes relatively high (relationship between weak, strong, advantageous, and relatively high).

In addition, different from this, for example, when the look-ahead preview performance is a strong performance, the auto-repeat performance will be in a high expectation state if the variable preview performance is a strong performance, rather than if the fluctuation preview performance is a weak performance. It is also possible to set the selection ratio of various effects so that the ratio becomes relatively high (relationship between strong, strong advantageous, and relatively high).
<<An example of an indicator effect combined with an automatic continuous hit effect>>

7. Next, it is possible to consider the relationship between the automatic repeated hit function and the above-mentioned indicator display function. The indicator display shows the physical amount and amount of time remaining in the valid period of button operation related to the operation button 22, the amount of repeated presses, or the duration of long presses. This is a performance (indicator performance) that can represent a conceptual increase or decrease in quantity. The display style is different for each usage type, and rather than having the same indicator have multiple roles (for example, one indicator display can indicate the remaining time of the button operation validity period or the amount of repeated presses, which is the degree of repeated presses). It is preferable to have a dedicated indicator display for each type of usage (instead of showing both). Furthermore, when the indicator effect is used as a continuous hit effect, various aspects can be adopted, such as a mode that accurately represents the number of consecutive hits, and a mode that increases the amount of consecutive hits at a certain rate if repeated hits are detected. .

FIGS. 32(a) to 32(d) show an example of an indicator effect when indicating the amount of repeated presses of an operation button. In this indicator effect, the indicator image 402 is displayed in combination with the button image 401 (combination display). Here, the effect created by the combination of the indicator image 402 and the button image 401 as described above can be referred to as a button effect accompanied by the indicator image 402, an indicator effect accompanied by the button image 401, or the like.

The indicator image 402 (in this case, the operation amount indicator image indicating the amount of repeated hits) is displayed within a predetermined indicator image display area, and is displayed in combination with the button image displayed in the button image display area above and below. has been done. The indicator image 402 is displayed in the shape of a horizontally long strip below the operation button image (button image) 401, and has a meter section 403 inside. At the time when the indicator image 402 starts to be displayed, the entire meter section 403 is used to display an empty state in a predetermined color (black, etc.) (see FIG. 32(a)).

In the empty state shown in FIG. 32(a), a guide display such as "Make repeated hits" is displayed, the effective period for consecutive hits starts, and when the player performs consecutive hits, as time passes, the characters shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 32(d), the amount of consecutive hits shown by hatching is displayed in a predetermined color (green, etc.). This continuous stroke amount display is performed in such a manner that the tip gradually and continuously moves from the left end to the right end in the figure. Then, the area for displaying the amount of consecutive hits gradually increases, and when it reaches the right end as shown in FIG. 32(d), it indicates that the amount of consecutive hits has reached the full amount.

Here, FIG. 32 exemplifies states in which the amount of consecutive hits is 20%, 50%, and 100% of the total in the order of (a) to (d). Such display of the amount of repeated hits does not necessarily need to be performed in accordance with changes in the actual amount of repeated hits. For example, from the beginning to the middle of the change in the amount of consecutive hits, the amount of consecutive hits increases at a certain high speed, but in the final stage, the rate of increase in the amount of consecutive hits slows down and it does not reach the full amount. It is also possible to create a performance that stirs up expectations that the event will be at full capacity. In addition, in the case of a hit or a change in high expectation level (such as a change in which SP reach effect C is executed), the amount of consecutive hits will be full (full), but in the case of a miss or a change in low expectation level (change such as SP reach effect C is executed) If the variation is such that the SP reach effect is not executed, or the variation is such that the SP reach effect A is executed), the amount of consecutive hits will not be full. In other words, the amount of consecutive hits is the apparent amount of consecutive hits, and does not increase in response to the actual amount of consecutive hits.In addition to the actual amount of consecutive hits, the amount of consecutive hits is the amount that increases depending on the result of the judgment and the selected variation pattern. take.

Furthermore, the indicators are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 32(a) to 32(d), and various forms can be adopted. For example, by gradually increasing (or decreasing) the number of patterns in animal patterns such as giraffe, leopard, and zebra patterns, which are composed of many patterns, as the number of consecutive hits increases, the sense of the number of consecutive hits can be improved. One idea is to make it available to people. Note that it is also possible to use not only animal patterns but also changes in the number of animal footprints as a scale display to notify the amount of consecutive hits.

Further, the indicator performance as described above is provided as a part of the performance when showing the result of the winning lottery to the player. The performance used to show the player the result of a lottery result can be called, for example, a "lottery result notification performance", and the indicator performance used for the lottery result notification performance can be called, for example, a "lottery result notification performance". It can be referred to as "notification-related indicator performance."

Furthermore, although not shown in the drawings, when performing an indicator performance in which the amount of instruction increases as the number of repeated presses of the operation button 22 increases, the number of presses of the operation button 22 is detected, and the number of presses increases. It is possible to increase the amount of instruction according to the pace. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to increase the instruction amount at a predetermined pace while the repeated hits are being detected, assuming actual consecutive hits.

Furthermore, in such a case, for example, at the end of the increase in the instructed amount, the speed of increase slows down and it is difficult to reach the maximum amount (full tank), thereby creating an effect that stimulates the player's expectation that the tank will be full. Is possible. It is also possible to perform a performance in which the indicated amount increases but does not reach full capacity and the indicator performance ends.

It is conceivable that when the tank is full, the expectations for reach development and jackpot are higher than when the tank is not full. In addition, expectations for reach development and jackpot are higher when the indicator effect ends when the tank is full or relatively full, than when the indicator effect ends with a relatively small amount of increase. It is possible to do so.

Further, it is also possible to use indicator performances such as these as a performance representing the amount of consecutive hits related to automatic consecutive hits. Here, in FIGS. 32A to 32D, the indicator image 402 illustrates an increase in the instruction amount (here, time). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it is also possible to perform an effect representing an instruction amount that may change, such as the remaining time.
<<Diversification of the relationship between automatic continuous hit effects and lottery result notification related indicator effects >>

8. Next, regarding the indicator performance, it is possible to define a relationship with the auto continuous hit performance in addition to the above-described relationship. First, a button image 401 accompanied by an indicator image 402 is displayed in a continuous hit performance (here, a pre-multiple hit performance). Then, when the automatic repeated hit operation is performed and the automatic repeated hit effect is entered, the amount indicated by the indicator is increased as the elapsed time of the automatic repeated hit effect increases, as described above. However, as mentioned above, the indicator display indicating the amount of consecutive hits (display of the operation amount indicator) is different from the indicator display indicating the elapsed time (display of the remaining time indicator) (separate display). ) is desirable, and it is also desirable to display an indicator display indicating the amount of consecutive hits and an indicator display indicating the elapsed time at the same time. In this case, it is preferable that the indicator display showing the amount of repeated hits be displayed at a position farther from the button image than the indicator display showing the elapsed time, and the indicator display showing the number of repeated hits is better than the indicator display showing the elapsed time. It is also desirable that the display area be large.

Furthermore, in the automatic continuous hit performance, a plurality of types of effect display execution periods are provided. The effect display execution period referred to herein is not the blinking cycle (the length of one cycle) of the glitter image 404, but the length of the period (continuation period) in which the glitter image 404 is repeatedly blinked. Then, when the automatic continuous hit performance is executed, a continuous hit performance of any length is selected.

Furthermore, even if the types of auto-repeat effects are different, it is possible to use (combine) the indicator image 402 with the same (common) display mode (this indicator image is an indicator display indicating the elapsed time). . Examples of the "same (common) display mode" here include those that have exactly the same appearance and size, or those that have the same appearance but different sizes. In this case, even if the types of automatic repeated hits are different, both the button image and the indicator image have the same appearance and size, or the button image and the indicator image have the same appearance but different sizes. Become. Here, there are multiple types of auto continuous hit effects, and the second auto continuous play effect (for example, during reach in a high base state) is better than the first auto continuous play effect (for example, the effect that occurs before reach in a low base state). Even if the effective period of the button operation is longer for the effect that occurs (for example, the former is 5 seconds and the latter is 10 seconds), the same indicator image is used (also used) as described above. Therefore, the speed at which the instruction amount (remaining time) increases or decreases in the indicator image is made different; in other words, it is set at a relatively fast speed in the first auto continuous hit performance, and relatively slow in the second automatic continuous hit performance. do. By doing so, it is possible to perform an indicator performance that expresses the difference in type depending on the speed of increase/decrease (change speed) of the instruction amount (remaining time). In addition, regarding the button image 401, it is possible to recognize whether the button is pressed correctly depending on whether the button image 401 is being pressed repeatedly (auto repeated pressing operation or normal repeated pressing operation) or not. , it is desirable to configure the display mode to be different (for example, the display mode is red when a continuous tap operation is performed, and the display mode is blue when a non-repeat tap operation is performed). Note that the indicator image described here is an indicator image that indicates elapsed time.

Moreover, the above-mentioned "same (common) display mode" is not limited to exactly the same display mode, but can also include, for example, a display mode that can be said to be equivalent. Examples of things that can be said to be equivalent include things that are similar in appearance and things that can be said to be similar as a whole, although not exactly the same.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "same (common) display mode" may include, for example, a button image 401 that is the same but an indicator image 402 that is different. It is also possible to use both the button image and the indicator image (or either one) during the automatic continuous hit performance and during the normal continuous hit performance. Furthermore, it is also possible to use both the button image and the indicator image (or either one) during the repeated press effect and during other button effects (single-shot effect or long-press effect).

In addition to this, during the normal continuous hit performance, an indicator image 402 (this indicator image is an indicator display indicating the elapsed time) is displayed in combination with the button image 401, but during the automatic continuous hit performance, the indicator image 402 is displayed in combination with the button image 401. It is also possible to perform an effect such as not being displayed. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform a performance in which the indicator image 402 is displayed in combination with the button image 401 only during a single-shot performance (or only during a long-press performance), but the indicator image 402 is not displayed during a repeated-press performance. Note that the indicator image described here is an indicator image that indicates elapsed time.

Next, the following can be cited as a more specific example of an automatic continuous hit performance using an indicator performance. For example, as an automatic continuous hit effect, an indicator image 402 is displayed in combination with a button image 401, as illustrated in FIG. 33(a). Furthermore, when the player performs an auto-repeating operation, an auto-repeating effect on the button image 401 (blinking of the luminous image 404 shown in FIG. 31(b), etc.) is performed, while the instruction amount of the indicator image 402 is increase. When the number of presses of the operation button 22 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the display of the indicator image 402 becomes full, and both the indicator image 402 and the button image 401 are erased. Further, for example, when a player wins a lottery for effect related to indicator display, it is also possible to erase the indicator image 402 and the button image 401. Specifically, it is conceivable to perform a lottery to determine whether the tank will be full each time a button is pressed, and to erase the image if the tank is won. Note that the indicator image described here is an indicator display indicating the amount of consecutive hits. However, if an indicator indicating the remaining time is also displayed, it is desirable to erase the indicator display indicating the remaining time at the same timing.

Here, the timing at which both the indicator image 402 and the button image 401 are erased is not limited to when the tank is full; for example, when the tank is 25%, 50%, and 75% full. It is possible to set multiple periods, such as . An example of erasing the indicator image 402 and the like at multiple times will be described later. Note that the indicator image described here is an indicator display indicating the amount of consecutive hits. However, if an indicator indicating the remaining time is also displayed, it is desirable to erase the indicator display indicating the remaining time at the same timing.

Further, for example, when a player wins a lottery for effect related to indicator display, it is also possible to erase the indicator image 402 and the button image 401. Specifically, it is conceivable to perform a lottery to determine whether the tank will be full each time a button is pressed, and to erase the image if the tank is won. Note that the indicator image described here is an indicator display indicating the amount of consecutive hits. However, if an indicator indicating the remaining time is also displayed, it is desirable to erase the indicator display indicating the remaining time at the same timing.

After this, although not shown, an image (lever image) that schematically represents the aforementioned lever L (FIG. 21(b)) is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 60 to remind the player of the lever L. Appears with a display prompting operation (for example, a text display such as "Pull the lever"). When the player performs a predetermined operation on the lever L (for example, pulling it toward you) after such a lever effect, a predetermined cut-in effect is performed, and the normal reach progresses to the SP reach, or There is a continuation of SP reach (that is, a development from the first half of SP reach to the second half of SP reach).

Here, if the SP reach continues as described above, the performance up to the lever performance is called the SP reach first half performance (or "SP reach pre-performance", etc.), and the performance after that is called the SP reach second half performance ( Alternatively, it can be called ``SP reach performance'', etc.). In the SP reach second half performance, it is possible to not perform back button performance such as that related to the continuous hit performance. Alternatively, in the first half of the SP reach performance, use the back button performance as described above (make it possible to execute the back button performance related to the continuous hit performance), that is, display an effect that can progress step by step as a continuous hit performance, It suggests the possibility of executing the subsequent performance (the performance after the continuous hit performance, here the SP reach second half performance) and/or the content of the execution when the subsequent performance is executed, but in the SP reach second half performance, such a continuous hit performance Do not perform a back button performance that is related to the performance, instead perform a single operation performance or multiple press operation performance as a front button performance, and in the performance that occurs in the front button performance (post-operation performance in the front button performance) It may be configured to be able to notify whether it is a jackpot or not. Furthermore, it is possible to make the expected level of reach development and the expected level of jackpot different depending on the performance result of the automatic repeated hit performance as the back button performance.

Further, as described above, it is possible to provide a plurality of times when both the indicator image 402 and the button image 401 are erased. In this case, it is conceivable that the development of the performance and the level of expectation of a jackpot may vary depending on the timing at which the indicator image 402 and the like are erased. For example, the closer the indicator image 402 etc. is erased to the time when the indicated amount display is full (the larger the indicated amount), the higher the expectations for performance development and jackpot. It is possible. Note that the indicator image described here is an indicator display indicating the amount of consecutive hits. However, if an indicator indicating the remaining time is also displayed, it is desirable to erase the indicator display indicating the remaining time at the same timing.
<<Relationship between auto continuous hit effect and environment settings related indicator effect>>
<<<Basic matters regarding volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment>>>

9. Subsequently, it is also possible to determine the relationship between the automatic continuous hit performance and an indicator performance provided separately from the above-mentioned indicator performance. As described above, the indicator performance displayed along with the button performance related to the notification of the result of the lottery result can be referred to as a "lottery result notification related indicator performance" or the like. However, for example, indicators are also displayed in environmental settings such as volume adjustment (volume adjustment) and light intensity adjustment (light intensity adjustment).

The display of such an indicator can be said to be an indicator effect used for environment setting, unlike an indicator effect related to notification of the result of a lottery. Indicator effects related to such environment settings can be referred to as "environment setting-related indicator effects," for example.

Specific examples of this environment setting-related indicator performance include a volume adjustment indicator performance that is an indicator performance for volume adjustment, a light amount adjustment indicator performance that is an indicator performance for light amount adjustment, and the like. Note that the term "light amount adjustment" is used in the same meaning as "brightness adjustment," and in the description of the pachinko game machine 10 of this embodiment, "light amount adjustment" can be replaced with "brightness adjustment." .

FIG. 34(a) shows an example of the display when adjusting the volume (volume adjustment screen display), and FIG. 34(b) shows an example of the display when adjusting the light amount (light amount adjustment screen display). Displays related to environment settings such as these can be regarded as effects from the perspective of being shown to the player. Therefore, in the following, a display for adjusting the volume and indicating the currently set volume level will be referred to as a "volume adjustment effect", and a display for adjusting the light intensity and indicating the currently set light level. The display to indicate this is called a "light amount adjustment effect." In addition, a display for adjusting the volume and indicating the currently set volume level is called a "volume adjustment display", and a display for adjusting the light intensity and indicating the currently set light level. The display can also be referred to as a "light amount adjustment display."

The volume adjustment effect shown in FIG. 34(a) and the light amount adjustment effect shown in FIG. 34(b) are displayed, for example, on the effect display device 60, superimposed on other effects. Furthermore, the volume adjustment performance and the light intensity adjustment performance are basically performed while waiting for the fluctuation to start for the performance symbols 190a to 190c, etc., or while the fluctuation performance related to the performance symbols 190a to 190c, etc. is being performed. It is now possible to display the data while it is changing. Therefore, the volume adjustment performance and the light amount adjustment performance are displayed superimposed on at least the fluctuating performance pattern and the stopped performance pattern. It is also displayed in a superimposed manner with the aforementioned variable preview performance (line preview, step-up notice). In such a case, the volume adjustment performance and the light amount adjustment performance have a higher display priority (displayed on the front side) than the performance pattern and the fluctuation notice performance. However, there are exceptions, such as the colored notice of the change information display 198, which is a change notice showing that the change is currently in progress, and the aforementioned mini-game that shows that the change is currently in progress or stopped. Regarding the effect design, it is not displayed in a manner that overlaps with the volume adjustment effect or the light amount adjustment effect.

Here, "waiting for fluctuation" can be said to be a state in which the special symbols and performance symbols are not fluctuating. Furthermore, the state in which the fluctuation is on standby can also be referred to as a fluctuation stop (determined stop) or a fluctuation stop state (determined stop state). Then, it is possible to notify that the game is not in progress by displaying a variable standby state (a screen display in which the decorative symbols are stopped and there is no pending display (pending image)) or the like.

Furthermore, the "fluctuating standby" can be said to be a type of gaming standby state among the states of the gaming machine. In addition to "waiting for fluctuation", the game waiting state includes: during the demo screen (while waiting for a customer), during the adjustment screen (while displaying the environment settings), during initialization notification, during predetermined abnormality notification, etc. can be included. Among these, during a specified abnormality notification, if the error is cleared, the control state of the gaming machine can be returned to the normal state without turning on the power again (sometimes called a "recoverable error"). (possible) is currently being announced.

Furthermore, it is also possible to display both the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect during the above-mentioned customer waiting demonstration (standby demonstration). During the customer waiting demonstration, a moving image (waiting movie) is displayed to the player indicating that no change is in progress. By displaying this waiting movie, it is possible to notify that the pachinko game machine 10 is a so-called empty machine and can be played. While the standby movie is being displayed, a first decorative pattern to be described later is not displayed, but a second decorative pattern to be described later can be displayed. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that neither the first decorative pattern nor the second decorative pattern is displayed. This waiting movie while waiting for a customer can be displayed both in the non-electric support state and in the electric support state, and in the electric support state, the waiting movie and the right-hand effect can be displayed in a superimposed manner. (Right-handed play has a higher display priority and is displayed in the front), so even if you are waiting for a customer, by checking the right-handed play, you can check the current gaming status. This state can be recognized without looking at the fluctuation state of the first decorative pattern (since the electric support state is also a time saving state, the fluctuation time is shorter than the non-electric support state).

Although not shown in the drawings during such a demonstration while waiting for a customer, it is possible to display the image of the volume adjustment effect and the image of the light amount adjustment effect side by side without operating the cross key 96 as described later. (On the contrary, when the cross key 96 is operated during the fluctuation or while the fluctuation is on standby, the image of the volume adjustment effect and the image of the light intensity adjustment effect, which were not displayed, are displayed). However, even during the demonstration while waiting for a customer, the image of the volume adjustment effect and the image of the light intensity adjustment effect may not be displayed unless the cross key 96 is operated. Even if the four-way controller is pressed during the demo, the customer waiting demo will not be canceled (the waiting movie will remain displayed), and the volume adjustment will be displayed in front of the waiting movie while the customer waiting demo is in progress. The image of the effect and the image of the light intensity adjustment effect are displayed (displayed superimposed on the waiting movie, but the display priority is higher than that of the waiting movie). Additionally, in addition to these, it is conceivable to display a selection menu screen (not shown) in which images of the aforementioned automatic button operation selection (automatic button operation setting effect) are arranged in a horizontal line. .
<<<An example of volume adjustment performance>>>

First, the volume adjustment effect shown in FIG. 34(a) is performed by pressing the volume button (here, the left direction key 96c) of the cross key 96 (FIG. 20(a)) or It is displayed when the right direction key 96d) is operated. As shown in FIG. 34(a), in the volume adjustment performance, a speaker mark 406 representing a speaker and a volume level mark 407 representing a volume level are displayed (a volume level mark performance is performed). Further, below the speaker mark 406, a cross key mark 408 representing a cross key is displayed, and below the cross key mark 408, the words "Volume Adjustment" are displayed.

In the cross key mark 408, the parts corresponding to the left direction key 96c (FIG. 20(a)) and right direction key 96d (also shown in FIG. 20(a)) used to increase/decrease the volume are highlighted by a method such as reverse display. Displayed. Further, below the volume level mark 407, an operation button mark 409 representing an operation button is displayed, and below the operation button mark 409, the word "end" indicating the end of the volume setting is displayed. There is.

In the display example of the volume adjustment in FIG. 34(a), the volume level is the minimum (MIN) level 1, and among the plurality of arcs of the mark 407 representing the volume level, only the leftmost arc is brightly colored. is displayed in reverse video. In the example of FIG. 34(a), the outline of the leftmost arc is drawn with a thick line to indicate that it is displayed in reverse.

If the right direction key 96d is pressed once in this state, the volume level becomes level 2, the mark on the right is also highlighted (not shown), and the number of highlighted marks becomes two. At this time, the sound output from the speaker 21 of the pachinko game machine 10 increases in accordance with the change in the volume level, and the volume increases. Furthermore, when the right direction key 96d is pressed once, the volume level becomes level 3, and the number of highlighted marks becomes three.

On the contrary, even if the left direction key 96c is pressed once from the state of the volume level (level 1) shown in FIG. 34(a), the volume level does not change and remains at level 1. Further, for example, when the left direction key 96c is pressed in a situation where the volume level is level 2 or higher, the volume level decreases up to level 1 depending on the number of times the left direction key 96c is pressed. Further, in this embodiment, the maximum value (MAX) of the volume level is 5, and the volume can be adjusted in 5 levels.

Furthermore, even if the right direction key 96d is pressed once in a situation where the volume level is 5, the volume level does not change. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the right direction key 96d is pressed once in a situation where the volume level is set to level 5, the light amount level may be suddenly lowered to the minimum level 1.

Note that in this embodiment, the volume level is always the same value (here, level 1, which is the lowest level) at an initial stage such as when the power is turned on. In other words, no matter what the volume level is before the power is turned off, if the power is turned off and then turned on again, the volume level will always be the predetermined value. The volume level at an initial stage such as when the power is turned on (default volume level) is configured to differ depending on the setting of the gaming machine back volume volume 416, as will be described later. Furthermore, when changing the volume level, ending the volume adjustment, and adjusting the volume again, the adjustment starts from the previous volume level stored in the RWM of the sub-main board 301 (or sub-sub board 302) at the end. It is now possible to do so.

Here, the value of the volume level at the initial stage such as when the power is turned on is not limited to the lowest level, but is always the same value, such as the center level (level 3 here) or the highest level (level 5 here). You may make it so that It is also possible to back up the volume level information at the time of a power outage, so that when the power is turned on without initialization, adjustment can be started from the backed up volume level.

Further, in this embodiment, the volume adjustment function using the left direction key 96c and right direction key 96d is enabled while the volume adjustment effect is displayed. Then, when the volume adjustment effect is displayed and no operation for volume adjustment is input and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the volume adjustment effect is deleted. Further, it may be configured such that when the operation button 22 is pressed while the volume adjustment effect is being displayed, the volume adjustment ends and the volume adjustment effect is deleted.
<<<An example of light intensity adjustment performance>>>

Next, the light amount adjustment effect shown in FIG. 34(b) is performed by pressing the light amount button (in this case, the up direction key 96a or the down It is displayed when the direction key 96b) is operated. In the light amount adjustment shown in FIG. 34(b), a light amount level mark 411 representing the light amount level is displayed (a light amount level mark effect is performed). Further, below the light intensity level mark 411 (lower left in the figure), a cross key mark 412 representing a cross key is displayed, and below the cross key mark 412, the words "light intensity adjustment" are displayed. ing.

In the above-mentioned cross key mark 412, the portions corresponding to the up direction key 96a and down direction key 96b used to increase/decrease the amount of light are highlighted by a method such as reverse display. An operation button mark 409 indicating an operation button is displayed below the light intensity level mark 411 (lower right in the figure), and below the operation button mark 409 is an "end" indicating the end of the volume setting. ' is displayed.

In the display example of light amount adjustment in FIG. 34(b), the light amount level is the minimum (MIN) level 1, and the entire light amount level mark 411 is displayed in reverse in a bright color. In this state, when the upward key 96a is pressed once, the light amount level becomes level 2, although not shown, and the light amount level mark 411 is displayed brighter.

On the contrary, even if the down key 96b is pressed once from the state of the light quantity level (level 1) shown in FIG. 34(b), the light quantity level does not change and remains at level 1. Further, for example, when the down key 96b is pressed in a situation where the light intensity level is level 2 or level 3, the volume level decreases up to level 1 depending on the number of times the down key is pressed. In this embodiment, the maximum value (MAX) of the light amount level is 3, and the light amount can be adjusted in three stages. Further, in this embodiment, the light amount adjustment function using the up key 96a and the down key 96b is enabled while the light amount adjustment menu shown in FIG. 34(b) is displayed.

Further, even if the upward key 96a is pressed once in a situation where the light amount level is 3, the light amount level does not change. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the up key 96a is pressed once in a situation where the light amount level is 3, the light amount level may be suddenly lowered to the minimum level 1.

Note that in this embodiment, the light amount level is always the same value (here, level 1, which is the lowest level) at an initial stage such as when the power is turned on. In other words, no matter what the light intensity level is before the power is turned off, when the power is turned off and then turned on again, it always becomes the predetermined value. Furthermore, if the light intensity adjustment is completed by changing the light intensity level after the power is turned on, and the light intensity adjustment is performed again, the immediately previous light intensity stored in the RWM of the sub-main board 301 (or the sub-sub board 302) is Adjustments can be started from the level. Here, the value of the light amount level at an initial stage such as when the power is turned on is not limited to the lowest level, but may be, for example, a central level (here, level 2) or a highest level (here, level 3).

Further, in this embodiment, the light amount adjustment function using the up direction key 96a and the down direction key 96b is enabled while the light amount adjustment effect is displayed. Then, when the light amount adjustment effect is displayed and no operation for light amount adjustment is input and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the light amount adjustment effect is deleted. Further, it may be configured such that when the operation button 22 is pressed while the light amount adjustment effect is displayed, the light amount adjustment ends and the light amount adjustment effect is deleted.
<<<Relationship between effects related to environment settings and other basic display images>>>

Figures 35(a) and 35(b) show an example of a display when a volume adjustment effect or a light intensity adjustment effect is performed while waiting for a change (in this case, while the change is being stopped), with only the main parts extracted and summarized. Illustrated. Furthermore, the variable standby state shown in FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b) is not a specific game situation such as a probability change or a time saving state (in an electric support state), but a normal game state in which a left-handed game is required. It is something. In the figure, stopped performance symbols 190a to 190c before the start of variation are displayed.

Further, in FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b), a reduced effect pattern display area 361 and a pending number display area 367 are also displayed. Among these, the reduced effect pattern display area 361 has a very small effect pattern (mini pattern) compared to the display mode of the effect patterns 190a to 190c, so as to ensure visibility regarding the display state of the effect patterns 190a to 190. Displayed.

The display of the mini symbols is performed in accordance with the fluctuating display or static display state of the performance symbols 190a to 190c. By displaying such mini symbols, for example, even in a situation where the production symbols 190a to 190c become transparent and cannot be seen during fluctuation, the production symbols 190a to 190c are still fluctuating. This is done so that players can recognize this.

In addition, in the reserved number display area 367, two extremely small one-digit numerical values are displayed side by side so as to ensure the visibility of the reserved number display related to the special drawings 1 and 2. In the examples shown in FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b), the number on the left side indicates the number of reservations related to special drawing 1 (here, 0 pieces), and the number on the left side indicates the number of reservations related to special drawing 2 (here, 0 pieces). 0) is shown. By displaying the number of reservations in the number of reservations display area 367 in this way, for example, the first number of reservations display section 196 and the second number of reservations display section 197 are made transparent and can be visually recognized during fluctuations. Even in a situation where the special drawings 1 and 2 have run out, the player can recognize the number of reservations related to the special drawings 1 and 2.

Here, FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b) illustrate an example of a variable standby state, in which no hold has occurred, and the first hold count display section 196 and the second hold count display section 197 are It is not visible. However, in FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b), in order to make the following explanation as easy as possible, two-dot chain lines virtually indicate the first reservation number display section 196 and the second reservation number display section 196. 197 is shown.

In the display examples shown in FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b), the display of the performance symbols 190a to 190c, the display in the first pending number display section 196 and the second pending number display section 197, and the display of characters not shown in the illustrations are shown. Displays, etc. have the function of enhancing the taste of the presentation. Depending on the state of the performance, these displays may become transparent or reduced in size and may no longer be visible to the player.

On the other hand, the display in the reduced production symbol display area 361 and the reserved number display area 367 is related to the display of the production symbols 190a to 190c, and the display of the first reserved number display section 196 and the second reserved number display section 197. This is intended to ensure visibility. The display of the reduced production symbol display area 361 and the display of the reserved number display area 367 include the display of the production symbols 190a to 190c, the display of the first reserved number display section 196 and the second reserved number display section 197, etc. They are functionally different.

Based on these distinctions, the performance symbols 190a to 190c may be referred to as, for example, "first decorative symbols," and the display in the reduced performance symbol display area 361 may be referred to as, for example, "second decorative symbols." be. Below, the terms "first decorative pattern" and "second decorative pattern" will be used as necessary.

The above-mentioned first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern can be explained in more detail as follows. For example, the first decorative pattern is a decorative pattern that is displayed to be easily visible to the player. By providing the first decorative pattern, it is possible to improve the interest of the changing performance. Further, by displaying the first decorative pattern in a fixed and stopped manner, the result of the game can be notified.

The first decorative pattern makes it easy for the player to recognize that the game is changing, that it is on standby, and the results of the lottery. Moreover, the first decorative pattern can improve the interest of the changing performance. Furthermore, by permanently displaying the first decorative pattern, it is possible to notify the result of the game.

Subsequently, the second decorative pattern can, for example, always be able to represent the display state of the first decorative pattern (whether it is still being displayed in a variable manner or has been fixed and stopped). In other words, it has the role of indicating whether the special symbol is changing or stopping. Also, unlike this, the second decorative pattern can be displayed only in cases where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first decorative pattern, or when the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative pattern. It is something. By constantly displaying the second decorative symbol, it is possible to notify the result of the game by means of a fixed stop display.

In addition, if the first decorative pattern is difficult to see or cannot be seen, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and when the first decorative pattern is displayed as a fixed stop, the second decorative pattern is also displayed as a fixed stop. It is possible to do so.

Furthermore, the second decorative pattern can also be explained as follows. For example, the area of each display area of the second decorative pattern (here, the reduced effect pattern display area 361) is the total area of the display area of the first decorative pattern (here, the individual display areas of the effect patterns 190a to 190c). It is smaller than.

In addition, when SP reach is being executed, the first decorative pattern may be hidden or displayed superimposed on the moving image in order to show the player a moving image such as an image showing the development of the story. (Video images have a higher display priority and are displayed in the foreground), making them invisible or difficult to see. Even in such a case, in order to show that the special symbol is changing (the current fluctuation has not yet ended), the second decorative symbol that is continuing to change is placed in the corner of the display screen, etc. will be displayed. In addition, the second decorative pattern is not designed to be constantly changing except for fixed stops, so that the player can recognize information such as which production pattern 190a to 190c is the reach. , the second decorative pattern is displayed in the corner of the display screen in a reach state (the right pattern and the left pattern of the second decorative pattern are the same pattern, and only the middle pattern continues to fluctuate). It may be configured as follows.

Here, the display area for displaying the first decorative pattern can be referred to as a "main area", for example. Further, the display area for displaying the second decorative pattern can be referred to as a "sub-area", for example. When named in this manner, it is possible to explain the sub-area by saying, for example, that the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner or in a static manner within the sub-area.

Next, the relationship between these first decorative patterns and second decorative patterns and the above-mentioned volume adjustment effect and light amount adjustment effect will be explained. First, in the examples of FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b), the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect are displayed superimposed on the first decorative pattern. Furthermore, in the examples of FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b), layers such as a first decorative pattern, a second decorative pattern, and a story image or character image displayed on the back side of the first decorative pattern (not shown) is made semi-transparent, and layers of volume control effects and light intensity control effects are superimposed.

Here, unless there are circumstances such as insufficient visibility of the volume adjustment effect or the light intensity adjustment effect, it is not necessary to make the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, etc. translucent. Also, since it is undesirable for visibility to decrease due to semi-transparency, if we consider concreteness, we should not make the layer semi-transparent and increase the volume of The display priority (display priority) of the adjustment effects and light amount adjustment effects is set relatively high (at least the story image or character image displayed on the back of the first decorative pattern or the first decorative pattern whose illustration is omitted). It is conceivable to make it higher than the above) and display it in the front. Furthermore, in this case, it is conceivable to give the mini symbols (second decorative symbols) a higher display priority so that they are always visible to the player.

Further, it is not necessary that only one of the volume adjustment effect and the light intensity adjustment effect always be displayed on the screen, and it is also possible to display both at the same time. In this case, it is possible to consider the mode and arrangement of each effect so that the volume control effect and the light intensity control effect do not conflict with each other on display (so that they are not displayed in a superimposed manner). Specifically, for example, a volume adjustment effect is displayed by operating the left direction key 96c or right direction key 96d, and during display (for example, until a predetermined time elapses from the start of display), the upper cross key 96a or the lower cross key is pressed. By operating the key 96b, the light amount adjustment performance is displayed simultaneously with the volume adjustment performance. It is conceivable that the previously displayed volume adjustment effect is first hidden unless the left direction key 96c or right direction key 96d is operated again.

In addition, the images for the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect are simplified, and are drawn in a single color (for example, a bright fluorescent color) or in fewer colors than those used in the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, so that they can be drawn in a variety of colors. By emphasizing the contrast with the colored first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern, etc., it is also possible to ensure the discriminability of the volume adjustment performance and the light amount adjustment performance.

Furthermore, the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect may be displayed so as not to overlap with some images of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern. For example, it is conceivable to display the volume adjustment effect (or light amount adjustment effect) in a positional relationship such that it overlaps with the first decorative pattern but not with the second decorative pattern. By doing so, it is possible to perform a display that allows superimposition with other displays, except for a display whose visibility is particularly desired (here, the second decorative pattern).

In addition, although not shown, regardless of the situation, such as during fluctuation, waiting for fluctuation (stopping fluctuation), or during a demonstration waiting for a customer, in any situation, the same aspect (same size, color, etc.) It is possible to display a volume adjustment effect (or a light amount adjustment effect). Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to display the volume adjustment effect (or light amount adjustment effect) in a smaller size during the variation than when the variation is on standby (while the variation is stopped). Here, as a specific mode for reducing the display, for example, the entire volume adjustment effect (or light amount adjustment effect) may be simply reduced by a predetermined magnification while maintaining the similarity relationship. can.

In the case of the volume adjustment effect, for example, the above-mentioned speaker mark 406, volume level mark 407, cross key mark 408, the words "Volume Adjustment", etc. are reduced by a predetermined magnification. In addition, in the case of the light amount adjustment effect, the light amount level mark 411, the cross key mark 412, the characters "Light amount adjustment", etc. described above are reduced by a predetermined magnification.

In addition, when reducing the display size, the display is not limited to the example described above. For example, the volume adjustment effect may be performed by displaying only the speaker mark 406 and the volume level mark 407, or by adding only the cross key mark 408. It is also possible to do so. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform the light amount adjustment performance by displaying only the light amount level mark 411, or by adding only the cross key mark 412 to this.

In addition, when reducing the display, make sure that each figure that is changing and each figure that is waiting to change are not similar, or in other words, that each figure that is changing and each figure that is waiting to be changed is not similar. It is also possible to take a shape. Furthermore, it is conceivable to arrange the reduced volume adjustment effect (or light amount adjustment effect) so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern even during the fluctuation. Further, it is also possible to arrange the reduced volume adjustment performance that is being changed so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern but to overlap with the first decorative pattern.

Furthermore, it is also possible to make the reduced volume adjustment effect (or light amount adjustment effect) appear on the screen when the corresponding cross key 96 is operated in a situation where it is not displayed during fluctuation.
<<<Relationship between automatic continuous hit effects and effects related to environment settings>>>

Next, in the volume adjustment performance (or light amount adjustment performance), it is conceivable to not perform an indicator performance indicating the remaining time. For example, effects such as the display of the button image 401, normal continuous press effect, automatic continuous press effect, etc. are accompanied by an indicator display (also displayed) to indicate the effective period of operation, but volume adjustment effects and light intensity adjustment effects For example, an indicator display indicating the remaining time may be omitted. In this case, while indicator images (numerals 407 and 411 in FIGS. 34(a) and 34(b)) indicating the volume level and light level are displayed, the remaining time (adjustable time) related to the volume adjustment effect and light intensity adjustment effect is displayed. The indicator image indicating this will not be displayed.

Furthermore, in the volume adjustment effect (or light intensity adjustment effect), it is also possible to not display indicator images (numerals 407 and 411 in FIGS. 34(a) and 34(b)) indicating the volume level and the light intensity level. That is, the display of the volume level mark 407 for the volume adjustment effect and the display of the light amount level mark 411 for the light amount adjustment effect described above have a function of indicating an increase or decrease in volume. Therefore, the display of the volume level mark 407 and the display of the light amount level mark 411 are a type of indicator performance (environment setting-related indicator performance), similar to the aforementioned lottery result notification-related indicator performance. It is also possible to determine the relationship between such environment setting-related indicator effects and the automatic continuous hit effect.

For example, in the automatic continuous hit effect, a button image 401 and an indicator image 402 are displayed in combination as shown in FIGS. 32(a) and 33(a), but in contrast, in the volume adjustment effect, the automatic It is conceivable to display the image excluding the image corresponding to the indicator image of the continuous hit effect. In the volume adjustment performance, a volume level mark image, which is an image of the volume level mark 407, can be exemplified as a display corresponding to the indicator image of the automatic continuous hit performance.

FIG. 33(b) shows an example of a volume adjustment effect in which such a volume level mark image is omitted. In the example of FIG. 33(b), the volume adjustment performance is performed during the fluctuation. Although the cross key mark 408, the speaker mark 406, the words "volume adjustment", etc. are displayed, the image of the volume level mark 407 shown in FIG. 34(a) is not displayed. By doing so, the display area hidden by the volume adjustment effect can be reduced, and the visibility of displays other than the volume adjustment effect can be improved. Note that in the example of FIG. 33(a), the display of the operation button mark 409 and the like that was in FIG. 34(a) is also omitted. This makes it possible to further improve the visibility of displays other than volume adjustment effects.

Further, for example, when the volume adjustment effect is displayed during a variation in which an automatic continuous hit effect can be performed (during a change in the first decorative pattern, etc.), the volume level mark image (the volume level mark 407) is displayed as described above. While the volume adjustment performance is performed without including the volume level mark image (image), etc., the volume adjustment performance including the volume level mark image (image of the volume level mark 407) is displayed while the performance is stopped (determined and stopped). It is also possible to consider production modes such as

Note that the light level mark 411 in the above-mentioned light level adjustment effect (FIG. 34(b)) can also be said to be an indicator that indicates the light level by brightness. As for the light amount adjustment effect (FIG. 34(b)), it is possible to determine the relationship with the indicator effect, similarly to the volume adjustment effect.

It is also possible to display only other images (such as the operation button mark 409) without displaying the light level mark 411. In this case, for example, an image similar to the indicator image 402 (FIGS. 32(b) to 32(d)) of the button effect is normally displayed as a level meter display related to light amount adjustment, but in a specific case, It is conceivable that a light amount level mark 411 as illustrated in FIG. 34(b) is displayed.
<<<Display priority related to effects related to environment settings and other basic display images>>>

In addition, it is possible to set the display priority (display priority) for the volume adjustment effect, each display in the first decorative pattern described above (each display of the effect patterns 190a to 190c), and the second decorative pattern also mentioned above. It is. For example, in descending order of display priority, second decorative pattern>volume adjustment effect (and light intensity adjustment effect)>first decorative pattern>display on the first pending number display section 196 (and display on the second pending number display section 197) display on the fluctuation information display section 195). Regarding the above-mentioned pending number display area 367, the display priority can be set to be the same as the second decorative pattern, or to be next to the second decorative pattern, etc. In addition, since the second decorative pattern, the volume adjustment effect (and light intensity adjustment effect), and the pending number display area 367 are not displayed in a superimposed manner, they may be given the same display priority (in that case, these display priorities may be changed to , which may have the highest display priority).

Here, the display priority indicates the superimposition priority (order of display from the front side of the screen) for each layer for displaying images and moving images displayed on the effect display device 60. By determining such a display priority, when a plurality of images or moving images are displayed in a superimposed manner, it becomes easy to configure the player to selectively view the images or moving images. Note that here, the magnitude relationship of the display priorities is indicated by an inequality sign or an equal sign.

In addition, the above-mentioned display priority may be replaced so that the first decorative pattern is smaller than the display in the first reservation number display section 196 (and the display in the second reservation number display section 197 and the display in the variable information display section 195). Is possible. Furthermore, it is possible to set a display priority for the light amount adjustment effect as well as for the volume adjustment effect.

Up to this point, the volume adjustment performance and the light amount adjustment performance in the normal gaming state have been explained. However, it is possible to perform volume adjustment performance and light intensity adjustment performance even in specific gaming situations such as during time saving (during power support state) (same as in normal gaming state, both when the fluctuation is stopped and during fluctuation in the specific gaming state) Even during a demonstration while waiting for customers, it is possible to perform volume adjustment effects and light intensity adjustment effects.) For example, when the time is shortened (during power support state), a right-handed performance is performed to encourage right-handed hits as described above, but this right-handed performance, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the first reserved Along with the display of the number display section 196, the display of the second pending number display section 197, the display of the fluctuation information display section 195, the pending number display area 367, etc., it is possible to perform a volume adjustment effect (or a light amount adjustment effect). . In addition, in the normal gaming state, while the first pending number display section 196 displays (the pending display related to the first special symbol), the second pending number display section 197 displays (the pending display related to the second special symbol). In a specific gaming state, the second pending number display section 197 displays (pending display related to the second special symbol), while the first pending number display section 196 displays (pending display related to the first special symbol). It may be configured so that it is not performed. When configured in this way, in both the normal game state and the specific game state, the number of reservations display area 367 (display area that displays the number of reservations related to the first special symbol and the number of reservations related to the second special symbol) may be configured so that it is always displayed.

The above-mentioned right-handed hitting effect can also be referred to as a "right-handed hitting instruction display" or "right-handed hitting warning display." Furthermore, unlike this right-handed performance, it is possible to perform a performance that encourages the player to play left-handed. Such an effect that encourages left-handed batting can be displayed in a situation where the player should switch from right-handed batting to left-handed batting, such as when the time saving ends (when the non-electrical support state ends). Such an effect that encourages left-handed hitting can be referred to as a "left-handed hitting effect," a "left-handed hitting instruction display," a "left-handed hitting warning display," or the like.

The right-handed batting performance (right-handed batting warning display) and the left-handed batting performance (left-handed batting warning display) can be collectively referred to as a "hitting style performance" or "hitting style warning display," for example. By performing these types of playing style effects (playing style warning displays), it is possible to urge the player to execute the playing style recommended in the current gaming state.

Then, the display priority when the volume adjustment effect is performed during time saving (non-electronic support state), etc. It is possible to display the 1 pending number display section 196 (and the display on the 2nd pending number display section 197 and the display on the fluctuation information display section 195). In addition, since the second decorative pattern, the volume adjustment effect (and the light intensity adjustment effect), and the pending number display area 367 are not displayed in a superimposed manner, they may be given the same display priority (in that case, the highest display priority good).

In addition, the above-mentioned display priority may be replaced so that the first decorative pattern is smaller than the display in the first reservation number display section 196 (and the display in the second reservation number display section 197 and the display in the variable information display section 195). Is possible. Furthermore, it is possible to set a display priority for the light amount adjustment effect as well as for the volume adjustment effect.
<<Hide volume button image>>

10. Next, regarding the relationship between the button effect and the volume adjustment effect, it is possible to vary the relationship between the appearance timings of the effects. For example, except for a specific button effect such as a back button effect, a button operation (operation of the operation button 22) is performed after the button image 401 etc. appears, and the effect is determined according to the effect pattern determined at that time. , performance is executed (performance change) triggered by button operation.

In contrast to such button effects, in the volume adjustment effect, the volume adjustment effect is displayed only after the operation button that functions as a volume button (here, the operation of the left direction key 96c or right direction key 96d) is performed. is about to start. To put this in another way, in the button effect, except in the case of the back button effect, the button operation is performed in a situation where the button image 401 is displayed, but in the volume adjustment effect, the button operation is performed in a situation where the button image (here, the cross key The relationship between the button effect and the volume adjustment effect is determined so that the button operation is performed in a situation where the mark 408) is not displayed.

Furthermore, to put it another way, in the button presentation, except in the case of the back button presentation, the button image 401 is already displayed at the timing of starting the button operation, but in the volume adjustment presentation, the button image 401 is already displayed at the timing of starting the button operation (immediately before). timing), the button image (here, the cross key mark 408) is not displayed yet. To put it another way, the relationship between the button effect and the volume adjustment effect is such that the display timing of the button image (here, the cross key mark 408) is the same as the display of the button image 401 in the button effect. It can be said that the performance is executed in a relatively slow manner compared to the previous version.

By doing this, you can, for example, display a menu screen that allows you to select volume adjustment from multiple environment setting items, or display that the volume adjustment is still valid (validity period display). It is possible to immediately display a volume adjustment effect without performing a pre-stage effect for volume adjustment (a pre-volume adjustment effect) such as. Further, regarding volume adjustment, it is possible to improve the speed of the adjustment operation.

Furthermore, in determining the relationship as described here, it is also possible to employ different performance modes for when the fluctuation is in progress and when the fluctuation is stopped. For example, for the volume adjustment performance during fluctuation, as described above, a performance mode is adopted in which the display timing of the button image (here, the cross key mark 408) is relatively delayed compared to the display timing of the button image 401 in the button performance. However, for the volume adjustment performance while fluctuation is stopped, the button image (here, the cross key mark 408) is displayed before the button operation (here, the operation of the left direction key 96c or right direction key 96d). It is also possible to adopt a presentation mode that is started.

It should be noted that up until now, we have been explaining the environment settings mainly with regard to volume control effects, but this is due to the following reasons. That is, in the pachinko game machine 10 of this embodiment, the left direction key 96c and right direction key 96d of the cross key 96 are provided exclusively for adjusting the volume. On the other hand, the up direction key 96a and the down direction key 96b may be used not only to adjust the amount of light described above, but also to select a performance stage (also referred to as a "direction stage" or "direction mode"). It has become.

Specifically, although not shown in the figure, when the up direction key 96a or the down direction key 96b is pressed in a predetermined situation related to a variable performance, a plurality of icon images (for example, four etc.) will be displayed. Then, each time the up direction key 96a or the down direction key 96b is pressed, the icon images are highlighted in order by a method such as reverse display.

Then, when, for example, the operation button 22 is pressed while the icon preferred by the player is highlighted, a performance stage is determined, and a performance determined for the determined performance stage is developed during the game. . Such a change in the production stage is sometimes called a "stage change" or "stechen." Further, the production stage can be changed both during fluctuation and when fluctuation is stopped, or only in one of them (for example, only when fluctuation is stopped).

The production stage as described above can be in a production mode shown by a background image. For example, it has a background image A corresponding to production stage A, a background image B corresponding to production stage B, etc., the background image corresponding to the selected production stage is displayed, and the background image corresponding to the selected production stage is displayed. Decorative patterns (for example, for production stage A, it is a decorative pattern that combines character A and numbers, and for production stage B, it is a decorative pattern that combines character B and numbers) and the type of notice (for example, production stage If it is A, a line preview can occur but a step-up preview cannot occur, and if it is production stage B, a step-up preview can occur but a dialogue preview cannot occur). Various performances can be performed.

In other words, among environment setting items such as volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment, volume adjustment is not affected by other selectable items (selectable items) and has a high degree of freedom regarding the conditions in which it can be used. There is. For environment setting items with such a high degree of freedom, it is determined that the adjustment operation can be performed quickly, and before operating the assigned cross key 96 (here, the left direction key 96c and right direction key 96d). In this case, the volume adjustment effect is not displayed.

On the other hand, when adjusting the light amount, by using the cross key 96 in combination with other selectable items (in this case, the production stage), the timing when the light amount can be adjusted is restricted, and the degree of freedom in adjusting the light amount is reduced. . Here, it is also possible to differentiate using terms such as "first environment setting item" and "second environment setting item" based on the difference in the degree of freedom of the environment setting items. For example, herein, volume adjustment, which has a high degree of freedom, may be referred to as a first environment setting item, and light amount adjustment, which has a relatively low degree of freedom, may be referred to as a second environment setting item. Note that although here we have shown the case where the stage of the production is selected using the up direction key 96a and the down direction key 96b, in addition to that, the production custom setting (for example, You may also set settings such as whether to have a look-ahead effect or not, or whether to make the appearance rate of line previews high, low, or somewhere in between, or use the up arrow key 96a or the down arrow key. BGM may be selected at 96b.

In addition, in the process when a power outage occurs (power outage processing) when the degree of freedom in volume adjustment is higher than that in light intensity adjustment, information related to the volume setting at that time (volume level before power outage) is It is possible to temporarily store the information, while information related to the light amount setting (light amount level before power cutoff) may be configured not to be temporarily stored. Further, the information is not limited to this, and any information may be temporarily stored.

In addition, the degree of freedom in adjusting the volume is not limited to relatively increasing, and the degree of freedom in adjusting the amount of light can be increased more than the degree of freedom in adjusting the volume. For example, the cross key 96 (here, the up direction key 96a and the down direction key 96b) is used exclusively for adjusting the light amount, and the other cross keys 96 (here, the left direction key 96c and right direction key 96d) are used for adjusting the volume, etc. It may also be used as the function (in this case, the stage change function of the production). In this way, by eliminating time constraints on light amount adjustment and allowing constant light amount adjustment, optical stimulation can be optimized at all times. This makes it possible to further improve the epilepsy prevention effect.

In addition, when the degree of freedom in light intensity adjustment is increased compared to volume control in this way, information related to the light intensity setting at that time (light intensity level before power outage) is It is possible to temporarily store the information, while information related to the volume setting (volume level before the power is turned off) may not be temporarily stored. Further, the information is not limited to this, and any information may be temporarily stored.

Furthermore, here, the production stage is exemplified as a selectable item (selectable item) in which the cross key is also used as light intensity adjustment (or volume adjustment), but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to make it a possible item.
<<Diversification of the relationship between auto-repeating function and single-shot function>>

11. Next, it is possible to consider diversifying the relationship between the auto-repeating function and the single-shot function. For example, consider the final period of the auto-sequence valid period during which auto-sequence operation can be accepted, as shown in FIG. 36(a). The reference timing T1 (final timing) is N seconds before the end of the auto-repeat effective period, and the press operation of the operation button 22 is detected after this reference timing T1, and the temporal conditions for the auto-repeat operation (for example, the first condition) are detected. Even if an operation that satisfies (0.5 seconds according to the second condition + continued pressing according to the second condition) is started, it may not be determined that an automatic repeated hit operation has been performed. More specifically, when an operation that satisfies the temporal conditions for auto-repeat operation (for example, continued pressing for more than 0.5 seconds) is started after reference timing T1 when N=0.45 (Fig. 36 Even if the continuation of the button press starts from the timing indicated by the arrow "button press (more than 0.5 seconds)" in (a), when the operation starts, the subsequent performance (for example, , the above-mentioned effect display, etc.) are performed, but subsequent automatic presses related to continued pressing are not performed. Note that this can be applied to both the front button performance and the back button performance, but in the front button performance, the period during which the front button performance is performed (the time of the "front button performance" in Fig. 36(a)) (inside the block), a button image is displayed that prompts the player to repeatedly press the button not only before the button is operated, but also during and after the button is operated.

However, even after the above-mentioned reference timing T1, as shown in FIG. If it is detected that the player has pressed the button for a long time (in other words, the player presses the button down and releases it immediately), the CPU 521 controls the CPU 521 to perform a single operation. A determination is made that the More specifically, if a single operation is performed after the reference timing T1 when N = 0.45, for example, if the single operation is at an interval of 0.2 seconds, the single operation can be performed three times. (This is possible three times: 0.45 seconds before, 0.25 seconds before, and 0.05 seconds before), and the subsequent effects corresponding to those three single operations (for example, the effects displayed three times as described above) will be held. Note that this can be applied to both the front button performance and the back button performance, but in the front button performance, the period during which the front button performance is performed (the time of the "front button performance" in (inside the block), a button image is displayed that prompts the player to repeatedly press the button not only before the button is operated, but also during and after the button is operated.

Furthermore, a case can also be considered in which the pressing operation of the operation button 22 is detected before the reference timing T1. As shown in FIG. 36(c), for example, for a button operation started before the reference timing T1, the period from the button operation timing started before the reference timing T1 to the end of the automatic continuous press valid period During a period of N+M seconds (M = time from the button operation timing started before the reference timing T1 to the reference timing T1), the temporal conditions of the automatic continuous press operation (for example, a press for more than 0.5 seconds) Assume that it is determined that the operation satisfies the condition (continuation) (in this case, N=0.45 as well, as in FIGS. 36(a) and 36(b)). Therefore, based on the button operation start timing, the timing when the button has been pressed continuously for 0.5 seconds and the timing when the button has been continuously pressed for an additional 0.2 seconds are treated as single operations, and the automatic operation is treated as a single operation. Repeated presses are made (here, in FIG. 36(c), 0.5 seconds after the start of the time block of "button press (more than 0.5 seconds after T)", that is, 0.5 seconds from the start of continuous presses) (The diagram shows that the time block of the "auto continuous hit effect" starts later). More specifically, for example, if the button operation start timing is 1.0 seconds before the end of the auto continuous hit valid period, the button operation start timing corresponds to the first single operation (actual single operation) (at this point 1.0 seconds until the auto continuous press validity period ends), and from there, the timing when the press duration reaches 0.5 seconds is the second single operation (although it is not actually a single operation, it is a single operation) (at this point, it will take 0.5 seconds until the automatic continuous press validity period ends), and when the press continues for another 0.2 seconds, it will be the third single-shot operation (actual single-shot operation). Although it is not an operation, it is considered to be a single operation. The timing at which seconds have elapsed corresponds to the fourth single-shot operation (although it is not actually a single-shot operation, it is assumed that a single-shot operation has been performed) (at this point, 0. 3 seconds), after that, there is only 0.1 second until the auto continuous hit period ends, so even if the press continues for another 0.2 seconds, it will not become an auto continuous hit because it is outside the auto continuous hit valid period. (It is not considered a single operation). Note that this can be applied to both the front button performance and the back button performance, but in the front button performance, the period during which the front button performance is performed (the time of the "front button performance" in Figure 36(c)) (inside the block), a button image is displayed that prompts the player to repeatedly press the button not only before the button is operated, but also during and after the button is operated.

Furthermore, assume that during the final period of this automatic continuous press operation, after the button press once ends, the button is pressed again (herein referred to as "subsequent button press"). If this subsequent button press was started during the final period, which is the remaining period of the automatic continuous press operation, the subsequent button press is determined to be a single operation, and as described above, The subsequent performance will be performed according to the single operation.

Here, regarding the relationship between such an auto-repeating function and a single-shot function, for example, within a predetermined period (here, a period N seconds ago) before the end of the auto-repeat valid period, the long press of the operation button 22 is started. Even if the button is pressed repeatedly, it will not be detected as an automatic repeated press. (It will not be considered as a single operation cumulatively as time passes for continued pressing.) On the other hand, if two single presses are performed within a predetermined period (in this case, the period N seconds ago) before the end of the auto continuous press validity period, it may be detected as an actual continuous press. It can be said that there is.

In other words, if two single presses are performed within a predetermined period before the end of the automatic consecutive press validity period (in this case, the period N seconds ago), it may be detected as an actual consecutive press. However, if the operation button 22 is pressed for a long time, it will not be detected as a repeated press.
＜＜Relationship between auto continuous hit function and errors＞＞

12. Next, we can consider the relationship between the auto-repeat function and errors. For example, if a predetermined type of error (first error) occurs during the automatic repeated hit performance, the automatic repeated hit performance is not interrupted. However, if another predetermined type of error (second error) occurs, the automatic repeated hit effect is interrupted.

More specifically, there is a "door open error" which is an error when the gaming machine frame 11 (for example, the front frame 13) is opened and the above-mentioned open signal is detected while the pachinko gaming machine 10 is in operation, and a downward ball error. Regarding the tray 19, the "full tank detection error" detected based on the signal of the saucer full switch described above is the first error, and if these first errors occur, the automatic continuous hit performance will continue. do. Here, the first error may be, for example, an error (recoverable error) in which the game can be resumed without turning off the power if the cause of the error is removed.

On the other hand, "magnetic detection error", which is an error when the above-mentioned magnetic detection signal is detected by a magnetic sensor, etc., is considered a second error, and when these second errors occur, the automatic continuous hit effect is It is assumed that the process is interrupted and the entire screen of the effect display device 60 is used to notify that an error has occurred (full-screen error notification).

Here, the second error is "radio wave detection error" which is an error when the radio wave detection signal mentioned above is detected by the radio wave sensor, and "radio wave detection error" which is an error when disconnection or short circuit of various prize openings is detected. It is also possible to include "winning hole disconnection/short circuit error" and "excess payout detection error" which is an error when an abnormality or detection of the number of balls entered, etc. Furthermore, the second error may be, for example, an error in which the game cannot be returned to a state where the game can be played unless the power is turned off and then turned on again (unrecoverable error).

In this manner, by interrupting the automatic continuous hit performance when the second error occurs, it is possible to make extensive error notification by making the most of the screen of the performance display device 60. A conceivable example of extensive error notification at this time is to display a black background over the entire screen and display only characters or figures that notify that an error has occurred. Note that the classification of errors is not limited to the above-mentioned ones, and for example, predetermined errors such as a door opening error may also be included in the second error, and if this occurs, the automatic continuous hit performance may be interrupted and an error notification may be performed. .

In addition, it is not limited to completely interrupting the automatic repeated hit performance, but it is also possible to superimpose an error notification image on the performance image while continuing the automatic repeated hit performance (without interrupting it), or to perform the automatic repeated hit performance. It is also possible to increase the transparency of the image to make it semi-transparent and display an error notification image. In addition, it is possible to use a screen different from the screen of the display unit (display device) on which the automatic repeated hit effect is being performed to notify an error while continuing the automatic repeated hit effect, or to notify the user by voice while continuing the automatic repeated hit effect. It is also possible to issue an error notification. In particular, whether it is the first error or the second error, in order to not disturb the performance that is being executed, the error notification (outputting an error sound and/or displaying an error screen) is performed while repeatedly hitting the button. It is possible to continue displaying button images in the production (auto continuous press production). If an error screen is displayed as an error notification, the error screen and button image are displayed at the same time).In such a configuration, when the first error If this is the case, the button image is displayed and the button operation is configured to be valid (the automatic repeated press function is activated by long press) (the subsequent performance is executed by repeated presses), and if it is the second error, , the button image is displayed, but the button operation is disabled (the automatic repeated press function by long press does not work) (the subsequent effects are not executed even if the button is repeatedly pressed).
<<Parallel handling of auto continuous hit function and environment setting function>>

13. Next, it is conceivable to have a parallel relationship between automatic repeated hits and environmental settings. For example, if there is a button operation related to the volume adjustment performance (in this case, an operation of the left direction key 96c or right direction key 96d) during the automatic continuous hit performance, the volume adjustment performance is started. In this case, it is conceivable to display the volume adjustment effect superimposed on the image of the automatic repeated hit effect (a button image, an effect display, etc. which is the effect performed after the repeated press operation, etc.). Furthermore, it is also conceivable to increase the transparency of the image of the automatic continuous hit effect (make it semi-transparent) and to highlight the volume adjustment effect. Regardless of which configuration is adopted, the display priority of the volume control effect is configured to be higher than the display priority of the image of the automatic continuous hit effect.

In this situation, if a button operation related to the volume adjustment effect (here, an operation of the left direction key 96c or right direction key 96d) is detected, the display mode of the volume level mark 407 according to the operation content is It is possible to change the volume level or change the volume level. By doing so, it is possible to display a performance that respects both the automatic continuous hit performance and the volume adjustment performance. Furthermore, it is possible to display a performance that gives priority to volume adjustment while respecting both the automatic continuous hit performance and the volume adjustment performance.

In the automatic repeated hit performance, the same effect as if the repeated hit operation was performed without actually performing the repeated hit operation is performed. Therefore, during the automatic continuous hit performance, unlike during the normal continuous hit performance, it is considered that at least the player's left hand, which is the hand that is not operating the firing handle 20 (handle operation), is free. Then, it is possible to operate the left direction key 96c or right direction key 96d using your free hand, and in preparation for such a situation, a volume adjustment performance can be displayed immediately and in parallel during the auto continuous hit performance. Make sure you can do it. By doing so, it becomes possible to optimize the control related to the automatic continuous hit performance and the volume adjustment performance. Note that the light amount adjustment effect may also have the same configuration as the volume adjustment effect, that is, the relationships and configurations described above may be applied to the light amount adjustment effect as well.

14. Subsequently, in a situation where the volume adjustment performance (and/or light intensity adjustment performance) is executed in parallel during the automatic continuous hit performance as described above, the progress of the video related to the automatic continuous hit performance is continued (not interrupted, or , not be interrupted). In other words, even if the volume adjustment effect (and light intensity adjustment effect) is displayed, it will not have any effect on the progress of the auto continuous hit effect, and while the volume control effect (and light intensity adjustment effect) is emphasized, the auto continuous hit effect will be displayed. It becomes possible to make effective use of the effects.

Here, during the volume adjustment effect (and light intensity adjustment effect), it is possible to increase the transparency of the auto continuous hit effect as described above, but such changes to the automatic continuous hit effect have no visual impact. However, it can be said that it does not affect the progress of the performance.

15. Subsequently, in a situation where the auto continuous hit performance and the volume adjustment performance (and the light intensity adjustment performance) are progressing in parallel with each other as described above, even if a further button operation (here, the operation of the operation button 22) is detected, It may be possible to continue displaying the volume adjustment effect (and light amount adjustment effect) and prevent the volume adjustment effect (and light amount adjustment effect) from being deleted. By doing so, the volume adjustment performance (and the light amount adjustment performance) can be prevented from being erased by repeatedly pressing the operation button 22. In addition, even if the operation button 22 is repeatedly pressed while the volume adjustment effect (and light intensity adjustment effect) is being displayed, the volume adjustment effect (and light intensity adjustment effect) will not be displayed. ), it will be erased (hidden) after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the display starts.

Furthermore, if there is no volume adjustment (and light intensity adjustment) operation in this state, the volume adjustment effect (and light intensity adjustment effect) will be erased after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after the display starts. It is conceivable that the In addition, even if there is an operation to adjust the volume (and light intensity) after the volume adjustment effect (and light intensity adjustment effect) is displayed, if there is no volume adjustment (and light intensity adjustment) operation after that, the volume will be adjusted at the end. It is conceivable that the image be erased after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation (and light amount adjustment).

In order to proceed in parallel with each other in this way, the automatic continuous hit performance and the volume adjustment performance (and the light intensity adjustment performance) are performed by pressing the operation button in the aforementioned sub-main timer interrupt process (FIG. It is conceivable that both the process related to the operation of 22 and the process related to the operation of the cross key 96 be performed. More specifically, the process related to the operation of the operation button 22 is performed in the above-mentioned push button monitoring control process (S266), and the process related to the operation of the cross key 96 is performed in the device control data output process (S263). is possible.

The sub-main timer interrupt processing is repeated at predetermined intervals (here, 1 ms) unless interrupt prohibition processing has been performed in the previous stage. Therefore, by arranging a module for processing related to the operation of the operation button 22 and a module for processing related to the operation of the cross key 96 in series within the sub-main timer interrupt processing, the processing related to the automatic repeated hit effect and the module for processing related to the operation of the cross key 96 are arranged in series. , it becomes possible to independently and reliably execute both the processing related to the volume adjustment performance (and the light amount adjustment performance).

16. Next, a situation can be considered in which a volume adjustment effect (and a light intensity adjustment effect) is displayed first, and then an automatic continuous hit effect is performed. In such a situation, the volume adjustment effect (and light intensity adjustment effect) will continue to be displayed, and even if the auto repeated tap operation is performed and the auto repeated tap effect is executed, the display of the volume adjustment effect (and light intensity adjustment effect) will be deleted. It is possible to continue further without doing so. Also, in this case, if there is no volume adjustment (and light amount adjustment) operation, the volume adjustment effect (and light amount adjustment effect) will be changed to a predetermined value after the display starts or after the last volume adjustment operation. It can be configured to be erased after a period of time (for example, 3 seconds).

17. Next, it is conceivable that the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) be given a higher display priority than the button image 401 and the automatic repeated press effect (the subsequent effect that occurs when the button is pressed). That is, the layer related to the display of the volume adjustment effect is superimposed on the layer related to the display of the button image 401 and the automatic repeated hit effect, and the effect is displayed.

Here, some examples have been given above regarding the volume adjustment effect, each display in the first decorative pattern described above (each display of the effect patterns 190a to 190c), and the display priority between the second decorative pattern described above. When considering the continuous hit effect, for example, second decorative pattern>volume adjustment effect (and light intensity adjustment effect)>auto continuous hit effect>first decorative pattern>display of the first pending number display section 196 (and second pending number display section) 197 and the display on the variation information display section 195).

By doing so, even if the automatic continuous hit performance and the volume adjustment performance (and the light amount adjustment performance) conflict, the volume adjustment performance can be displayed without impairing visibility.

In addition, when there are multiple layers configuring the display of the volume adjustment effect, it is conceivable to set the display priority of all the layers related to the display of the volume adjustment effect higher than the layer related to the automatic continuous hit effect. In addition, the display priority is not limited to this, but the display priority of only some of the layers related to the display of the volume adjustment effect (for example, only the layer related to the speaker mark 406 and the volume level mark 407) may be changed to the layer related to the auto continuous hit effect. It is possible to make it higher than that.

Further, in this case, it is also possible to display only some of the layers related to the display of the volume adjustment effect (for example, only the layer related to the speaker mark 406 and the volume level mark 407).

Here, as a parallel treatment of the automatic repeated hit function and the environment setting, the relationship between the automatic repeated hit performance and the volume adjustment performance has been explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the relationship between the automatic repeated hit performance and the light amount adjustment performance may be similar to the relationship between the automatic repeated hit performance and the volume adjustment performance.
<<Specific aspects regarding the variation of automatic continuous hit effect and volume effect>>

18. Next, it is possible to consider a specific aspect related to the variation straddling between the automatic continuous hit performance and the volume adjustment performance. For example, it is conceivable that the automatic continuous hit performance should not straddle fluctuations. More specifically, in the front button performance, if the button image 401 during the automatic repeated hit performance is displayed, this button image 401 will disappear during the fluctuation at that time (until the next fluctuation starts at the latest). to be done. In addition, even in the case of a back button effect, it is not configured to allow repeated tap operations (normal repeated taps or auto repeated taps) across fluctuations, and effects display as a back button effect as described above, etc. is never executed across variations.

On the other hand, regarding the volume adjustment effect, if the volume adjustment effect is displayed during fluctuation, even if the current fluctuation is fixed and stopped and the next fluctuation starts, the volume adjustment effect continues to be displayed. If it is within the specified time (for example, within 3 seconds from the start of display or the last button operation), it will not be erased and will remain on the screen. In other words, even when the fluctuation is stopped (including during the above-described symbol fixing time and during fluctuation standby), the volume adjustment effect is displayed so that the volume can be adjusted. In this way, by allowing the volume adjustment effect to straddle fluctuations, volume adjustment becomes possible in more diverse situations.

Regarding the volume adjustment effect, even if the display of the volume adjustment effect continues for a specified period of time (for example, within 3 seconds from the start of display or the last button operation), the change during the symbol fixed time and (or "or") It is also possible to temporarily erase the display when it is on standby (in other words, it will be temporarily hidden if the symbol is fixed or waiting to change within 3 seconds from the start of display), and then resume displaying. . In this case, it is conceivable to restart the display only for the remaining time (remaining time) of the predetermined time during which the display of the volume adjustment effect continues (for example, 3 seconds from the start of display or the last button operation). Alternatively, it is also conceivable to set the display continuation time after restarting to a time longer than the remaining time (for example, 3 seconds as the above-mentioned predetermined time during which the display of the volume adjustment effect continues). In addition, regarding the volume adjustment effect, even if the volume adjustment effect continues to be displayed for a specified period of time (for example, within 3 seconds from the start of display or the last button operation), the change during the symbol fixed time and (or "or") It is configured so that it is erased when it is on standby (that is, it is forcibly hidden if the symbol is fixed or waiting to change within 3 seconds from the start of display) and is not displayed until the button is pressed again. Good too.

In addition, although the relationship between the automatic repeated hit performance and the volume adjustment performance has been explained, the relationship between the automatic repeated hit performance and the light amount adjustment performance is not limited to this, and the relationship between the automatic repeated hit performance and the light amount adjustment performance may be the same as the relationship explained here. is also possible.
<<19. Specific aspects of the jackpot straddle between auto continuous hit performance and volume adjustment performance >>

Next, it is possible to consider specific aspects related to the jackpot straddle between the auto continuous hit performance and the volume adjustment performance. For example, when an automatic repeated hit performance is performed in the fluctuation that results in a jackpot (jackpot fluctuation), it is conceivable that this automatic repeated hit performance does not straddle the jackpot fluctuation and the jackpot game. More specifically, in the front button performance, when the button image 401 during automatic repeated hit performance is displayed, even if the fluctuation at that time is a jackpot fluctuation, this button image 401 is displayed during the fluctuation (at the latest in the jackpot game). until such starting demonstration is started). In addition, even in the case of a back button performance, it is not configured to allow repeated hitting operations (normal repeated hits or automatic repeated hits) across jackpot fluctuations and jackpot games, and the back button performance as described above The effect display etc. will not be executed across the jackpot fluctuation and the jackpot game.

On the other hand, regarding the volume adjustment effect, if the volume adjustment effect is displayed during jackpot fluctuations, even if the fluctuation at that time is fixed and stopped and the jackpot game is started, the volume adjustment effect continues to be displayed. If it is within the specified time (for example, within 3 seconds from the start of display or the last button operation), it will not be erased and will remain on the screen. In other words, even when fluctuations related to jackpot fluctuations are stopped (including during symbol fixing time and while waiting for a jackpot game), the volume adjustment performance is displayed and the volume can be adjusted. In this way, by allowing the volume adjustment performance to straddle between jackpot fluctuations and jackpot games, volume adjustment becomes possible in more diverse situations.

Regarding the volume adjustment effect, even if the display of the volume adjustment effect continues within the specified time (for example, within 3 seconds from the start of the display or the last button operation), the jackpot will not occur during the symbol fixed time and (or "or"). When the symbol is on standby for a game, it is temporarily erased (in other words, it is temporarily hidden if the symbol is fixed within 3 seconds from the start of display or when the symbol is on standby for a jackpot game), and then the display is resumed. is also possible. In this case, it is conceivable to restart the display only for the remaining time (remaining time) of the predetermined time during which the display of the volume adjustment effect continues (for example, 3 seconds from the start of display or the last button operation). Alternatively, it is also conceivable to set the display continuation time after restarting to a time longer than the remaining time (for example, 3 seconds as the above-mentioned predetermined time during which the display of the volume adjustment effect continues). In addition, regarding the volume adjustment effect, even if the volume adjustment effect continues to be displayed for a specified period of time (for example, within 3 seconds from the start of display or the last button operation), the jackpot will not be accepted during the symbol fixed time and (or "or"). It will be erased when you are waiting for a game (in other words, if the symbol is fixed or waiting for a jackpot game within 3 seconds from the start of display, it will be forcibly hidden) and will not be displayed until the button is pressed again. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, although the relationship between the automatic repeated hit performance and the volume adjustment performance has been explained, the relationship between the automatic repeated hit performance and the light amount adjustment performance is not limited to this, and the relationship between the automatic repeated hit performance and the light amount adjustment performance may be the same as the relationship explained here. is also possible.
<<Relationship between auto continuous hit performance and power outage when winning the jackpot>>

20. Next, it is possible to consider the relationship between the automatic continuous hit performance and the power outage at the time of winning a jackpot. For example, during the fluctuation that results in a jackpot (jackpot fluctuation), a power outage occurs when the remaining time of the fluctuation is, for example, about 10 seconds, and then the power is turned on within 10 seconds to recover from the power outage. Consider a case like this. In this case, even if the performance related to the jackpot fluctuation at that time is such that an automatic continuous hit performance could be executed if there was no power outage (normally), the automatic continuous hit performance would be executed for the remaining fluctuations after the power outage is restored. It is conceivable that the performance should not be performed.

In order to do this, for example, if it is determined based on the state of the flag that a power outage recovery has been performed after a power outage that was fluctuating, even if there is an auto-repeat operation, the auto-repeat effect will proceed. It is possible to prevent this from happening. In addition, in the control of the sub-main board 301 and the sub-sub board 302, the auto-repeat effect is selected and the process for auto-repeat is performed, but there is a method such as making the layer related to the display of the auto-repeat effect transparent. Therefore, it is conceivable that the display of the automatic continuous hit effect may be prevented.

Furthermore, by not displaying the automatic continuous hit effect as described above, the display at the time of recovery from power failure can be simplified. Further, it is possible to differentiate the display from the case where there was no power outage, and it becomes possible to make the player perceive that the power outage recovery is in progress. Further, during recovery from a power failure, for example, if a screen display dedicated to the time of recovery from a power failure is to be displayed, the visibility of the dedicated screen display will not be hindered by the automatic continuous hit effect. Here, as an example of a screen display dedicated to power recovery, a black background may be displayed on the entire screen, and only characters or figures notifying that power recovery is in progress may be displayed.

In addition, the process at the time of recovery from power failure is the period of the jackpot game (for example, from the start of the jackpot start demo to the end of the jackpot end demo) after the fluctuation after the power failure recovery (in this case, the fluctuation of the remaining 10 seconds described above) is completed. It is also conceivable that the period may extend up to Then, if a promotion to a fixed-rate promotion (promotion to a fixed-rate variable) or a display to determine the number of rounds is performed during the period of the jackpot game, it is also possible to execute a continuous-hitting display as a button display. .

In such a case, even if an automatic repeated hit operation is performed, it is possible to prevent the automatic repeated hit effect from being displayed (the automatic repeated hit effect is not performed). In other words, if there is no power outage during the jackpot fluctuation, it is possible to execute a repeated hit performance as a button performance in the jackpot game after the jackpot fluctuation that resumes after the power outage is restored, but if there is a power outage during the jackpot fluctuation In this case, it is possible to prevent the repeated-hit performance from being performed as a button performance in the jackpot game after the jackpot fluctuation that is restarted after the power is turned off and restored. In this way, when the power is restored due to jackpot fluctuations, the automatic repeated hit effect will not be displayed (auto repeated hit effect will not be performed) during the jackpot game, so that when the power is restored due to fluctuations, the automatic repeated hit effect will not be displayed. It is possible to simplify the display and differentiate the display from the case where there was no power outage. Furthermore, a screen display dedicated to when the power is restored from a power outage will be displayed (even if the power is cut off not during a jackpot game but during jackpot fluctuations, during that jackpot game, the screen for the jackpot game dedicated to when the power is restored will be displayed). In this case, the visibility of the dedicated screen display will not be obstructed by the automatic continuous hit effect.

Note that the fluctuation at the time of the power outage is a fluctuation that is earlier than the fluctuation that was the target of the look-ahead (target fluctuation), and the previous fluctuation is the one that caused the recovery from the power outage, and the target fluctuation is the target of the look-ahead. If the fluctuation that was the result of the above is a jackpot fluctuation, it is possible to generate an automatic continuous hit effect with the fluctuation that was the target of the look-ahead that was reached after the power outage was restored, and the subsequent jackpot It is also possible to generate an automatic continuous hit effect in games. In addition, the information related to the number of pending events when a power outage occurs is determined to be a power outage recovery, and if the number of pending events is a predetermined number or more (for example, one or more), an automatic continuous hit effect is performed as if there was no power outage. It is also possible to display the information.

21. Next, it is possible to consider the relationship between the automatic continuous hit performance and the power outage during a jackpot (here, during a jackpot game). It should be noted that explanations of matters similar to those in the case of power restoration after power outage during jackpot fluctuations described above will be omitted as appropriate.

For example, a power outage may occur after a jackpot has been announced and the start demonstration of a jackpot game has begun (including during the jackpot round), and then the power is turned on and the power is cut off. When a return is made, even if the continuous hit performance that is performed during the jackpot game could be executed (normally) if there was no power outage, the automatic continuous hit performance will not be executed. do.

By doing this, as in the case of power recovery from a power outage during jackpot fluctuations mentioned above, the display at the time of power outage recovery is simplified and the display is differentiated from the case where there was no power outage. be able to. Furthermore, when displaying a screen exclusively for recovery from a power failure, the visibility of the dedicated screen display will not be hindered by the automatic continuous hit effect.

Note that the fluctuation at the time of the power outage is a fluctuation that is earlier than the fluctuation that was the target of the look-ahead (target fluctuation), and the previous fluctuation is the one that caused the recovery from the power outage, and the target fluctuation is the target of the look-ahead. If the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation as described above, it may be possible to generate an automatic consecutive hit effect even in a jackpot game after the fluctuation that was subject to the look-ahead that was reached after the power outage was restored. It is possible. Also, among the multiple types of advance notice performances, only if the advance notice performance in a predetermined manner (giraffe pattern, rainbow color, etc.) has been performed, an automatic continuous hit performance will be generated after the power is restored. It is possible.
<<Relationship between power on and volume adjustment>>

22. Next, regarding turning on the power, you can also consider the relationship with volume adjustment. For example, as described above, the volume level can always be set to the same value (for example, level 1, level 3, or level 5) at an initial stage such as when the power is turned on. In addition, even if the power is turned on while holding down the volume button (here, the left direction key 96c or right direction key 96d of the cross key 96), the initial volume level is maintained and the volume It is conceivable to prevent the increase or decrease of .

In other words, for example, if the initial volume level is set to level 3 and the design is such that the volume level is always level 3 when the power is turned on normally, if the power is turned on while pressing the right direction key 96d. Even if it is, instead of the volume adjustment effect changing from level 3 to level 4, the level 3 volume adjustment effect will be displayed, or the volume adjustment effect will not be displayed in the first place. do. Also, different from this, if the initial volume level is set to level 5, even if the power is turned on while pressing the left direction key 96c, the volume adjustment effect will change from level 5 to level 4. Instead of being displayed, a level 5 volume adjustment effect is displayed, or the volume adjustment screen is not displayed in the first place. By doing this, the degree of freedom regarding the volume level when the power is turned on can be restricted, and the volume level when the power is turned on can be stabilized.

In order to do this, for example, as shown in FIG. 20(b1), a situation where the volume button (in this case, the left direction key 96c or right direction key 96d of the cross key 96) is pressed down when the power is turned on. think of. In FIG. 20(b1), the volume button has been pressed continuously since before the power was turned on.

Then, as the power is turned on, a signal pulse P (rectangular wave) is generated as shown in FIG. It is possible to detect the operation of the volume button as valid not at T2 but at the timing T3 when an edge (here, a falling edge) E2 occurs later, and change the volume level based on the detection result. .

If you do not want to give priority to the stability of the volume level, you can enable the volume button operation at the timing when the first rising edge is detected, and change the volume level from the beginning. You may also do so. Furthermore, although the relationship between power-on and volume adjustment has been explained, the present invention is not limited to this, and the relationship between power-on and light intensity adjustment may be similar to the relationship described here. .
<<Relationship between long-pressing the volume button and auto-tap function>>

23. Next, you can think about the relationship between long presses on the volume button and the auto-repeat function. For example, in a situation where the volume button (here, the left direction key 96c or right direction key 96d of the cross key 96) is held down, unlike the case of the operation button 22, it is assumed that the volume button has been operated multiple times. It is conceivable to prevent such control from being performed.

That is, even if the left direction key 96c (or right direction key 96d), which is a volume button, is pressed for a long time, the volume level is not controlled to increase in multiple steps (or increase) while the volume button is held down. Such control treats a long press of the volume button as one operation. In terms of environment settings, this kind of control can be said to mean that even if you press and hold for a long time, the auto-repeat function will not become effective.

Note that if such control is not adopted in which the long press of the volume button is treated as one operation, the volume level may be increased or decreased by multiple levels by the long press of the volume button. Further, the relationship described here is applicable not only to volume adjustment but also to light amount adjustment.

24. Next, regarding the case where the volume button is pressed and held for a long time as described above, it is possible to consider a situation in which the volume button operations are combined. For example, suppose that a volume button (here, the left direction key 96c) is pressed and held to lower the volume level, and for some reason the other volume button (here, the right direction key 96d) is operated. .

The volume level is lowered by one level by the previously performed long press operation of the left direction key 96c. In this situation, when the right direction key 96d, which is the other volume button, is pressed once (single press or long press is fine), the volume level increases by one step, and the volume level increases by pressing the left direction key 96d. Return to the value before pressing and holding 96c. In other words, it is conceivable that a plurality of volume buttons for increasing/decreasing the volume level function independently. By doing so, it becomes possible to adjust the volume with good responsiveness to button operations.
<<Relationship between the button operation validity period of the automatic continuous press effect and the display time of the volume adjustment effect>>

25. Next, it is possible to consider the relationship between the button operation validity period of the auto-repeat effect and the display time of the volume adjustment effect. For example, a volume adjustment effect is displayed while the volume is changing, and after the last operation effect related to volume adjustment is displayed, a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed without any new volume adjustment operation as described above, and the volume is changed. Consider the case where the adjustment effect is deleted. Alternatively, consider a case where a volume adjustment effect is displayed during fluctuation, no volume adjustment operation is performed, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) passes, and the volume adjustment effect is deleted.

As shown in the above, the button operation for the automatic continuous press effect is valid for the period (3 seconds in this case) after the volume button operation is finished (or without any operation) until the volume adjustment effect is deleted. For example, the period of time is about 6 seconds to 10 seconds. The period during which the button operation of this automatic repeated press effect is valid corresponds to the above-mentioned repeated press operation valid period (a period in which at least one of the automatic repeated press effect period and the button press valid period is valid). be.

By doing this, the valid period of button operation for the automatic continuous hit performance (here, about 6 to 10 seconds) is longer than the display time of the fluctuating volume adjustment performance (here, 3 seconds). Furthermore, even if the volume adjustment effect can be displayed superimposed on the auto-repeat effect, the volume adjustment effect will be erased during the valid button operation period, making it possible to ensure the visibility of the auto-repeat effect. becomes.
<<Relationship between the symbol fixation time and the display time of the volume adjustment effect>>

26. Furthermore, it is possible to consider the relationship between the above-mentioned display time (here, 3 seconds) of the volume adjustment effect and the above-mentioned symbol fixation time. For example, the symbol fixing time is the time during which the variable performance is fixed and stopped, and the time is, for example, about 0.3 to 0.5 seconds. Therefore, the display time of the volume adjustment effect is longer than the symbol fixing time.
<<Relationship between volume customization means and gaming machine back volume adjustment means>>

27. Next, the relationship between the volume customizing means and the management volume adjusting means can be considered. First, as explained above, the volume customization means here uses an operation input means such as a volume button (here, the left direction key 96c or right direction key 96d of the cross key 96). , is a means constituted by various devices that realize a function that allows the player to set the environment related to the volume.

On the other hand, the gaming machine back volume adjustment means realizes a function that allows the gaming parlor clerk to set the basic volume using the gaming machine back volume volume 416 located on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 10 (see FIG. 2). It is a means constituted by each device. Further, this gaming machine back volume adjusting means can shift the volume adjusted by the above-mentioned volume customizing means so that the volume becomes louder or softer.

To give a more specific example, there is a correlation between the gaming machine back volume adjustment means and the above-mentioned volume customization means, and the actual volume (absolute volume) of volume levels 1 to 5 by the volume customization means is , is adapted to change depending on the adjustment value of the volume adjustment means behind the gaming machine. For example, it is assumed that the gaming machine back volume volume 416 of the gaming machine back volume adjusting means can be set in three levels: "Large", "Medium", and "Small". In this case, the volume (synthetic volume) resulting from the interaction between the gaming machine back volume adjustment means and the volume customizing means is divided into five levels when the volume customizing means is set to "Large" and five levels when the volume customization means is set to "Medium". The volume can be differentiated into 5 levels of volume, ``low'' and ``low''.

Furthermore, if the synthesized volume is divided equally between the minimum level and the maximum level, and differentiated by numerical values from 1 to 95, the synthesis at volume level 1 to 5 when the volume control means on the back of the gaming machine is set to "loud". It is assumed that the volume is expressed by values of "85", "89", "92", "95", and "95", respectively (units are decibels). Furthermore, the default volume level (volume level at power-on) in the volume customizing means in this case is set to "5".

On the other hand, when the volume control means behind the gaming machine is set to "medium", the composite volume at volume levels 1 to 5 is "85", "89", "92", "95", and "95", respectively. do. Furthermore, the default volume level in the volume customizing means in this case is set to "1". Furthermore, when the gaming machine back volume control means is set to "low", the composite volumes at volume levels 1 to 5 are "1", "1", "78", "82", and "95", respectively. Furthermore, the default volume level in the volume customizing means in this case is set to "4".

In addition, only when the volume control means behind the gaming machine is set to "loud", regardless of the currently set volume level, if the gaming standby continues for a predetermined time or longer (for example, when a demo is in progress while waiting for a customer) In this case, it is conceivable to forcibly change the volume level to "5", which is the default volume level (volume level when the power is turned on) in the volume customizing means.
<<Relationship between long-pressing before the validity period of continuous tapping operation and auto continuous tapping function>>

28. Next, it is possible to consider the relationship between the long press before the valid period of repeated tapping operation and the automatic repeated tapping function. For example, the valid period of button operation related to the repeated press operation (the above-mentioned valid period of the continuous press operation) is set to about 6 seconds to 10 seconds. As described above, the valid period of repeated press operations can be at least one of the valid period of automatic presses and the valid period of repeated button presses, but here it corresponds to the valid period of repeated button presses.

Then, as shown in FIG. 30(b), the operation button 22 is pressed at a timing before the start of this continuous-hitting operation valid period, and this pressing operation starts the continuous-hitting operation valid period, and the continuous-hitting operation valid period continues. Even in this situation, it is assumed that the button continues to be pressed for a long time. In such a situation, the effective period of automatic continuous hitting (the above-mentioned automatic continuous hitting effective period) starts after the start of the effective period of continuous hitting operation.

Then, after this auto-repeat-hit valid period is reached, if a long press for a time longer than the auto-repeat-hit condition is detected, the auto-repeat operation becomes valid, and, for example, an auto-repeat effect is started. Here, since FIG. 30(b) is based on the specific example of the auto-repeat operation shown in FIG. 28(a), description of similar parts will be omitted as appropriate. In addition, in FIG. 30(b), the button multiple press valid period starts earlier than the automatic multiple press valid period, and FIG. 30(b) is an example of a case where an unusual consecutive press valid period is provided. It has become. In such a case, automatic repeated press detection becomes valid after the button is pressed for a predetermined period of time (in this case, 0.5 seconds as described above), but if the button is continued to be pressed for a predetermined time or more before the automatic repeated press valid period. If so, after reaching the auto-repeating effective period, auto-repeating is performed at specific intervals (here, 0.2 second intervals as described above). If continuous pressing is started within the auto-sequence valid period, auto-strikes will occur at specific intervals after a predetermined time has passed, but unlike that, smooth and even auto-strikes (at 0.2 second intervals) should be possible. I can do it.

By doing this, the auto continuous hit function can be optimized. Also, for example, if a player assumes a back button function and starts a long press in a situation where there is no front button effect, and then a front button effect related to repeated presses starts during the long press, the automatic continuous press The performance can be started at the appropriate timing and can be smoothly connected to the automatic continuous hit performance. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the auto continuous hit valid period may start simultaneously with the continuous hit operation valid period.

29. Further, as described above, if the long press is started before the start of the effective period of repeated tapping operation, the automatic repeated pressing function may not be activated without making the automatic repeated pressing effective period. Further, in this case, although the normal repeated hit operation is valid and the normal repeated hit effect can be performed, the automatic repeated hit effect does not reach the valid period, and it is possible to prevent the automatic repeated hit effect from being performed.
<<Relationship between SP reach and the back button function (a mode in which repeated hit effects are not executed)>>

30. Next, we can consider the relationship between SP reach and the back button function. For example, during SP reach, a continuous hit performance as a back button performance may be performed. Furthermore, in the back button performance, the automatic repeated hit function is not applied (does not operate). As a result, while the normal repeated hitting function may be performed during SP reach, the automatic repeated hitting function will not be performed.

Further, the timing to perform the back button performance (the time when the back button function is performed) is set in the first half of the SP reach (such as the beginning or middle of the performance performed in the SP reach state). Further, in the first half of the SP reach, a guide display such as a button image does not appear (a back button effect is performed without a front button effect). During the back button performance, while the player is performing normal repeated tapping operations, the guide display will not appear, but the continuous pressing effects (such as the effect display mentioned above) will be performed, but if the player performs the automatic repeated tapping operation, the guide display will not appear. The mid-season performance is not performed.

In addition, the performance pattern that develops from the first half of SP reach to the second half is made to have a higher expectation of a jackpot compared to a performance that does not develop. Furthermore, depending on the difference in the appearance (color) of the result of the back button performance (the performance that appears when the operation button 22 is operated, the effect display described above), the degree of expectation regarding the development of the performance and the case in which the performance will develop are determined. In each case, the type of performance that will develop (whether or not it will develop into a high-expectation performance like the above-mentioned performance C) is made different. In addition, in the second half of SP Reach, the repeated hit effect as a back button effect will not be performed even if the player operates, regardless of whether it is related to normal repeated hits or auto repeated hits. (In other words, in the latter half of the SP reach, the back button performance as a repeated hit performance is not performed, however, the repeated hit performance and single operation performance as the front button performance can be performed).

By doing so, it is possible to diversify the relationship between the SP reach and the back button function, and improve the taste of the Pachinko gaming machine 10. As a modified example, it may be possible to perform automatic repeated hits also on the back button in the first half of SP reach.
<<Relationship between SP reach and back button function (mode of executing repeated hit effect)>>

31. The relationship between the SP reach and the back button function is not limited to not executing the automatic repeated hit effect as described above, but may be such that the automatic repeated hit effect is executed. For example, as in the case described above, during SP reach, there may be a case where a continuous hit effect is performed as a back button effect. Further, unlike the case described above, the auto-repeating function is applied (activated) even when the back button is displayed. As a result, both the normal repeated hitting function and the automatic repeated hitting function can be performed during SP reach.

Furthermore, when performing a continuous press performance as a back button performance, a guide display (front button performance) related to other types of button performances (single press, long press, etc.) may be performed. In addition, if the operation button 22 is pressed for a long time while a continuous press effect is being performed as a back button effect, other types of button effects (single press, long press, etc.) will be affected by the above-mentioned automatic button operation. Ensure control is in place. Here, the automatic button operation can be set in advance by the player so that the same effect as if the player had operated the operation button 22 without having to operate the operation button 22, as described above. This is a function that has been implemented.

Further, the back button effect may proceed in predetermined stages. In that case, it is assumed that the back button effect progresses in three stages, A, B, and C (A is the first stage). Among these stages A to C, if it is determined that the button has been pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, multiple times) or more, and that there has been a repeated tap operation (in this case, both normal repeated taps and automatic repeated taps), the jackpot expectation level is the highest. Make sure that the highest level is A. In other words, if the player does not move up from the level A at all even though a predetermined number of consecutive hitting operations have been performed, it is possible to realize an innovative game feature in which the expectation of a jackpot is maximized.

By doing so, it is possible to diversify the relationship between the SP reach and the back button function, and improve the interest in the Pachinko gaming machine 10.
<<Relationship between auto continuous hit function and electric support function>>

32. Next, it is possible to consider the relationship between the auto continuous hit function and the electric support function. For example, the automatic continuous hitting function is made to be exhibited in any of the game states including a non-electric support state, an electric support state, and a jackpot state (during a jackpot). Then, when an automatic repeated hit operation is performed, an automatic repeated hit effect is performed.

For example, as an effect (repeat effect) when requesting a continuous attack operation by displaying characters such as ``hit repeatedly'', a plurality of types of repeated effect effects with different modes are provided. Furthermore, a plurality of types of automatic repeated hitting performances are provided which differ in display mode and the effective period of the above-mentioned repeated hitting operation. In the non-electric support state, compared to the electric support state, there are relatively more types of consecutive hit effects (hereinafter referred to as "multiple hit possible effects") that can be selected, but if the number of consecutive hit effects exceeds a certain time The selection ratio of performances that can be hit repeatedly in the non-electronic support state is determined so that the ratio of performances that have a long auto-hit effective period (for example, 10 seconds or more) is relatively small.

In the electric support state, there are relatively few types of effects that can be hit repeatedly, and among them, the proportion of long effects that have an auto continuous hit validity period of more than a certain time (for example, 10 seconds or more) is also relatively small. , determine the selection ratio. Furthermore, in the jackpot state (during jackpot), there are relatively few types of effects that can be hit repeatedly, and among them, the proportion of effects that have an automatic continuous hit validity period of more than a specific time (for example, 10 seconds or more) is relatively Set the selection ratio so that it increases.

Furthermore, as a performance that can be hit repeatedly, it is possible to perform a performance in which a predetermined mission is succeeded (or failed) or a battle is won (or defeated). Further, it is possible to make it possible to make it possible to make it possible to make it possible to make the expectation of a jackpot higher in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state when the player succeeds in a mission or wins a battle in the multi-hit performance.

By doing so, it is possible to diversify the relationship between the auto continuous play function and the electric support function, and to improve the interest in the Pachinko game machine 10.
<<Relationship between touch detection and production>>

33. Next, the relationship between touch detection on the firing handle 20 and presentation can be considered. For example, in a non-gaming state where a game is not being played, if a player touches the firing handle 20 and a touch is detected, a predetermined effect can be executed. Various kinds of effects can be adopted as the predetermined effects. For example, it is possible to adopt one that is displayed as an image, and one that is output as audio.

Further, there are a plurality of types of predetermined effects, and although the predetermined effects can be executed in the non-electric support state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effects from being executed in the electric support state. This predetermined performance is not normally executed at the same time as the continuous-hitting performance or the automatic repeated-hitting performance, but it can be executed in parallel with the volume adjustment performance and the light intensity adjustment performance (in parallel with the fluctuating standby or customer waiting demonstration). ). Furthermore, a specific performance that is a performance in a different category from the predetermined performance can also be performed, and that specific performance is a performance that cannot be performed in a non-electric support state, but can be performed in an electric support state, and is similar to the above-mentioned right-handed performance. It is possible to use a guidance performance (right-handed performance). Furthermore, the specific performance can be executed in parallel with the normal continuous hit performance or the automatic continuous hit performance (can be executed during fluctuation), or can be executed in parallel with the volume adjustment performance or the light intensity adjustment performance ( (Can be executed in parallel during variable waiting or customer waiting demonstration). As mentioned above, this right-handed performance as a specific performance is also displayed during the customer waiting demonstration (during the waiting movie) in the electric support state.

34. Next, as the relationship between touch detection and performance, it is possible to consider the relationship between touch detection and a standby movie (standby demonstration performance) that is a performance of a standby demonstration. For example, if the period in which the firing handle 20 is in the variable stop (determined stop) state and the touch of the firing handle 20 is not detected reaches a predetermined period, a standby demonstration effect may be displayed. Note that the standby demonstration performance here is the above-mentioned standby movie.

Further, the volume during the standby demonstration performance is silent or lower (smaller) than the volume up to that point (before the start of the standby demonstration performance, such as during symbol variation). Furthermore, the period (display period) of the standby demonstration effect is longer than the above-mentioned predetermined period (the time until the standby demonstration effect is started in a state where no touch is detected) before the standby demonstration effect is displayed. Also, during the display period of the standby demo performance (during the display period of the standby demo performance), if the ball does not enter any of the starting slots (here, the first starting winning slot 62 or the second starting winning slot 63). In either case, if a touch is detected on the firing handle 20, the display changes from the standby demonstration performance to the display indicating that the fluctuation is stopped.

A standby demonstration effect display is performed in both the non-electric support state and the electric support state, but as a modified example, in the electric support state, the sound is only output at a low (small) volume, and the standby demonstration effect display is not performed. It may be configured so that it does not occur. In addition, in a specific game state (in this case, a game state in which you should hit right), if a touch is detected on the firing handle 20 under a predetermined situation (in this case, when a standby demonstration effect is displayed), multiple Among the types of right-handed hitting guidance performances, a specific right-handed hitting guidance performance may be displayed or a specific audio output may be performed.

Further, during the standby demonstration performance, when the operation button 22 or the cross key 96 is operated, the screen shifts to the above-mentioned menu screen for setting the environment. On the other hand, if a touch is detected on the firing handle 20 during the standby demonstration production, the screen will shift to the fluctuation stop screen. By operating the cross key 96 (triggered by the player's operation), it is possible to adjust the volume and display a volume adjustment effect, and similarly, it is possible to adjust the light amount and display a light amount adjustment effect.
<<Relationship between environment setting function and error volume>>

35. Next, we can consider the relationship between the environment setting function and the error volume. For example, as explained above, it is possible to adjust the volume related to the performance in the environment settings, but the error volume cannot be set by the player (unless you use the volume adjustment means behind the game machine). (If the setting is not possible, it may be impossible to set it.) Although the error volume can be set when the pachinko game machine 10 is shipped from the factory, it is not possible to change it by the player. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the volume is set too low when an abnormality occurs and the player or the game parlor staff cannot detect the abnormality. However, for the second error mentioned above, the volume cannot be set according to the volume level that can be set by the player, but for the first error mentioned above, the volume cannot be set according to the volume level that can be set by the player. It may be configured so that it can be done.
<<Relationship between environment settings and variable display>>

36. Next, it is possible to consider a modification of the relationship between environment settings and variable display. For example, if the change starts while adjusting the volume or light intensity, even if the operation to determine the volume or light intensity (in this case, pressing the operation button 22) is not performed, the volume selected at the time the change starts Or reflect the light intensity settings. By doing so, it is possible to quickly draw the attention of the player to the variable performance.
<<Relationship between environment settings and production mode changes>>

37. Next, it is possible to consider the relationship between environment settings and production mode changes. For example, the volume buttons (here, the left direction key 96c and right direction key 96d) can only be used to adjust the volume, and the light volume buttons (here, the up direction key 96a and down direction key 96b) can be used in addition to adjusting the light volume. It shall also be used to switch the production mode. The light intensity button has different functions depending on whether it is changing or not changing.

Furthermore, regarding switching of the production mode, the production mode can be switched by operating the light quantity button both during variation and while variation is stopped. During the fluctuation, the volume can be adjusted and the production mode can be switched, but the light amount cannot be adjusted. However, while the fluctuation is stopped (including during standby demonstration), it is possible to adjust the volume, adjust the amount of light, and switch the production mode.

Note that in order to be able to both adjust the light amount and switch the performance mode while the fluctuation is stopped, the cross key 96 alone may not have enough selection functions. For this reason, it is conceivable to use other buttons as well, or to use a button device that allows selection in more directions instead of the cross key 96, which has four directions (up, down, left, and right).
<<About the timer value that is the condition for transition to standby demo production>>

38. Next, regarding the above-mentioned standby demonstration performance, it is possible to consider the timer value that is a condition for transition to the standby demonstration performance. For example, the period (predetermined timer value) from the stop of fluctuation to the transition to standby demonstration production in a situation where there is no hold is changed from the above-mentioned menu screen for environment settings to the display (normal screen) when fluctuation is stopped. It is possible to set the timing as a starting point and the period (predetermined timer value) until transition to the standby demonstration performance to be the same.

Furthermore, if a specific condition is satisfied while the timer value is being incremented (or decremented), the timer value can be cleared. As the specific condition in this case, for example, a starting prize (a common symbol winning) related to a regular symbol can be exemplified. Furthermore, when the timer value is cleared, no change occurs on the performance display screen triggered by the timer clearing.

In addition, when the increment (or decrement) of the timer value related to the period from the stop of fluctuation to the transition to the standby demonstration performance in a situation where there is no hold reaches a predetermined value, the transition to the standby demonstration performance occurs, and while the standby demonstration performance is being executed, the above-mentioned Even if the specific conditions are met, the standby demonstration performance may not be interrupted.

Further, when a predetermined condition different from the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied, the timer value can be cleared, and a change on the effect display screen can be caused by clearing the timer. As the predetermined condition in this case, for example, a starting winning (special drawing winning) related to special drawing 1 or special drawing 2 can be exemplified. Further, as an example of a change on the screen, the start of a variable effect can be exemplified.

In addition, after the timer value has elapsed, after transitioning to the standby demonstration performance, if the above-mentioned predetermined conditions are satisfied during the standby demonstration performance, the demo movie can be interrupted during the standby demonstration performance. It is.
<Summary of Examples>

Various aspects of performance in the pachinko gaming machine 10 have been illustrated above, and these can be summarized as follows.
<Summary 1>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, when a game is played using a game medium (such as a game ball), symbols can be displayed in a variable manner as a performance related to the game, and then can be stopped and displayed, and the stopped and displayed symbols can be displayed in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can provide a profit to a player when the display mode is
A main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main commands, etc.) transmitted from the main control means;
Effect output means (effect display device, etc.) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means;
comprising operation means (operation buttons, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
It is possible to execute an operation performance that can display a performance triggered by a player's operation of the operation means,
There are two types of operation effects: a single operation effect that can accept a single player operation, and a continuous operation effect that can accept multiple player operations.
It is possible to display promotional effects (such as displaying button images) to encourage player operations;
When a plurality of player operations are performed in the continuous hit operation performance, a performance corresponding to the multiple player operations (such as a normal continuous hit performance, etc.) can be displayed;
Even if multiple player operations are not performed in the continuous hit operation performance, if a single player operation continues for a predetermined period of time or longer (such as a period exceeding 0.5 seconds), multiple game operations are performed. It is possible to display an effect (such as an automatic continuous hit effect) in response to a single player operation being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, in which it is assumed that a player operation has been performed;
The valid period of continuous press operations during which player operations can be accepted in the continuous press operation presentation is relatively longer than the single operation valid period (such as the valid period of button presses) during which it is possible to accept player operations in the single press operation presentation. long,
A first performance pattern (such as a front button performance) in which the promotion performance is displayed when executing the repeated tap operation performance, and a second performance pattern (such as a back button performance) in which the promotion performance is not displayed when the repeated tap operation performance is executed. and has
The continuous hit operation valid period during which player operations can be accepted in the continuous hit operation performance in the second performance pattern is the same as the continuous hit operation valid period during which it is possible to accept player operations in the continuous hit operation performance in the first performance pattern. relatively longer than
having a plurality of types of performance modes that are displayed when a plurality of player operations are performed in the continuous hit operation performance in the second performance pattern;
A predetermined effect that is displayed in parallel when the repeated-hit operation effect in the second effect pattern is executed (such as a display of a luminous image related to the continuous-hit effect), and a predetermined effect that is displayed after the predetermined effect is displayed. In some cases, there are specific performances (such as performances in the second half of SP reach),
Types (such as differences in color, etc.) of presentation modes (effect elements, etc.) that are displayed when a plurality of player operations are performed in the continuous hit operation presentation in the second presentation pattern when the predetermined presentation is displayed; ), the possibility that the specific effect will be displayed after the predetermined effect is displayed differs,
Within one symbol variation, it is possible to display the predetermined production, the specific production, and a preliminary production (such as the variation preview production) that may be displayed before the predetermined production,
There are multiple types of modes of the advance performance,
When the predetermined effect is displayed after the preliminary effect is displayed within one symbol change, the above-mentioned A tendency of which type of performance mode is displayed when a plurality of player operations are performed in the continuous hit operation performance in the second performance pattern when a predetermined performance is displayed. This gaming machine is characterized by having different characteristics.
<Summary 2>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, when a game is played using a game medium (such as a game ball), symbols can be displayed in a variable manner as a performance related to the game, and then can be stopped and displayed, and the stopped and displayed symbols can be displayed in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can provide a profit to a player when the display mode is
A main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main commands, etc.) transmitted from the main control means;
Effect output means (effect display device, etc.) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means;
comprising operation means (operation buttons, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
It is possible to execute an operation performance that can display a performance triggered by a player's operation of the operation means,
There are two types of operation effects: a single operation effect that can accept a single player operation, and a continuous operation effect that can accept multiple player operations.
It is possible to display promotional effects (such as displaying button images) to encourage player operations;
When a plurality of player operations are performed in the continuous hit operation performance, a performance corresponding to the multiple player operations (such as a normal continuous hit performance, etc.) can be displayed;
Even if multiple player operations are not performed in the continuous hit operation performance, if a single player operation continues for a predetermined period of time or longer (such as a period exceeding 0.5 seconds), multiple game operations are performed. It is possible to display an effect (such as an automatic continuous hit effect) in response to a single player operation being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, in which it is assumed that a player operation has been performed;
An error state occurs when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine, and the error state includes at least a first error state (such as a recoverable error state) and a second error state (such as an unrecoverable error state). ,
If the first error state occurs while a single player operation continues for more than a predetermined time in the continuous hit operation performance, the single player operation continues for a predetermined time period in the first error state. If the operation is continued for more than 0.5 seconds (for example, for a period exceeding 0.5 seconds), it is possible to display an effect corresponding to the single player operation being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more.
If a second error state occurs while a single player operation continues for a predetermined period of time or more in the continuous hit operation presentation, the single player operation continues for a predetermined period of time in the second error state. A game characterized in that even if the single operation by the player continues for a predetermined period of time or longer (for example, for a period exceeding 0.5 seconds), the effect corresponding to the single player operation is not displayed. It is a machine.
<Summary 3>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, when a game is played using a game medium (such as a game ball), symbols can be displayed in a variable manner as a performance related to the game, and then can be stopped and displayed, and the stopped and displayed symbols can be displayed in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can provide a profit to a player when the display mode is
A main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main commands, etc.) transmitted from the main control means;
Effect output means (effect display device, etc.) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means;
a production sound output means (such as a speaker) that outputs production sound under the control of the sub-control means;
a first operation means (operation button, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
a second operating means (cross key, etc.) that can be operated by the player and is different from the first operating means;
It is possible to execute an operation performance that can display a performance triggered by a player's operation of the first operation means,
The types of operation performances include a single operation performance that can accept a player's operation of the first operation means a single time, and a continuous hit operation performance that can accept a plurality of player operations of the first operation means,
It is possible to display a promotional effect (such as displaying a button image) for encouraging the player to operate the first operating means,
When the player operates the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hit operation performance, it is possible to display a performance (such as a normal continuous hit performance) corresponding to the player's operation of the first operating means a plurality of times. ,
Even if the player does not operate the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hit operation performance, the player operates the first operating means a single time for a predetermined period of time or longer (such as a time exceeding 0.5 seconds). If the player continues to operate the first operating means, it is considered that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times, and if a single player's operation of the first operating means continues for a predetermined period of time or more. It is possible to display effects depending on what is being done (such as automatic continuous hit effects),
The volume level of the performance sound can be adjusted in response to a player's operation of the second operation means,
When adjusting the volume level of the production sound, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to understand the current volume level of the production sound,
In the continuous hit operation performance, when a single player operation of the first operating means is performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, it is deemed that the player has operated the first operating means multiple times. , in a situation where a performance is being displayed in response to a single player operation of the first operation means being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, a performance triggered by the player's operation of the second operation means; The volume level of the sound can be adjusted, and the volume level display can be displayed in parallel with an effect corresponding to a single operation of the first operation means by the player that continues for a predetermined period of time or more. This is a gaming machine characterized by the following.
<Summary 4>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, when a game is played using a game medium (such as a game ball), symbols can be displayed in a variable manner as a performance related to the game, and then can be stopped and displayed, and the stopped and displayed symbols can be displayed in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can provide a profit to a player when the display mode is
A main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main commands, etc.) transmitted from the main control means;
Effect output means (effect display device, etc.) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means;
a production sound output means (such as a speaker) that outputs production sound under the control of the sub-control means;
a first operation means (operation button, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
a second operating means (cross key, etc.) that can be operated by the player and is different from the first operating means;
It is possible to execute an operation performance that can display a performance triggered by a player's operation of the first operation means,
The types of operation performances include a single operation performance that can accept a player's operation of the first operation means a single time, and a continuous hit operation performance that can accept a plurality of player operations of the first operation means,
It is possible to display a promotional effect (display of a button image, etc.) for encouraging the player to operate the first operating means,
When the player operates the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hit operation performance, it is possible to display a performance (such as a normal continuous hit performance) corresponding to the player's operation of the first operating means a plurality of times. ,
Even if the player does not operate the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hit operation performance, the player operates the first operating means a single time for a predetermined period of time or longer (such as a time exceeding 0.5 seconds). If the player continues to operate the first operating means, it is considered that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times, and if a single player's operation of the first operating means continues for a predetermined period of time or more. It is possible to display effects depending on what is being done (such as automatic continuous hit effects),
The volume level of the performance sound can be adjusted based on the player's operation of the second operation means,
When adjusting the volume level of the production sound, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to understand the current volume level of the production sound,
While the promotion effect displayed in a certain symbol variation is not continuously displayed across the next variation of the certain symbol variation,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the volume display displayed at a certain symbol variation can be continuously displayed over the next variation after the certain symbol variation.
<Summary 5>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, when a game is played using a game medium (such as a game ball), symbols can be displayed in a variable manner as a performance related to the game, and then can be stopped and displayed, and the stopped and displayed symbols can be displayed in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can provide a profit to a player when the display mode is
A main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main commands, etc.) transmitted from the main control means;
Effect output means (effect display device, etc.) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means;
a production sound output means (such as a speaker) that outputs production sound under the control of the sub-control means;
a first operation means (operation button, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
a second operating means (cross key, etc.) that can be operated by the player and is different from the first operating means;
It is possible to execute an operation performance that can display a performance triggered by a player's operation of the first operation means,
The types of operation performances include a single operation performance that can accept a player's operation of the first operation means a single time, and a continuous hit operation performance that can accept a plurality of player operations of the first operation means,
It is possible to display a promotional effect (such as displaying a button image) for encouraging the player to operate the first operating means,
When the player operates the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hit operation performance, it is possible to display a performance (such as a normal continuous hit performance) corresponding to the player's operation of the first operating means a plurality of times. ,
Even if the player does not operate the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hit operation performance, the player operates the first operating means a single time for a predetermined period of time or longer (such as a time exceeding 0.5 seconds). If the player continues to operate the first operating means, it is considered that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times, and if a single player's operation of the first operating means continues for a predetermined period of time or more. It is possible to display effects depending on what is being done (such as automatic continuous hit effects),
The volume level of the performance sound can be adjusted in response to a player's operation of the second operation means,
When adjusting the volume level of the production sound, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to understand the current volume level of the production sound,
In the continuous hit operation performance, when a single player operation of the first operating means is performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, it is deemed that the player has operated the first operating means multiple times. , in a situation where a performance is being displayed in response to a single player operation of the first operation means being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, a performance triggered by the player's operation of the second operation means; The volume level of the sound can be adjusted, and the volume level display can be displayed in parallel with an effect corresponding to a single operation of the first operation means by the player that continues for a predetermined period of time or more. and
If a power outage occurs and the power is subsequently restored from the power outage, the player started operating the second operating means during the power outage and continued the player's operation after the power outage returned. However, the gaming machine is characterized in that the volume level is not adjusted in response to the player's operation after the power is restored after the power is cut off.
<Summary 6>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, when a game is played using a game medium (such as a game ball), symbols can be displayed in a variable manner as a performance related to the game, and then can be stopped and displayed, and the stopped and displayed symbols can be displayed in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can provide a profit to a player when the display mode is
A main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main commands, etc.) transmitted from the main control means;
Effect output means (effect display device, etc.) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means;
a production sound output means (such as a speaker) that outputs production sound under the control of the sub-control means;
a first operation means (operation button, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
a second operating means (cross key, etc.) that can be operated by the player and is different from the first operating means;
It is possible to execute an operation performance that can display a performance triggered by a player's operation of the first operation means,
The types of operation performances include a single operation performance that can accept a player's operation of the first operation means a single time, and a continuous hit operation performance that can accept a plurality of player operations of the first operation means,
It is possible to display a promotional effect (such as displaying a button image) for encouraging the player to operate the first operating means,
When the player operates the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hit operation performance, it is possible to display a performance (such as a normal continuous hit performance) corresponding to the player's operation of the first operating means a plurality of times. ,
Even if the player does not operate the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hit operation performance, the player operates the first operating means a single time for a predetermined period of time or longer (such as a time exceeding 0.5 seconds). If the player continues to operate the first operating means, it is considered that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times, and if a single player's operation of the first operating means continues for a predetermined period of time or more. It is possible to display effects depending on what is being done (such as automatic continuous hit effects),
The volume level of the performance sound can be adjusted in response to a player's operation of the second operation means,
When adjusting the volume level of the production sound, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to understand the current volume level of the production sound,
In the continuous hit operation performance, when a single player operation of the first operating means is performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, it is deemed that the player has operated the first operating means multiple times. , in a situation where a performance is being displayed in response to a single player operation of the first operation means being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, a performance triggered by the player's operation of the second operation means; The volume level of the sound can be adjusted, and the volume level display can be displayed in parallel with an effect corresponding to a single operation of the first operation means by the player that continues for a predetermined period of time or more. and
Even if the player operates the second operating means a single time for a predetermined period of time or more, it is not considered that the player has operated the second operating means a plurality of times. It is a gaming machine.
<Summary 7>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, when a game is played using a game medium (such as a game ball), symbols can be displayed in a variable manner as a performance related to the game, and then can be stopped and displayed, and the stopped and displayed symbols can be displayed in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can provide a profit to a player when the display mode is
A main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main commands, etc.) transmitted from the main control means;
Effect output means (effect display device, etc.) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means;
comprising operation means (operation buttons, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
It is possible to execute an operation performance that can display a performance triggered by a player's operation of the operation means,
There are two types of operation effects: a single operation effect that can accept a single player operation, and a continuous operation effect that can accept multiple player operations.
It is possible to display promotional effects (such as displaying button images) to encourage player operations;
When a plurality of player operations are performed in the continuous hit operation performance, a performance corresponding to the multiple player operations (such as a normal continuous hit performance, etc.) can be displayed;
Even if multiple player operations are not performed in the continuous hit operation performance, if a single player operation continues for a predetermined period of time or longer (such as a period exceeding 0.5 seconds), multiple game operations are performed. It is possible to display an effect (such as an automatic continuous hit effect) in response to a single player operation being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, in which it is assumed that a player operation has been performed;
The valid period of continuous press operations during which player operations can be accepted in the continuous press operation presentation is relatively longer than the single operation valid period (such as the valid period of button presses) during which it is possible to accept player operations in the single press operation presentation. long,
A first performance pattern (such as a front button performance) in which the promotion performance is displayed when executing the repeated tap operation performance, and a second performance pattern (such as a back button performance) in which the promotion performance is not displayed when the repeated tap operation performance is executed. and has
The continuous hit operation valid period during which player operations can be accepted in the continuous hit operation performance in the second performance pattern is the same as the continuous hit operation valid period during which it is possible to accept player operations in the continuous hit operation performance in the first performance pattern. relatively longer than
having a plurality of types of performance modes that are displayed when a plurality of player operations are performed in the continuous hit operation performance in the second performance pattern;
A predetermined effect that is displayed in parallel when the repeated-hit operation effect in the second effect pattern is executed (such as a display of a luminous image related to the continuous-hit effect), and a predetermined effect that is displayed after the predetermined effect is displayed. In some cases, there are specific performances (such as performances in the second half of SP reach),
Types (such as differences in color, etc.) of presentation modes (effect elements, etc.) that are displayed when a plurality of player operations are performed in the continuous hit operation presentation in the second presentation pattern when the predetermined presentation is displayed; ), the possibility that the specific effect will be displayed after the predetermined effect is displayed differs,
Within one symbol variation, it is possible to display the predetermined production, the specific production, and a preliminary production (such as the variation preview production) that may be displayed before the predetermined production,
There are multiple types of modes of the advance performance,
When the predetermined effect is displayed after the preliminary effect is displayed within one symbol change, the above-mentioned A tendency of which type of performance mode is displayed when a plurality of player operations are performed in the continuous hit operation performance in the second performance pattern when a predetermined performance is displayed. are different,
A single player operation continues for a predetermined period of time or longer (such as a time exceeding 0.5 seconds) within a valid period of continuous play operations during which player operations can be accepted in the continuous play operation performance in the first performance pattern. Even in the case where the player's operation of the first operation means has been performed a single time since before the start of the valid period of the continuous operation, the player's operation has been performed multiple times. It is a gaming machine that is characterized by not being regarded as an object.
<Summary 8>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, when a game is played using a game medium (such as a game ball), symbols can be displayed in a variable manner as a performance related to the game, and then can be stopped and displayed, and the stopped and displayed symbols can be displayed in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can provide a profit to a player when the display mode is
A main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main commands, etc.) transmitted from the main control means;
Effect output means (effect display device, etc.) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means;
comprising operation means (operation buttons, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
It is possible to execute an operation performance that can display a performance triggered by a player's operation of the operation means,
There are two types of operation effects: a single operation effect that can accept a single player operation, and a continuous operation effect that can accept multiple player operations.
It is possible to display promotional effects (such as displaying button images) to encourage player operations;
When a plurality of player operations are performed in the continuous hit operation performance, a performance corresponding to the multiple player operations (such as a normal continuous hit performance, etc.) can be displayed;
Even if multiple player operations are not performed in the continuous hit operation performance, if a single player operation continues for a predetermined period of time or longer (such as a period exceeding 0.5 seconds), multiple game operations are performed. It is possible to display an effect (such as an automatic continuous hit effect) in response to a single player operation being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, in which it is assumed that a player operation has been performed;
An error state occurs when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine, and the error state includes at least a first error state (such as a recoverable error state) and a second error state (such as an unrecoverable error state). ,
If the first error state occurs while a single player operation continues for more than a predetermined time in the continuous hit operation performance, the single player operation continues for a predetermined time period in the first error state. If the operation is continued for more than 0.5 seconds (for example, for a period exceeding 0.5 seconds), it is possible to display an effect corresponding to the single player operation being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more.
If a second error state occurs while a single player operation continues for a predetermined period of time or more in the continuous hit operation presentation, the single player operation continues for a predetermined period of time in the second error state. Even if the operation is continued for a period longer than 0.5 seconds (for example, for a period exceeding 0.5 seconds), the effect corresponding to the single player operation being performed for a predetermined period of time or longer will not be displayed.
There are multiple types of modes of the continuous hit operation performance,
A first game state (any one of non-electric support state, electric support state, jackpot state (during jackpot), etc.) and a second game state (non-electric support state, electric support state) with different ease of transition to special games. , a jackpot state (during jackpot) that is different from the first gaming state, etc.),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the number of types of the continuous hit operation performance is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
<Summary 9>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, when a game is played using a game medium (such as a game ball), symbols can be displayed in a variable manner as a performance related to the game, and then can be stopped and displayed, and the stopped and displayed symbols can be displayed in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can provide a profit to a player when the display mode is
A main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main commands, etc.) transmitted from the main control means;
Effect output means (effect display device, etc.) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means;
a production sound output means (such as a speaker) that outputs production sound under the control of the sub-control means;
a first operation means (operation button, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
a second operating means (cross key, etc.) that can be operated by the player and is different from the first operating means;
It is possible to execute an operation performance that can display a performance triggered by a player's operation of the first operation means,
The types of operation performances include a single operation performance that can accept a player's operation of the first operation means a single time, and a continuous hit operation performance that can accept a plurality of player operations of the first operation means,
It is possible to display a promotional effect (such as displaying a button image) for encouraging the player to operate the first operating means,
When the player operates the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hit operation performance, it is possible to display a performance (such as a normal continuous hit performance) corresponding to the player's operation of the first operating means a plurality of times. ,
Even if the player does not operate the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hit operation performance, the player operates the first operating means a single time for a predetermined period of time or longer (such as a time exceeding 0.5 seconds). If the player continues to operate the first operating means, it is considered that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times, and if a single player's operation of the first operating means continues for a predetermined period of time or more. It is possible to display effects depending on what is being done (such as automatic continuous hit effects),
The volume level of the performance sound can be adjusted in response to a player's operation of the second operation means,
When adjusting the volume level of the production sound, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to understand the current volume level of the production sound,
In the continuous hit operation performance, when a single player operation of the first operating means is performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, it is deemed that the player has operated the first operating means multiple times. , in a situation where a performance is being displayed in response to a single player operation of the first operation means being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, a performance triggered by the player's operation of the second operation means; The volume level of the sound can be adjusted, and the volume level display can be displayed in parallel with an effect corresponding to a single operation of the first operation means by the player that continues for a predetermined period of time or more. and
A single player operation continues for a predetermined period of time or longer (such as a time exceeding 0.5 seconds) within a valid period of continuous play operations during which player operations can be accepted in the continuous play operation performance in the first performance pattern. Even in the case where the player's operation of the first operation means has been performed a single time since before the start of the valid period of the continuous operation, the player's operation has been performed multiple times. Not considered a thing,
An error state occurs when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine, and the error state includes multiple types of error states (first error state, second error state, etc.),
At least in a specific error state among the plurality of types of error states, a specific error notification sound can be output to notify that the specific error state is present;
The specific error notification sound is characterized in that it is output at a predetermined volume (such as a volume adjusted by a volume adjustment means behind the game machine), regardless of the content of adjustment of the current volume level of the performance sound. It is a gaming machine.
<Summary 10>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, when a game is played using a game medium (such as a game ball), symbols can be displayed in a variable manner as a performance related to the game, and then can be stopped and displayed, and the stopped and displayed symbols can be displayed in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can provide a profit to a player when the display mode is
A main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main commands, etc.) transmitted from the main control means;
Effect output means (effect display device, etc.) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means;
a production sound output means (such as a speaker) that outputs production sound under the control of the sub-control means;
a first operation means (operation button, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
a second operating means (cross key, etc.) that can be operated by the player and is different from the first operating means;
It is possible to execute an operation performance that can display a performance triggered by a player's operation of the first operation means,
The types of operation performances include a single operation performance that can accept a player's operation of the first operation means a single time, and a continuous hit operation performance that can accept a plurality of player operations of the first operation means,
It is possible to display a promotional effect (such as displaying a button image) for encouraging the player to operate the first operating means,
When the player operates the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hit operation performance, it is possible to display a performance (such as a normal continuous hit performance) corresponding to the player's operation of the first operating means a plurality of times. ,
Even if the player does not operate the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hit operation performance, the player operates the first operating means a single time for a predetermined period of time or longer (such as a time exceeding 0.5 seconds). If the player continues to operate the first operating means, it is considered that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times, and if a single player's operation of the first operating means continues for a predetermined period of time or more. It is possible to display effects depending on what is being done (such as automatic continuous hit effects),
The volume level of the performance sound can be adjusted in response to a player's operation of the second operation means,
When adjusting the volume level of the production sound, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to understand the current volume level of the production sound,
While the promotion effect displayed in a certain symbol variation is not continuously displayed across the next variation of the certain symbol variation,
The volume display displayed at a certain symbol variation can be continuously displayed over the next variation of the certain symbol variation,
comprising a third operating means (such as a gaming machine back volume adjusting means) that is an operating means different from the first operating means and the second operating means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the volume level of the performance sound can be adjusted not only by the second operating means but also by the third operating means.
<Summary 11>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, when a game is played using a game medium (such as a game ball), symbols can be displayed in a variable manner as a performance related to the game, and then can be stopped and displayed, and the stopped and displayed symbols can be displayed in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can provide a profit to a player when the display mode is
A main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main commands, etc.) transmitted from the main control means;
Effect output means (effect display device, etc.) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means;
a production sound output means (such as a speaker) that outputs production sound under the control of the sub-control means;
a first operation means (operation button, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
a second operating means (cross key, etc.) that can be operated by the player and is different from the first operating means;
It is possible to execute an operation performance that can display a performance triggered by a player's operation of the first operation means,
The types of operation performances include a single operation performance that can accept a player's operation of the first operation means a single time, and a continuous hit operation performance that can accept a plurality of player operations of the first operation means,
It is possible to display a promotional effect (such as displaying a button image) for encouraging the player to operate the first operating means,
When the player operates the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hit operation performance, it is possible to display a performance (such as a normal continuous hit performance) corresponding to the player's operation of the first operating means a plurality of times. ,
Even if the player does not operate the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hit operation performance, the player operates the first operating means a single time for a predetermined period of time or longer (such as a time exceeding 0.5 seconds). If the player continues to operate the first operating means, it is considered that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times, and if a single player's operation of the first operating means continues for a predetermined period of time or more. It is possible to display effects depending on what is being done (such as automatic continuous hit effects),
The volume level of the performance sound can be adjusted in response to a player's operation of the second operation means,
When adjusting the volume level of the production sound, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to understand the current volume level of the production sound,
In the continuous hit operation performance, when a single player operation of the first operating means is performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, it is deemed that the player has operated the first operating means multiple times. , in a situation where a performance is being displayed in response to a single player operation of the first operation means being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, a performance triggered by the player's operation of the second operation means; The volume level of the sound can be adjusted, and the volume level display can be displayed in parallel with an effect corresponding to a single operation of the first operation means by the player that continues for a predetermined period of time or more. and
If a power outage occurs and the power is subsequently restored from the power outage, the player started operating the second operating means during the power outage and continued the player's operation after the power outage returned. However, the volume level will not be adjusted based on the player's operation after the power is restored after the power outage.
comprising a third operating means (such as a gaming machine back volume adjusting means) that is an operating means different from the first operating means and the second operating means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the volume of the performance sound can be adjusted not only by the second operating means but also by the third operating means.
<Summary 12>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, when a game is played using a game medium (such as a game ball), symbols can be displayed in a variable manner as a performance related to the game, and then can be stopped and displayed, and the stopped and displayed symbols can be displayed in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can provide a profit to a player when the display mode is
A main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main commands, etc.) transmitted from the main control means;
Effect output means (effect display device, etc.) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means;
a production sound output means (such as a speaker) that outputs production sound under the control of the sub-control means;
a first operation means (operation button, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
a second operating means (cross key, etc.) that can be operated by the player and is different from the first operating means;
It is possible to execute an operation performance that can display a performance triggered by a player's operation of the first operation means,
The types of operation performances include a single operation performance that can accept a player's operation of the first operation means a single time, and a continuous hit operation performance that can accept a plurality of player operations of the first operation means,
It is possible to display a promotional effect (such as displaying a button image) for encouraging the player to operate the first operating means,
When the player operates the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hit operation performance, it is possible to display a performance (such as a normal continuous hit performance) corresponding to the player's operation of the first operating means a plurality of times. ,
Even if the player does not operate the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hit operation performance, the player operates the first operating means a single time for a predetermined period of time or longer (such as a time exceeding 0.5 seconds). If the player continues to operate the first operating means, it is considered that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times, and if a single player's operation of the first operating means continues for a predetermined period of time or more. It is possible to display effects depending on what is being done (such as automatic continuous hit effects),
The volume level of the performance sound can be adjusted in response to a player's operation of the second operation means,
When adjusting the volume level of the production sound, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to understand the current volume level of the production sound,
In the continuous hit operation performance, when a single player operation of the first operating means is performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, it is deemed that the player has operated the first operating means multiple times. , in a situation where a performance is being displayed in response to a single player operation of the first operation means being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, a performance triggered by the player's operation of the second operation means; The volume level of the sound can be adjusted, and the volume level display can be displayed in parallel with an effect corresponding to a single operation of the first operation means by the player that continues for a predetermined period of time or more. and
Even if the player operates the second operating means a single time for a predetermined period of time or more, it is not considered that the player has operated the second operating means multiple times;
If a certain period of time passes without a new symbol change after the symbols stop, a predetermined standby demonstration effect can be displayed.
While the predetermined standby demonstration performance is displayed, the volume of the performance sound is reduced or the performance sound is muted (silent, etc.) compared to when the symbol is changing,
Displaying the predetermined standby demonstration effect even when the predetermined standby demonstration effect is being displayed and the volume of the effect sound is reduced or muted compared to when the symbols are changing. The volume level of the performance sound can be adjusted in response to a player's operation of the second operating means while maintaining the above, and the volume level display is also displayed in parallel while maintaining the display of the predetermined standby demonstration performance. This gaming machine is characterized by being able to
<Other embodiments>

Note that the present invention is not limited to the various embodiments described above, and can be modified in various ways. For example, in the explanations so far, we have avoided adding point-by-point supplements so as not to make the explanation redundant, but unless there is a problem with application, matters related to volume adjustment effects may be applied to light intensity adjustment effects, or matters related to automatic continuous hit effects may be applied. It is possible to apply the matters to the performance during normal continuous hits. Furthermore, unless there is a particular problem, it is possible to combine various performances such as volume adjustment performance, light intensity adjustment performance, right-hitting performance, standby demonstration performance, etc., centering on the automatic continuous hit performance. Moreover, this also applies to various embodiments regarding front button effects and back button effects, unless there is any particular problem.

Furthermore, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies, for example, a relatively large display body (herein referred to as the "first effect display device") may be placed on standby. While displaying a demonstration effect, display a display related to environmental settings (setting volume adjustment effect, light intensity adjustment effect, etc.) on the other small display body (herein referred to as "second effect display device"). , etc. is also possible. In this case, since the situation is such that a standby demonstration performance is displayed, it is possible to not perform a hold display.

Furthermore, a display related to environment settings may be constantly displayed on the second effect display device. Further, during symbol fluctuation, it is also possible to display a hold display on the second performance display device together with a display related to environment settings. It is also possible to constantly display both the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect on the second effect display device.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide a plurality of second effect display devices and display volume adjustment effects and light amount adjustment effects related to environment settings on separate second effect display devices. It is also possible to perform the volume adjustment performance and the light amount adjustment performance on one second performance display device, and perform other displays (such as a preview performance) on the other second performance display device.

Furthermore, during the fluctuation, it is possible to display the effect pattern (decorative pattern) 190 on the first effect display device and to display the environment setting on the second effect display device. By doing so, it becomes possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the display that is highly important for the progress of the game.

Furthermore, it is possible to employ the display of the number of game balls as an item that can be changed by the player's own operation. For example, in a pachinko game machine 10 that displays the number of game balls acquired by a player on a performance display device 60 during a special game, the meaning indicated by the number of game balls displayed can be selected. Then, by operating the cross key 96 or the operation button 22, the player can determine whether the number of game balls displayed is the number of game balls (total number) paid out by winning the prize in the grand prize opening. It is now possible to change whether the number of game balls increased during the special game (subtraction number) is calculated by subtracting the number of game balls fired by the player during the special game from the number of game balls paid out by winning in the mouth. do.

The times when decisions regarding such selectable items can be made include the time when the environment can be set, the start of a jackpot, during a jackpot, during a specific symbol change (for example, during a symbol change in a time-reduced gaming state), when the change is stopped, etc. Various periods can be mentioned. Further, the person who can make decisions regarding the selectable items is not limited to the player, but may also be a game hall manager (such as a game hall clerk). Alternatively, both the player and the administrator may be able to make the decision.

Furthermore, the gaming machine is not limited to the Pachinko gaming machine as described above. For example, the present invention provides a pachinko gaming machine that directly pays out game balls as game media that a player has won to the player, so that the player can touch the prize balls. For example, the present invention is not limited to, and can also be applied to, for example, an enclosed circulation-type pachinko game machine (managed game machine) in which game balls are circulated inside the game machine. Furthermore, an example of an enclosed circulation type pachinko game machine is one in which the entry and exit of game media can be electromagnetically recorded.

Furthermore, the present invention is provided with a plurality of reels on which a predetermined number of symbols are arranged, and controls the start and stop of rotation of the reels based on the player's operations, and the game medals etc. are distributed according to the winning winning combination. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine (a reel-type gaming machine) that pays out media (including storing it in a storage device). When the present invention is applied to a slot machine, instead of detecting the handle operation, it is possible to detect the operation of a bet button that may be operated by a player when setting a bet, or the operation of a bet button that may be operated by a player when setting a bet. Based on the detection of the insertion of game medals, it is possible to apply performance output according to the state of the game machine. Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to, for example, casino machines installed in casino facilities.
<Other additional considerations>

Furthermore, the inventor considered other matters (additional considerations) regarding the various button effects as described above. Below, these additional considerations will be explained in turn. In addition, each additional consideration described here may be applied in an appropriate form, including each of the embodiments and modifications described so far, each additional consideration, and technical matters within each additional consideration, unless there is a particular problem. It is possible to combine. In addition, in the following explanation, regarding the probability level, percentage level, frequency level (easiness of execution), etc. regarding execution and display of effects, a relatively high value is 100%, and a relatively low value is 0%. It is possible to consider including This also applies to the probabilities, proportions, frequencies (easiness of execution), etc. regarding the execution and display of the various effects described above.
<<Additional considerations 1 (Increasing the diversity of productions related to the type of automatic continuous hit production 1)>>

First, regarding the auto-repeat-hit function, which is an automatic repeated-hit function, consider providing a plurality of types of auto-repeat effects and expanding the variety of effects by linking them to the types of auto-repeat effects.

Regarding the provision of multiple types of auto-repeat effects, in the previous section <<Various aspects related to back button effects>> (paragraphs 0520 to 0525 of the specification of this application), auto-repeat effect A and auto-repeat effect as back button effects are described. An example has been described in which effect B is provided and the blinking cycles of the effects are made different from each other (paragraph 0523 of this specification, etc.). Furthermore, an example in which the blinking cycles of the effects are made to be different from each other has been similarly explained for the automatic continuous press effect C and the automatic continuous press effect D as front button effects (paragraph 0523 of this specification, etc.).

In addition, in the section ``Relationship between the automatic continuous hit performance as a back button performance and subsequent performances'' (paragraphs 0505 to 0519 of the specification of this application) explained in addition, regarding a series of reach performances, from normal reach to the first half of SP reach, In the first half of this SP reach, an "auto continuous hit effect as a back button effect" is executed, and furthermore, it is possible to develop from the first half of SP reach to the second half of SP reach. paragraph 0511 etc.).

It has also been explained that when a plurality of types of automatic continuous hit performances are provided, the jackpot expectation level for subsequent performances is varied depending on the mode of the automatic continuous hit performance (paragraph 0517 of this specification, etc.). Furthermore, it is also explained that the term "SP reach second half performance" refers to the latter part of the SP reach when considering the first half and the second half based on the predetermined timing and performance situation. (such as paragraph 0519 of this specification).

Here, we will introduce automatic continuous hit performance as a back button performance in the first half of SP reach, automatic continuous hit performance as front button performance in the second half of SP reach, and performance control that relates jackpot expectations for the performance after automatic continuous hit performance. I will explain about it. In addition, in order to distinguish it from the above-mentioned automatic repeated hits A to D, the automatic repeated hit performance as the back button performance will be referred to as "auto repeated hit performance A1" or "fifth auto repeated hit performance", etc., and the auto repeated hit performance as the front button performance will be referred to as The continuous hit effect will be referred to as "auto continuous hit effect C1", "sixth automatic continuous hit effect", etc. Furthermore, regarding these repeated hits (auto repeated hits), as previously explained in paragraphs 0481 and 0482, it is possible to perform not only automatic repeated hits but also normal repeated hits, and it is possible to perform continuous hits with automatic repeated hits or normal repeated hits. A performance occurs. A continuous hit performance is a performance that can be generated by automatic continuous hits or normal continuous hits (a performance when repeated hits are being performed), and whether it is an automatic continuous hit performance or a normal continuous hit performance, it is a common performance during continuous hits. It should be noted that the effect can be executed (in other words, the effect content and effect candidates generated by repeated attacks are the same whether it is an automatic continuous attack or a normal continuous attack). Note that since the "performance during continuous hits" is a production based on continuous hits, it may also be referred to as "performance triggered by repeated hits" or "performance based on repeated hits."

First, the fluctuation effect related to one fluctuation is divided into automatic continuous hit effect A1 as a ``back button effect'' in the ``first half of SP reach'' and automatic continuous hit effect C1 as a ``front button effect'' in the ``second half of SP reach''. One or both of these may be performed.

The above-mentioned "SP reach first half" and "SP reach second half" express SP reach by dividing it into the first half and the second half based on the predetermined timing and performance situation, as in the previous explanation. Regarding the "first half of SP reach" and "second half of SP reach", for example, the point at which the progress of the production shifts (branches) to one of the multiple types of production that may appear at that point ( It is also possible to refer to the period before the branching point as the "first half of SP reach" and the period after it as "second half of SP reach." Regarding the first half of SP reach and the second half of SP reach, for example, "first half of SP reach" is SP reach for a predetermined time (about 30 seconds, etc.), and the expectation of a jackpot is relatively lower than "second half of SP reach", This is a performance in which players expect to move on to the "second half of SP reach" rather than hoping to be notified of jackpot wins during the "first half of SP reach", and "second half of SP reach" is the same as "first half of SP reach". It is a reach effect with a longer predetermined time (about 60 seconds, etc.) than the above-mentioned predetermined time (about 30 seconds, etc.), and the expectation of a jackpot is relatively higher than the "first half of SP reach", and the player can win the jackpot. It can be assumed that the performance is such that the user expects to be informed of the following.

Furthermore, the "first half of SP reach" and "second half of SP reach" can also be expressed as "first half of SP reach" passing through a branch point to "second half of SP reach" (or transitioning).

Furthermore, the branching point can be considered to be included in either the "first half of SP reach" or the "second half of SP reach". Furthermore, transitioning to one of the effects at a branching point can be referred to as a "performance branch." Then, the turning point where the player can transition to either a performance that is relatively advantageous to a performance that is relatively disadvantageous to the player is determined as a "win/loss branch" related to winning (jackpot) or losing (missing). It is also possible to call it. In addition, the jackpot patterns when it develops into SP reach are (1) a pattern in which the winning is announced in the "first half of SP reach" without transitioning from "first half of SP reach" to "second half of SP reach", (2) " A pattern in which winnings are announced in the "second half of SP reach" after transitioning from "first half of SP reach" to "second half of SP reach", and (3) "first half of SP reach" does not occur and suddenly develops into "second half of SP reach". There is a pattern that announces the winning in the "second half of SP reach", and (1) is a rare effect pattern that has a lower probability of being selected than (2) and (3). In addition, the jackpot patterns when it develops into SP reach are (4) a pattern in which the failure is announced in the "first half of SP reach" without transitioning from "first half of SP reach" to "second half of SP reach", (5) " A pattern of transitioning from "first half of SP reach" to "second half of SP reach" and then announcing failure in "second half of SP reach", (6) "first half of SP reach" does not occur and suddenly develops to "second half of SP reach" There is a pattern in which a failure is announced in the "second half of SP reach", and (5) and (6) are performance patterns that have a relatively low probability of being selected compared to (4).

In addition, the "SP reach first half" performance and the "SP reach second half" performance do not necessarily need to both be included in one fluctuation (during one fluctuation performance). Then, at least one of the "first half of SP reach" performance and the "second half of SP reach" performance may be executed over a plurality of variations. In such a case, at least in the "first half of SP reach" performance, it is conceivable to use a loss variation in which the result of the lottery is a loss.

Furthermore, even when multiple fluctuations are used for the "first half of SP reach" or "second half of SP reach", the above-mentioned branching point (point of execution of the production branch) will be used for the "first half of SP reach" and the "second half of SP reach". , it is possible to include it in either one of the "SP Reach Second Half" performances.

It is also conceivable to use one variation (or multiple variations) for a performance that represents a performance branch. In this case, at least one variation will be used for the "first half of SP reach" performance, the performance indicating branching of the performance, and the "second half of SP reach" performance. From the "first half of SP Reach" to the "second half of SP Reach", at least three variations are used, including the variation where the production branching is performed (the variation for the production branch). It will be done.

Based on the above, in one embodiment of this Additional Consideration 1, each of the above-mentioned auto continuous hit effect A1 (SP reach first half, back button effect) and auto continuous hit effect C1 (SP reach second half, front button effect). Regarding the effective period of operation (auto continuous hit effective period), the relationship between the effective period of each operation is determined so that the effective period of operation (auto continuous hit effective period) is longer for auto continuous hit performance A1 than for automatic continuous hit performance C1. . As a specific example, for example, the operation valid period (auto continuous hit valid period) in the automatic repeated hit effect A1 is a period that starts 1 second after the first half of the SP reach starts and ends 9 seconds before the end of the first half of the SP reach is 20 seconds, and the operation valid period (auto multiple hit valid period) in the automatic repeated hit performance C1 is a period that starts 30 seconds after the second half of SP reach starts and ends 10 seconds before the end of the second half of SP reach 5 seconds, and so on. By doing this, it becomes possible to effectively utilize the back button performance in the first half of SP reach. In addition, as a modified example, in the second half of SP reach, a single operation performance may be performed instead of the automatic continuous hit performance, or there is no need to provide a button performance in the second half of SP reach.

Here, the automatic repeated press valid period is basically determined to coincide with the button operation valid period (paragraph 0470 of this specification, FIG. 28(a), FIG. 29(a), (b), FIG. 30(a), etc.). However, depending on the situation, the auto continuous hit valid period may be shorter than the button operation valid period (FIG. 28(b), FIG. 30(b), etc.).

Furthermore, in this additional consideration 1, each automatic continuous hit effect (A1, C1) is a continuous play effect in which a random value is assigned so as to result in a jackpot at a rate close to 100% (here, for convenience, the ``jackpot confirmed mode'') However, it may also be referred to as the "display mode with the highest probability of winning a jackpot," or the "final display mode" as described later, since the display mode does not change any further. It is conceivable to include a continuous hit effect (which may also be referred to as a continuous hit effect). In other words, in any of the auto continuous hit effects (A1, C1), the placement (number) of the corresponding random numbers is determined so that the jackpot expectation level is almost 100%. Although this is a ``repeat-hitting presentation with a guaranteed jackpot,'' it may also be called a ``repeat-hitting presentation'' that is a ``displaying mode with the highest expectation of a jackpot.'' Since the display mode does not change any further, the following will be explained later. It is conceivable to have a "final display mode" (which may also be referred to as a continuous hit effect). In addition, as a modified example, each of the auto continuous hit effects (A1, C1) may be configured to include a continuous play effect to which a random number value is assigned so as to result in a jackpot at a rate of 100%.

Also, for example, in the auto continuous hit effect A1 (SP reach first half, back button effect), as a continuous hit effect that confirms the jackpot, a predetermined image object in the performance image lights up in rainbow colors (rainbow light emission). executed. More specifically, with regard to the automatic repeated press effect A1, as the automatic repeated press progresses in a situation where no button image is displayed (as the effect representing one press is repeated), the continuous press effect related to the automatic repeated press effect is changed. The coloring of the effect display is white (first effect display) → blue (next stage effect display, jackpot expectation 1%) → yellow (jackpot expectation 5%) → green (jackpot expectation 15%) → Red (Jackpot expectation 35%) → Rainbow color (Jackpot expectation 100%) This is a production that has the possibility of changing (so-called rising), and in the fluctuating display that becomes a jackpot, it will emit a rainbow color (rainbow emission) Examples include those that are configured in such a way that they may On the other hand, in automatic continuous hit performance C1 (SP reach second half, front button performance), as a continuous hit performance with a guaranteed jackpot, a performance in which a predetermined character fights against many enemies and defeats all enemies (enemy An example of this would be to stage a performance of annihilation.

In addition, in this additional consideration 1, regarding the execution ratio of the continuous hit performance in the jackpot confirmation mode in both automatic continuous hit performances (A1, C1), the mutual relationship is determined as follows. For example, in a fluctuating display that results in a jackpot, the execution rate of the continuous hit performance with a jackpot confirmation mode in auto continuous hit performance A1 (SP reach first half, back button performance) is the same as the execution rate of the continuous hit performance in automatic continuous hit performance C1 (SP reach second half, front button performance). Make it relatively low (lower, less) than the execution rate of the continuous hit performance in the confirmed mode. Conversely, the execution ratio of the performance during continuous hits in the automatic continuous hit performance C1 (second half of SP reach, front button performance) is the same as the execution rate of the performance during continuous hits in the automatic continuous hit performance A1 (first half of SP reach, back button performance). It is relatively high (larger, more) than the execution rate of . As a specific example, in the fluctuating display that results in a jackpot, the execution ratio of the continuous-hit performance in the jackpot confirmed mode in auto continuous hit production A1 (SP reach first half, back button production) is 20% (the remaining 80% is the jackpot confirmed mode) The execution rate of the continuous hit performance with the jackpot confirmed mode is 90% (the remaining 10% is during the continuous hit mode with the jackpot confirmed mode) in the auto continuous hit production C1 (SP reach second half, front button display). (This is not a performance.) In addition, in the fluctuating display that results in a jackpot, if the continuous hit performance of the jackpot confirmation mode is not executed in the automatic repeated hit performance C1 (second half of SP reach, front button performance), 3% of the remaining 10% will be displayed in the second half of SP reach. In addition, 2% of the remaining 10% will be announced by SP. After the false loss is announced in the second half of the reach and the second half of the SP reach ends, the winning is announced by displaying the words "Actually... jackpot!" on the screen (in other words, the jackpot is confirmed) The effect is not executed during consecutive hits, and even though the winning was not announced in the second half of SP reach, the winning was announced afterwards, making it even more surprising.) Here, the execution rate of the continuous hit performance in the jackpot confirmation mode of automatic continuous hit performance A1 (SP reach first half, back button performance) in the variable display that becomes a jackpot, and the jackpot of automatic continuous hit performance C1 (SP reach second half, front button performance) The execution rate of the continuous hit effect in the confirmed mode is the rate when consecutive hits are performed at least a predetermined number of times during each operation valid period (auto continuous hit valid period) (for example, 50 times for automatic continuous hit effect A1). , in the case of auto continuous hit effect C1, this is the rate when 10 times are performed).

In addition, in any of the automatic repeated hit effects (A1, C1), if the jackpot is confirmed, there will be an unexpected effect (``Unexpected... (which may also be referred to as ``sexual presentation'' or ``special presentation'') will not occur. Therefore, when a jackpot is confirmed in the auto continuous hit performance (A1, C1), the surprise effect is better than when the automatic continuous hit performance (A1, C1) does not result in a confirmed jackpot and then a surprising performance occurs. Since it is not executed, you will (honestly) hit the jackpot in a short time (in other words, the fluctuation time will be shortened). Furthermore, in addition to displaying the text "Actually...a jackpot!" as mentioned above, there are other unexpected effects, such as when a character is on the verge of being defeated by an enemy, but then comes back to life after some kind of trigger. However, it may also be a performance in which the player regains his courage. In addition, depending on the type of SP Reach (any of SP Reach second half performances A to C), the production mode (characters and story) of SP Reach differs, and the production when announcing a win and the production when announcing a loss may differ. Although different, the surprise effect is a common effect regardless of the type of SP reach (any of SP reach second half effects A to C) in which the false defeat was announced. As a modified example, it is possible to consider a presentation mode in which the player always wins the battle after the unexpected presentation, or a presentation mode in which the battle is finally defeated after the unexpected presentation. In addition, it is better for players to be notified of winnings via surprise effects than to be notified of wins without going through surprise effects (wins are announced in the latter half of SP reach). It is structured so that there are many cases of advantageous jackpots (jackpots with variable probability, jackpots with a large number of rounds).

According to the embodiment of the invention related to Additional Consideration Item 1 as described above, it is possible to vary the tendency of the performance during continuous hits (performance change tendency) that changes sequentially depending on the type of automatic continuous hit performance. Then, by forming special conditions such as the type of automatic repeated hit performance, and by associating various game elements such as operation validity period and presentation of jackpot confirmation mode, it is possible to create differences in performance trends. .

With this, it is possible to diversify the development of subsequent effects regarding multiple types of automatic continuous hit effects, and it is possible to effectively utilize the button functions. In addition, button functions can be further optimized, and new and diverse game features can be created.

For this reason, it is possible to have a variety of performance changes instead of uniform performance changes, and the final performance content (such as a jackpot performance) that corresponds to the performance after the change (post-change performance). By leading (transitioning) to (such as a winning performance), the performance will basically not feel strange, but in some rare situations (situations where the performance is performed in a manner that guarantees a jackpot), it may be unexpected. It can lead to (transition to) a production (production of enemy annihilation). Then, while diversifying the button presentation itself, it is possible to provide a certain degree of appropriate diversity without making the flow of the accompanying presentation unnecessarily complicated.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the performance (for example, rainbow light emission) of the jackpot confirmation mode related to the automatic continuous hit performance A1 was explained. However, the automatic continuous hit performance A1 is a performance that can be executed before the automatic continuous hit performance C1, and theoretically, the execution rate of the performance of the jackpot confirmation mode related to the automatic continuous hit performance A1 is the same as the execution rate of the performance in the jackpot confirmation mode related to the automatic continuous hit performance C1. It is determined by the product of the mode and the performance execution rate.

As for the execution rate of the jackpot confirmation mode of automatic continuous hit production A1, since it is affected by the execution rate of the jackpot confirmation mode of automatic continuous hit production C1, the jackpot expectation level is set to be almost 100%. It may also be difficult to design. Therefore, the invention is not defined by comparing the jackpot confirmation modes of both auto continuous hit effects (A1, C1), but by comparing, for example, the final display mode of auto continuous play effect A1 and the jackpot confirmation mode of auto continuous play effect C1. , may define the invention.

For example, auto continuous hit effect A1 (SP reach first half, back button effect) is unlikely to be the final display mode, but auto continuous hit effect C1 (SP reach second half, front button effect) is likely to become a jackpot confirmation mode effect. It is possible to predetermine the relationship between the execution ratio of performances with a high expectation level (the degree to which the player can expect a favorable gaming state) in both automatic consecutive hit performances (A1, C1). . Although the performance in the final display mode related to the auto continuous hit performance A1 cannot be said to be a guaranteed jackpot, it can be said that it is a performance that can be expected to develop in subsequent performances.

To give a more specific example, for example, regarding the automatic repeated hit effect A1, the back button effect in the first half of SP reach is a performance that suggests the degree of development expected in the second half of SP reach, and the automatic repeated hit is performed in a situation where no button image is displayed. As the progress progresses (as the effect representing a single press is repeated), the coloring of the effect display, which is a continuous press effect related to the automatic continuous press effect, changes from white (first effect display) to blue (next stage effect). display) → yellow (low expectations for development in the second half of SP reach) → green (medium expectations for development in the second half of SP reach) → red (definite development in the second half of SP reach) Make it so. However, in this automatic continuous hit performance A1, it is preferable that there be no changes to the effect display, such as rainbow lighting or predetermined patterns, that can be recognized by many players as a performance that guarantees a jackpot. . Furthermore, the fact that expectations for development in the second half of SP Reach are high means that there is a higher possibility that a highly anticipated production will be executed than in the first half of SP Reach. I would like to add that the coloring of the effect display, which is a performance during repeated hits, can be said to indicate the expectation of a jackpot. In addition, as a modification of the multi-hit performance in the automatic multi-hit performance A1 in the case of this configuration, a change to an effect display such as rainbow lighting or a predetermined pattern may be suitable, and in that case, even if the jackpot is confirmed. Good (the role may be to notify the winner).

On the other hand, regarding the automatic repeated hit effect C1, for example, as a front button effect in the latter half of SP reach, after the command "Make repeated hits to annihilate the enemy!" is displayed in text, the button image (for example, Fig. 31(a) 401) and the words "Continuously press!" are displayed, and then the initial display of "1000 people" is displayed, and as the auto-continuous press progresses, the numerical value changes sequentially from "1000 people". For example, when the number is subtracted and the number reaches "0", the jackpot is confirmed. Also, start with the meter display empty (or full), and as the auto-repetition progresses, the amount indicated on the meter display increases (or decreases), and the meter display becomes full (or empty). An example of this is that the jackpot is confirmed by becoming a jackpot.

Additionally, in addition to this, the following examples of automatic consecutive hit effects can be used to show a change in effect leading to the final display mode, which cannot be said to be a jackpot confirmed mode. For example, a preview effect that occurs before the SP reach develops is ``Map repeatedly to open the shutter and get ``NEXT''! ” will be displayed. Then, as the automatic consecutive hits progress, the door provided as a movable performance member gradually opens, and the door opens fully and the "NEXT" logo (logotype) that can be seen at the end of the door shows the content that the player has acquired. Once the performance is performed, the execution of the so-called pseudo-association is confirmed. In addition, when configured in this way, it is preferable to use a front button effect (for example, automatic continuous press effect A1) instead of a back button effect.

On the other hand, as an automatic continuous hit effect, for example, characters such as ``Map repeatedly to destroy as many panels as possible!'' are displayed, and as the automatic continuous hit progresses, the final panel (5 panels) of the 5 panels is displayed. If you reach the eye panel), a full rotation reach (full rotation effect) will be executed, which is a guaranteed jackpot effect (the first one will always be destroyed, and when you reach the second one, the SP reach second half effect A will be executed. For example, when the third card is reached, SP reach second half effect B is executed, and when the fourth sheet is reached, SP reach second half effect C is executed. In addition, when configured in this way, it is preferable to use a front button effect (for example, automatic continuous press effect A1) instead of a back button effect. Moreover, the jackpot confirmation mode in the continuous-hitting performance of each automatic continuous-hitting performance described above can also be referred to as the final display mode of the automatic continuous-hitting performance. The final display mode can be described as the display mode (performance mode) with the highest jackpot expectation in each automatic consecutive hit performance. Naturally, if there is no display mode in which the jackpot is not confirmed in the continuous hit performance of the automatic continuous hit production (display mode in which the jackpot is not confirmed even if the jackpot expectation is relatively high), the display with the highest jackpot expectation It is preferable to refer to the mode (presentation mode) as the final display mode. In other words, regardless of whether or not there is a display mode during continuous hits that confirms a jackpot, the display mode (performance mode) with the highest jackpot expectation is referred to as the final display mode.

Note that the automatic repeated hit effects A1 include, for example, effects performed in a relatively inconspicuous manner, such as the above-mentioned white or blue effect display (the same applies to automatic repeated effect effects other than effect display). For this reason, as the automatic repeated hit performance A1, it is possible to employ various performances that are generally less noticeable compared to the automatic repeated hit performance C1. As long as there is no particular problem in the relationship with the automatic repeated hit effect C1, it is possible to employ the various automatic repeated hit effects described above for the automatic repeated hit effect A1.

Also, in the invention of the additional consideration 1, it is possible to perform automatic consecutive hit determination in the same way as described above. For example, in the case of controlling in the same manner as shown in FIG. Even after the condition is met, it is possible to perform control related to the automatic repeated tapping operation by maintaining the second condition of continuing to press.

Furthermore, regarding automatic repeated press determination, as explained in paragraph 0454, when a long press operation (continued press) starts (long press operation start timing), one single operation is actually performed. . This situation is the first single-shot operation and the first repeated-hitting operation, but the automatic repeated hitting has not yet been achieved. Then, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the long-press operation, it is the timing at which the second single-shot operation is considered to have been performed, that is, the timing at which the second continuous-press operation is considered to have been performed, and from this point, Control is performed such that the pressing operation at this time is an automatic repeated hit operation (first automatic repeated hit). A long press operation that exceeds 0.5 seconds is considered to be a single operation performed once every 0.2 seconds (although no actual single operation is performed, 0.5 seconds have elapsed. After that, it is assumed that a single operation has been performed every 0.2 seconds), and this "single operation that is considered to be performed" is performed multiple times. It corresponds to being executed.

In addition, the time required until the performance related to the automatic repeated hit operation as described above is performed (here, the time required to satisfy the second condition exceeding 0.5 seconds) is referred to as "auto repeated hit judgment time" etc. However, it is possible to understand the relationship between this "auto continuous press judgment time" and the aforementioned single-shot button performance (also referred to as "single-shot operation performance", "single-shot press performance", or "single-shot performance"). It is also possible to set it in advance. For example, in a single button performance, the time until the performance triggered by a button operation by the player is executed (started) is set to 0.1 to 0.5 seconds, for example, and the above-mentioned automatic continuous hit determination time (the second condition is It is conceivable to make the time shorter than 0.5 seconds).

Here, the time it takes for a performance triggered by a button operation by a player to be executed can be expressed as the time it takes for a change to appear in the performance due to a button operation, or the time it takes for the performance to switch. These times can be referred to as, for example, "effect switching time."

Furthermore, in the single-shot button performance, it is conceivable that after the performance is switched, the time during which the performance after the switch continues (performance display continuation time) is longer than the automatic repeated press determination time.

Furthermore, various examples of displaying a button image (for example, the one shown by reference numeral 401 in FIG. 31(a)) as a button effect have been described above. It is conceivable to define a relationship between the previous time) and the automatic consecutive hit determination time. Further, it is possible to make the time before the button image appears longer than the automatic repeated hit determination time. Here, the "time before appearance" of the button image can be determined as follows.

For example, the "pre-appearance time" of a button image is a so-called effect set effect (a effect in which multiple semi-transparent button images 401a are gathered from all four directions, top, bottom, left and right, and one non-transparent button image is finally formed). ). Then, as the "effect set" related to this button image, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown virtually by the two-dot chain arrows, they gather in one place and overlap, and as shown in FIG. Examples include those that form images). Note that the time before appearance here is set to 2 seconds. Alternatively, although not shown, images of parts related to a button image may appear on the screen and then be combined to form a single button image (for example, "PUSH"). The part image of the pressed part written as , the part image of the decoration around it, the part image imitating the screws, springs, operation button motor, etc. built into the operation button are assembled from the top, bottom, left and right to create the final product. one button image is formed).

In addition, when performing an effect set related to such a button image, the start timing of the effect set should be the start timing of the "pre-appearance time", and the end timing of the effect set should be the end timing of the "pre-appearance time". is possible. Furthermore, it is also possible to set the timing at which the effect set ends to be the timing at which the button image is completed.

In addition, it is possible to define the relationship between the effect set and the button operation validity period so that the effect set is performed until the button operation validity period starts as described above, and the button operation validity period starts when the button image is completed. It is possible. In other words, since the button operation is not valid during the effect collection, even if a button operation (single operation, normal repeated press, auto repeated press, etc.) is performed, no effect accompanying the button operation will occur. In addition, in a continuous press operation performance, a button image appears without a set of effects, but in a single operation performance, a button image may appear with an effect set, or it is configured such that a button image appears with a set of effects, or a single operation is used instead of a continuous press operation performance. The presentation is structured so that button images often appear together with a set of effects. Furthermore, the system is configured such that when a button image appears with an effect set, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when a button image appears without an effect set. As a modified example, in addition to the effect set in which semi-transparent button images are collected from all sides, there is also an effect set in which semi-transparent button images are collected from all sides. For an effect set in which translucent button images are gathered from all directions, the time it takes for a non-transparent button image to be formed (the production time of the effect set, the time before appearance mentioned above) is longer (for example, 2 seconds). (e.g., longer than 4 seconds), the expectation level of the jackpot may also be increased. In the embodiment of the pachinko game machine according to the present invention, the effective period of operation in the continuous-hit operation performance varies widely depending on the type of performance (for example, 5 seconds, 20 seconds, etc.), but the valid period of operation in the single-shot operation performance varies The operation validity period is uniformly set to 3 seconds. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of operation valid periods may be provided in the single-shot operation performance, but it is preferable that the number of types of operation validity periods is smaller than the number of types of operation valid periods in the continuous-hit operation performance.
<<Additional consideration 2 (Increasing the diversity of productions related to the type of automatic continuous hit production 2)>>

Next, we will consider other measures to expand the variety of performances in relation to the types of automatic continuous hit performances. Note that although it is possible to apply the same items as the above-mentioned additional considerations, descriptions of the similar items will be omitted as appropriate.

In the embodiment according to the invention of this additional consideration 2, similar to the above-mentioned additional consideration 1, auto continuous hit effect A1 (SP reach first half, back button effect) and auto continuous hit effect C1 (SP reach second half, front button effect) It is possible to use Furthermore, similar to Additional Consideration 1, the relationship between the effective periods of each operation is determined so that the effective period of operation (auto multi-hit effective period) is longer for the automatic repeated hit effect A1 than for the automatic repeated hit effect C1. .

Furthermore, as in Additional Consideration 1, each of the auto-repeat effects (A1, C1) includes the effect of a jackpot confirmed mode (or the final display mode which is the display mode with the highest expectation of a jackpot). In the automatic continuous hit effect A1, as the effect of the jackpot confirmed mode (or the final display mode which is the display mode with the highest expectation of jackpot), for example, a predetermined image object in the effect image emits a rainbow light. In the automatic continuous hit performance C1, a performance of enemy annihilation is performed as a performance of the jackpot confirmation mode (or the final display mode which is the display mode with the highest jackpot expectation). This jackpot confirmation mode (or the final display mode, which is the display mode with the highest expectation of jackpot) (especially for automatic continuous hit effect A1) can be considered as the final display mode mentioned above, similar to additional consideration 1. It is possible.

Each of the above matters is the same as the invention related to Additional Consideration 1, but as a characteristic matter of Additional Consideration 2, the remaining time of the auto continuous hit valid period is the above-mentioned auto continuous hit judgment time (here, 0.5 seconds Let us consider a case where a long-press operation is started in a situation that is less than 0.55 to 0.6 seconds). In this case, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 36(a) and 36(b) described above, it is possible to perform an automatic continuous hit effect. Furthermore, automatic continuous hit performance A1 does not (or is unlikely to) become a jackpot confirmed mode (or final display mode), but auto continuous hit effect C1 becomes (or is likely to become) a jackpot confirmed mode (or final display mode). ), the relationship between the previous performance (single operation performance) and the automatic continuous hit performance C1 and jackpot confirmation mode (or final display mode) is determined.

For example, if you start a long press when there is less than 0.5 seconds left in the operation period, the start of the long press will be a single operation (if you press repeatedly from now on, it will be treated as the first consecutive press). Therefore, a performance will occur with this single operation, and the automatic continuous hit performance C1 is likely to become the final display mode (in other words, the final display mode from the beginning). . Another aspect is (1) If the same effect as the continuous hit effect is automatically generated once when the effective operation period ends, the automatic continuous hit effect C1 is better than the final display effect when the effective operation period ends. (2) For auto continuous hit effect C1 only, the final display effect may be forced to occur when the valid operation period ends (auto continuous hit effect A1 does not display any effect even after the valid operation period ends). ), etc.

By doing this, even in a situation where an auto repeated hit operation (long press) that does not meet the conditions for automatic repeated hit judgment, the jackpot confirmation mode (or final display mode) will be displayed depending on the type of auto repeated hit effect. It is possible to perform an effect in such a manner that the rate of change (execution rate) is different. Even in a situation where automatic button presses cannot be performed in time, it is possible to reliably cause a change (movement) in the performance. Furthermore, on the other hand, the performance will ultimately be performed in a manner different from the automatic repeated hit performance, and as a result, it is possible to show the player the difference in performance depending on the button operation, and it is possible to show the player the difference in performance depending on the button press. It becomes possible to raise awareness of

Then, for the special condition of a situation where an auto-repeat operation (long press) that does not meet the conditions for auto-repeat judgment, it is possible to add a condition of the type of auto-repeat effect to create a difference in the tendency of the effect. . This allows the button functions to be further optimized, and furthermore, it becomes possible to create new and diverse game features.

Regarding the automatic repeated hit effects (A1, C1 here), the initial button operation is detected (for example, if the automatic repeated hit judgment time (0.5 seconds here, about 0.55 to 0.6 seconds) is not reached. For example, an effect display representing a button operation may be displayed only once during a certain time period, etc.), and the effect may be produced by a single operation as described above. It is conceivable to prevent a highly anticipated presentation (a rainbow, a predetermined pattern, etc.) from being performed in this single operation (in this case, the first effect display). Further, as described above, at this time, the automatic continuous hit performance C1 is likely to be the final display mode (in other words, the final display mode from the beginning). Alternatively, other aspects (1) and (2) described above may be considered.
<<Additional consideration 3 (increasing the diversity of button vibe effects)>>

Next, diversification of the vibration effect (button vibe effect) of the operation button 22 described above will be considered. Note that unless there is a particular problem, it is possible to apply the same items as the above-mentioned additional considerations, but the explanation of the similar items will be omitted as appropriate.

In additional consideration 3, for example, it is assumed that there are at least a performance pattern A and a performance pattern B as performances related to the button vibe performance. Among these, performance pattern A is a button vibe performance whose execution is not triggered by the player's operation of the operation button 22. In other words, production pattern A is a production in which the operation button 22 vibrates when the player is not operating the operation button 22 (in other words, the operation button 22 automatically vibrates even without the player operating the operation button 22). It is a performance).

The performance pattern A includes the above-mentioned pre-reading performance (notice performance related to special symbols) (pre-reading button vibe performance that suggests that the target fluctuation is highly anticipated), and the appearance of the button image 401. (a button vibe effect when a button image appears, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a highly anticipated effect will occur when the button is pressed), and one that is executed approximately at the same time as the start of a variable display (when the variable display is (button vibration effect at the start of fluctuation, which suggests high expectations), and one that is executed when the above-mentioned words "Actually...a jackpot!" are displayed on the screen (button vibration effect at the time of surprise effect). (vibe effect), etc.

On the other hand, performance pattern B is a button vibe performance triggered by the player's operation of the operation button 22. In other words, the performance pattern B is a performance in which the operation button 22 vibrates when the player operates the operation button 22. It can be said that this production pattern B has a higher degree of involvement (degree of involvement) of the player in the button vibe production than production pattern A.

In this performance pattern B, in the above-mentioned winning/losing situation, the words "Decide!" are displayed together with the button image, and then by operating the operation button 22, the current fluctuating display changes to a jackpot. If it is a variable display, an effect is executed to notify the winner (for example, the words "Win!" are displayed), and the operation button 22 is caused to vibrate. Note that the text "Decide!" is a promotion effect that indirectly prompts the player to operate the operation button 22, but it is not displayed in the normal button image (the button image that appears in the situation before the winning/losing branch). (In a normal button image, the only promotion effect is the button image, or characters such as ``Press!'' for a single operation effect, or ``Press repeatedly!'' for a multiple press operation effect.) (Only a display is attached.) Also, if the current fluctuation display is not a jackpot fluctuation display (if it is a loss fluctuation display), an effect will be executed to notify you of a loss (for example, the words "defeat!" will be displayed), but at that time, if you press the operation button 22 will not vibrate. It is possible to exemplify an effect in which the operation button 22 is vibrated (win/lose button vibe effect). For example, the winning/losing branch effect may also be a winning/losing branch button vibe effect, in which the aforementioned lever L is protruded (FIGS. 21(b) and (c)), the operating button 22 is raised, and the operating button 22 is vibrated. It is possible to include In addition to the winning/losing button vibe effect, there is a ``after button image deletion'' effect that is not executed when the button image 401 appears, but is executed when the button image 401 is erased when the button is pressed, before it develops into SP reach. It also has a "button vibe effect when a notice occurs" (for example, a button image 401 appears after a reach is established, and by pressing the button, the button image 401 is erased, a button vibe effect occurs, and a jackpot is not confirmed, but it is a jackpot. "Next preview (notifying the type of SP reach performance)" which is a highly anticipated preview performance, a rainbow-colored line preview that is guaranteed to be a jackpot, and predetermined lines that are not guaranteed to be a jackpot but have high expectations for a jackpot. advance notice etc.). In addition, the button performance in performance pattern B is preferably a single-shot operation performance that is a front button performance, but in addition to the performance pattern B that is a single-shot operation performance that is a front button performance, there are also multiple button performance that is a front button performance. A performance pattern B may be provided as an operation performance. In such a configuration, performance pattern B as a single operation performance includes, for example, the winning branch button vibe performance of SP reach second half performance A, the winning branch button vibe performance of SP reach second half performance C, and the two types of button images described above. It is a button vibe effect when a notice occurs after deletion (next notice and dialogue preview), and the effect pattern B as a continuous press operation effect can be used as a single operation effect, for example, only the winning/losing branch button vibe effect in the second half of SP reach effect B. It is desirable that the number of types of presentation patterns B is relatively large.

Furthermore, as a more specific example of the combination of presentation patterns A and B, for example, presentation pattern A is a look-ahead button vibe effect, and with the occurrence of this effect, the reservation that was the target of the look-ahead becomes the target for consumption. It is assumed that the expected jackpot of fluctuation (target fluctuation) is 50%. On the other hand, performance pattern B can be exemplified by a win/loss branch button vibe performance in which a jackpot is determined by the occurrence of the performance.

3-1. Embodiment 1 related to additional consideration 3 (relationship between execution ratios of production patterns A and B)
The above-mentioned performance pattern A (button vibe performance whose execution is not triggered by the player's operation of the operation button 22) and performance pattern B (button vibe performance whose execution is triggered by the player's operation of the operation button 22) ), the relationship between them is such that the rate at which they are executed differs in a predetermined gaming situation.

For example, based on the target variation that is the target of look-ahead, in the variation before the target variation (pre-target variation), the rate at which performance pattern A is executed is lower than the rate at which performance pattern B is executed (0%). Set the random number so that it is higher than (including).

In addition, as another aspect, in a situation where a look-ahead effect related to a certain pending memory information is executed, a change that is earlier than a variation display (such as a variation display of a target variation) corresponding to the certain pending memory information. In addition, in a variable display in which a look-ahead effect is performed (such as a variable display of a change before the target in which a look-ahead effect is performed), the effect pattern A is executed more often than the effect pattern B. It is possible to set the random number so that the execution rate of effect pattern B is lower (including 0%) than that of effect pattern B.

Furthermore, in the case where a prefetch effect related to a certain pending memory information is executed and a variable display corresponding to this pending memory information starts, the prefetch effect is executed in the variable display (such as a variable display of a target variation). The random value is set so that the rate of performance pattern B being executed is higher than that of the fluctuating display when the fluctuating display starts without being executed (the fluctuating display starts without the look-ahead rendering being executed). In such a case, it is possible to set a random value so that effect pattern B is not executed in the variable display.

In addition, both effect patterns A and B can be executed at respective predetermined timings within a variable display, but effect pattern A is not executed at the above-mentioned predetermined timing in a certain variable display. Even so, the random number should be set so that production pattern B may be executed at a timing later than the above-mentioned predetermined timing in the certain variable display (herein referred to as "specific timing"). is possible.

Here, among the pre-target variations, the pre-target variation in which the pre-read effect is executed can be referred to as a "pre-read target variation" or the like.

By doing any of these or appropriately combining them, it is possible to associate the degree of involvement of the player with the button vibe performance and the target fluctuation. Then, depending on the degree of involvement of the players in the button vibe performance, it is possible to create a difference in subsequent performance tendencies. This allows the button functions to be further optimized, and furthermore, it becomes possible to create new and diverse game features.

3-2. Embodiment 2 related to additional consideration 3 (relationship between execution ratio of performance pattern A and look-ahead performance)
In addition, for performance pattern A (a button vibe performance whose execution is not triggered by the player's operation of the operation button 22), the execution rate of performance pattern A is calculated by comparing the execution rate of performance pattern A with pre-reading performances other than performance pattern B (here, It is conceivable to determine this in relation to whether or not the prefetch effect D) is to be executed. Note that the code for the look-ahead effects explained here is "D" because the codes "A" to "C" are used for the look-ahead effects explained in other additional considerations (additional considerations 6 onwards) that will be explained later. It's for a reason.

In addition, when the above-mentioned performance pattern A (a button vibe performance whose execution is not triggered by the player's operation of the operation button 22) is executed as a pre-reading performance, it is similar to the pre-reading performances A to C described later. , which is a type of pre-reading performance. In that case, it is possible to distinguish the above-mentioned effect pattern A from the pre-read effects AC by calling it, for example, "pre-read effect α". Note that performance pattern A and look-ahead performances A to D are names used to distinguish each performance so as not to complicate the explanation. Regarding the relationship between the performance pattern A and the look-ahead performances A to D in the case where a button vibe performance (without a button vibe effect) is executed as a look-ahead performance, unless there is a particular problem, the specific performance contents of each should overlap with each other. It may contain something. In other words, it is possible to perform performance pattern A (a button vibe performance whose execution is not triggered by the player's operation of the operation button 22) as a pre-read performance, and in the pre-read performances A to D, the player's operation button 22 It is also possible to perform a button vibe effect whose execution is not triggered by the operation of .

As an example of the relationship between the effect pattern A and the look-ahead effect D, for example, the look-ahead effect D is executed during a change before a target change corresponding to certain suspended memory information (a certain pre-target change), and when a target after that The random number is set so that there are cases in which performance pattern B is executed and cases in which it is not executed in the variation. In addition, when the above-mentioned look-ahead effect D is executed in the pre-target variation, the random value is set so that the effect pattern A may or may not be executed in the subsequent target variation. Furthermore, when the above look-ahead effect D is executed in front of the target variation, both effect patterns A and B may be executed in the subsequent target variation, one may be executed, or both may not be executed. One possibility is to make it so.

Also, for example, if look-ahead effect D is executed in the pre-target variation, effect pattern A will be executed more than effect pattern B in the target change that is the target of the look-ahead, compared to a case where it is not executed. It is also conceivable to make it easier (including not executing performance pattern B).

In addition, the look-ahead effect D is not limited to the button vibe effect, but it is also possible to adopt various look-ahead effects (including those using movable effect members) such as the various types of pending look-ahead notices and various types of continuous look-ahead notices mentioned above. It is.

By doing so, it becomes possible to give a pre-reading performance an indication regarding the performance pattern A in which the degree of involvement of the player in the button vibe performance is relatively low. Even if the player's degree of involvement in the button vibe performance is relatively low, it can be used more effectively by combining it with the pre-reading performance. As a result, the button functions can be further optimized, and it is also possible to create new and diverse game features.

3-3. Embodiment 3 related to additional consideration 3 (execution ratio of production pattern B depending on whether production pattern A is executed)
Furthermore, production pattern A (a button vibe production whose execution is not triggered by the player's operation of the operation button 22), and production pattern B (a button vibe production whose execution is triggered by the player's operation of the operation button 22). With regard to the mutual relationship between effects (effects), the execution rate of effect pattern B in subsequent fluctuations is made to differ depending on whether effect pattern A is executed or not. For example, in a situation (already executed situation) in which production pattern A is executed with a variation before the variation at that time (the variation concerned), the production pattern A is produced using the variation before the variation at that time (the variation concerned). Effect pattern B is more likely to be executed in this variation than in a situation where pattern A is not executed (non-execution situation) (effect pattern A is executed in a variation before the variation at that time (the variation) In a situation where the performance pattern B is not performed (a non-execution situation), the effect pattern B is not executed due to the variation.

Here, as a situation where the performance pattern A has been executed in the fluctuation before the relevant fluctuation, for example, the performance pattern A has been executed at least within three consecutive fluctuations before the relevant fluctuation, not including the relevant fluctuation. An example can be a situation where it is executed once. Note that it is desirable that within three consecutive fluctuations before the fluctuation be the fluctuation before the look-ahead target during which the look-ahead effect targeting the fluctuation is being executed.

Furthermore, as a control mode that makes it easier to execute effect pattern B in such a situation, for example, the sub-main CPU 521 may set a flag when effect pattern A is executed and store information indicating this fact. Make it. Then, the sub-main CPU 521 determines whether or not the above-mentioned flag indicating that the effect pattern A has been executed is set in the subsequent several fluctuations (for example, each of four fluctuations) including the fluctuation at that time (the fluctuation). Make a judgment. Then, if it is determined that the above flag is set, a table is selected so that the proportion of performance pattern B is relatively larger than other performances, and a lottery for the performance is selected using that table. I do.

By doing so, it becomes possible to utilize the button vibe effect more effectively depending on whether or not the effect pattern A is executed and the chronological combination of the effect pattern A and the effect pattern B. As a result, the button functions can be further optimized, and it is also possible to create new and diverse game features.

3-4. Embodiment 4 according to additional consideration 3 (percentage of execution of the combination of performance patterns A and B regarding whether or not performance pattern A is executed)
Similarly, there is a production pattern A (a button vibe production whose execution is not triggered by the player's operation of the operation button 22), and production pattern B (a button whose execution is triggered by the player's operation of the operation button 22). With regard to the mutual relationship between the effects (vibe effect), the execution ratio of the combination of effect pattern A and effect pattern B during subsequent fluctuations is made to differ depending on whether or not effect pattern A has been executed before the relevant change. It is also possible.

In other words, in the above-mentioned embodiment (Embodiment 3 related to 3-3. Additional consideration 3), the "execution ratio of performance pattern B" with respect to performance pattern A before the change is specified, but this implementation The form defines the execution ratio of "the performance of the combination of performance pattern A and performance pattern B" with respect to the performance pattern A before the change. In other words, the relationship between the execution ratios of the effect pattern A before the change and "the effect of the combination of effect pattern A and effect pattern B" is defined.

For example, assume that both effect pattern A and effect pattern B can be executed in the variation. In that case, the execution timing of the effect pattern B is set after the execution timing of the effect pattern A (for example, the timing is 3 seconds after the start of the variable display, and the execution timing of the effect pattern A is set before the reach is established). is executed, and then performance pattern B is executed at the winning/losing branch timing in the latter half of the SP reach after the reach is established). In this variation, even if production pattern A is not executed, production pattern B may be executed afterwards, and such a time series (production pattern A not executed → production pattern B executed) in the variation concerned The degree of execution expectation related to a production pattern (the degree of expectation that the production pattern will be executed) is the variation before the variation in question (in the variation before this, the level before the prefetch target that is executing the prefetch production targeting the variation in question) It is desirable that the performance pattern A is variable) so that it differs depending on whether or not the performance pattern A has been executed. In other words, if the effect pattern A has already been executed in the change before the change, the situation in which the effect pattern A has been executed in the change before the change is better than if the effect pattern A has not been executed in the change before the change. To facilitate execution of a chronological performance pattern of performance pattern A non-execution→performance pattern B execution. In addition, if the effect pattern A has already been executed in a change before the change, the effect will be higher than if the effect pattern A has not been executed in the change before the change. A chronological performance pattern of performance pattern A execution→performance pattern B execution may be easily executed by variation.

More specifically, for example, it is assumed that the effect pattern A is executed when the button image 401 described above appears (vibration effect when the button image appears). To explain this button image appearance vibration effect in more detail, the button image appearance vibration effect is one in which the operation button 22 vibrates when the button image appears, which is a timing before the button operation by the player. It is.

As an example of a vibe effect when this button image appears, for example, a preview effect related to some (arbitrary) game state (for example, the above-mentioned next notice, a rainbow-colored or predetermined pattern dialogue notice, etc.), or any other notice. A button image appears that triggers the start of a step-up notice with a rainbow color or a predetermined pattern. At this time, even before the player operates the operation button 22, a button vibe effect is rarely performed at a predetermined rate. In the case where a vibe effect is performed when a button image appears, the occurrence of the effect causes the jackpot expectation level related to the variation (and the effect in the variation) to be about 33%.

On the other hand, performance pattern B (a button vibe performance whose execution is triggered by the player's operation of the operation button 22) is a button vibe performance with a win/loss branch, and a jackpot is confirmed by the occurrence of the performance. shall be.

When the effect patterns A and B in the variation are such a combination, the above-mentioned ``non-execution of effect pattern A'' can be said to be the effect mode of ``no button vibe effect when button image appears'' in the variation. . Furthermore, "effect pattern A not executed" means that the previous stage effect related to effect pattern A (here, the display of the button image) is performed, but the effect pattern A (here, the button vibe effect when the button image appears) is not performed. It means a situation where the button image is not displayed, or a situation where the button image is not displayed at the timing when the button image according to production pattern A can be displayed (for example, 3 seconds after the start of the variable display and before the reach is established). It can be said that there is.

In addition, since production pattern B is a win/loss branch button vibe production, it will be performed relatively late (in the final stage) of the fluctuation, and it will be performed when production pattern A is executed (or production pattern A is not executed). It will be executed later than the previous period).

Regarding the relationship between performance pattern A and performance pattern B, the following types (1) to (3) can be considered as time-series performance patterns. Here, in both performance pattern A and performance pattern B, the time series of "performance pattern A non-execution→performance pattern B non-execution" will be omitted.
Type (1) Execution of performance pattern A → Execution of performance pattern B Specific example: Execution of button vibe performance when button image appears 3 seconds after start of variable display → Reach established → Win/loss branch button vibe performance executed in the second half of SP reach Type (2) Performance Pattern A not executed → Effect pattern B executed Specific example: A button image appears 3 seconds after the start of the variable display, but at that time, button vibe effect is not executed when the button image appears → Reach is established → Winning branch button vibe in the second half of SP reach Performance execution type (3) Execution of performance pattern B only Specific example: No button image appears 3 seconds after the start of the variable display (button vibe performance is also not executed when the button image appears at the same timing) → reach established → SP reach in the second half Win or lose button vibe effect execution

Furthermore, in this "Embodiment 4 related to 3-4. Additional consideration 3", the above type (1) or type (2) is determined depending on whether or not the effect pattern A is executed before the change. The execution expectations associated with the time-series performance patterns are different. In other words, if the effect pattern A is executed before the change in question, the time series of type (1) or type (2) above is better than if the effect pattern A is not executed before the change in question. It is configured so that the degree of execution expectation related to the performance pattern is high. If the effect pattern A is executed before the change, it is possible to execute more time-series effect patterns than when the effect pattern A is not executed. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the effect pattern A is executed before the change, it is also possible to execute fewer chronological effect patterns than when it is not executed. It is. In addition, if the effect pattern A is executed before the change, the time series of type (1) or type (2) above is better than if the effect pattern A is not executed before the change. It may be configured such that the execution expectation level related to the performance pattern is low.

Here, the "execution expectation level" can be expressed not only as the expectation level that the performance pattern will be executed, but also as the probability that the performance pattern will be executed. In addition, it is not limited to determining the degree of execution expectation for each of the above types (1) or (2), but it is also possible to It may be determined differently depending on whether or not the effect pattern A is being executed.

Furthermore, in order to effectively perform the performance by executing the performance pattern A in the fluctuation before the fluctuation and the chronological performance pattern in the fluctuation, the display of the fluctuation before the fluctuation (targeting the fluctuation) It is desirable that the look-ahead effect is a change before the look-ahead target while the look-ahead effect is being executed), and the effect based on a time-series effect pattern (that is, effect pattern A execution → effect pattern B execution, effect pattern A non-execution → effect pattern B execution, effect). It is desirable that pattern B only is not performed. However, it is a problem that in the variable display before the fluctuation, a performance is performed using a performance pattern in which performance pattern B is not executed (that is, performance pattern A is executed → performance pattern B is not executed, or only performance pattern A is executed). do not have.

In order to do this, for example, the sub-main CPU 521 sets a flag when effect pattern B is executed, and determines the state of this flag every time there is a change. Furthermore, by referring to this flag, if it is determined that the effect pattern B was executed within 3 consecutive fluctuations before the relevant fluctuation without including the relevant fluctuation, then in the relevant fluctuation. , it is conceivable to avoid executing the chronological presentation pattern.

In addition, in order to avoid using a chronological performance pattern, it is possible to draw a performance without using a table containing numerical values corresponding to the chronological performance pattern, or to prevent a chronological performance pattern from being drawn. Even if it were to happen, it could be canceled and replaced with another production.

By doing so, the button vibe effect can be utilized more effectively due to a series of connections between the effect pattern A and the effect of the combination of effect patterns A and B. As a result, the button functions can be further optimized, and it is also possible to create new and diverse game features.

Additionally, the relationship between a button vibe performance that does not involve player operation (performance pattern A) and a button vibe performance that involves player operation (performance pattern B) is determined for multiple variations (this variation and previous variations). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand at what timing the button vibe effect will occur and whether or not the player himself/herself needs to operate the button. Then, it becomes possible to make the occurrence of the button vibe effect even more unpredictable (or difficult to predict).

In addition, in order to make the rate at which the chronological effect pattern is performed be different when the effect pattern A is executed before such a change, compared to the case where it is not executed, the change is It is also possible to define a relationship between "effect pattern A non-execution → effect pattern B non-execution".

Such a performance pattern of "performance pattern A non-execution → performance pattern B non-execution" can also be considered as one type of time-series performance pattern (for example, type (4)). Specifically, in this variation, neither production pattern A nor production pattern B is executed, and other productions are executed.

Here, in the production pattern of "Production pattern A non-execution → Production pattern B non-execution", a button image initially appears as in the specific example (2) above, but at that time, when the button image appears It is possible to include a performance pattern in which a button vibe performance is not executed and then a winning/losing button vibe performance is not executed. Furthermore, it is also possible to include in this type (4) a performance pattern in which none of the appearance of a button image, the button vibe effect when the button image appears, and the winning/losing button vibe effect are executed.

In addition, the performance pattern A (button vibe performance whose execution is not triggered by the operation of the operation button 22 by the player) that can be executed in a variation before the relevant variation is not limited to the one exemplified here, but various types. It is possible to apply a presentation (pre-reading presentation). Moreover, it is possible to apply various combinations of performance patterns as time-series performance patterns. Furthermore, the appearance of the button image and the various button vibe effects described here may all be performed as back button effects.

Regarding the various embodiments 1 to 4 related to this additional consideration 3, the vibrations in the button vibe effect are not limited to those with relatively short cycles, such as several times per second or more, but also those with a relatively short cycle, such as less than once per second. It may also have a relatively long cycle. Further, the operation is not limited to an operation that repeats at a constant cycle, but may be an operation whose cycle changes.

Furthermore, unlike the operation button 22, the movable performance member that constitutes the performance gimmick is placed within the game area so that the player cannot touch it, but this movable performance member vibrates (reciprocating) during operation. In the case where the vibrating motion of the operation button 22 is to be made shorter (smaller) than the motion cycle of the movable presentation member. Furthermore, it is conceivable that the amplitude of the vibration motion of the operation button 22 that can be touched by the player is made smaller than the amplitude of the movable performance member.
<<Additional consideration 4 (Increasing the diversity of auto continuous hit effect C1 1)>>

Next, consider the diversification of the above-mentioned automatic continuous hit performance C1 (SP reach second half, front button performance). Note that unless there is a particular problem, it is possible to apply the same items as the above-mentioned additional considerations, but the explanation of the similar items will be omitted as appropriate.

In this additional consideration 4, for example, in a situation where the automatic continuous hit effect C1 is being executed, a button image as described above (for example, the one indicated by reference numeral 401 in FIG. 31(a)) appears. Then, the production and effects corresponding to the repeated tapping operation are executed. In other words, if the conditions for automatic repeated hits (here, a long press for more than 0.5 seconds) are met, and the player's hand continues to press the button for a long time (or is released from the operation button), An automatic continuous hit effect, effects related to the automatic continuous hit effect, etc. are performed.

Here, regarding effect display, in addition to image production performed on the screen, light emitting members (such as LEDs) mounted on the gaming machine frame 11 (including the operation buttons 22) and the gaming board 50 (particularly the gaming area 52) are used. ``Effect display'' also includes effects based on the operating mode of the light-emitting body. The effects produced by the operation of these light-emitting members can be referred to as "effects" or "illumination effects" by the light-emitting members.

In addition, as for the effect display (illumination effect) by the light-emitting member, for example, during automatic continuous hitting, the light-emitting member changes to white, red, etc. at specific intervals (here, the above-mentioned 0.2 second interval). Flashing in a specific color (not only one color but also two colors can be flashed), and the effect display that starts in white changes to red, indicating high reliability (when continuous auto-hitting continues, the first was flashing white at 0.2 second intervals, then it flashed blue at 0.2 second intervals, yellow at 0.2 second intervals, green at 0.2 second intervals, An example of such a change is that the light gradually changes so that it blinks in red at 0.2 second intervals (so-called upstart). Note that in the case of normal consecutive hits instead of automatic consecutive hits, an effect is displayed (the light emitter blinks in a specific color) at the timing when the player actually presses the operation button 22.

Further, during the execution of the automatic continuous hit effect C1, among the above-mentioned environmental settings, light amount adjustment (light amount adjustment) can be performed in parallel. In this case, the image of the light intensity adjustment effect as exemplified in FIG. image 401). When superimposing the image of the light amount adjustment effect on the auto continuous hit effect C1 image in this way, various displays as explained in the above section <<Parallel handling of auto continuous hit function and environment setting function>> It is possible to adopt various modes and control modes.

Here, it is possible to set the display priority of the light amount adjustment image to be higher (the layer is in the foreground) than the automatic continuous hit effect C1 image (which may include a button image and an effect image based on an operation). Furthermore, it is also possible to determine the positional relationship between both images so that at least a part of the image of the light amount adjustment effect is superimposed on at least a part of the automatic continuous hit effect C1 image.

Further, by adjusting the light amount, the light amount of the operation button light emitting body (not shown) provided in the operation button 22 of the gaming machine frame 11 is changed. The light-emitting body for the operation button emits white light during the operation validity period in the front button presentation to notify the player that the operation is valid, but if the operation is not within the operation validity period does not emit light or emits blue light to notify the player that the operation is not valid. Then, a button image (for example, the button image with reference numeral 401) related to the automatic repeated hit effect C1 is displayed, and the light emitting body for the operation button emits white light, and the light amount is adjusted as described above while the button image is displayed. Although the light amount (brightness) of the above-mentioned operation button light emitting body (LED, not shown) is changed, the light amount (brightness) of the button image is not changed (does not change).

In order to prevent the light amount (brightness) of the button image from being changed, for example, it is possible to prevent the light amount (brightness) of a backlight (not shown) built into the effect display device 60 from being changed. . As a backlight (not shown) for the effect display device 60, a backlight similar to that normally provided in a liquid crystal display device or the like is applied.

In this case, for example, if the sub-main CPU 521 is executing at least the automatic continuous hit effect C1, the function of adjusting the light amount related to the operation button light emitting body (not shown) and the function of adjusting the light amount related to the above-mentioned backlight. It is conceivable to perform separate control between the two. Then, when the player performs an operation to adjust the light amount, the sub-main CPU 521 determines whether or not the automatic repeated hit effect C1 is being executed, and if the automatic repeated hit effect C1 is being executed, the light amount related to the backlight is It is possible to change the amount of light (brightness) related to the operation button light emitter (not shown) without changing the brightness.

Note that while the sub-main CPU 521 is at least executing the auto-repeat effect C1, the amount of light (brightness) related to the operation button light emitting body (not shown) is changed, and the CPU 531 of the sub-sub board 302 is controlled by the sub-main CPU 521. It is also possible to adopt a control mode in which the amount of light (brightness) related to the backlight is changed based on the command (sub-main command).

In addition, as another method for preventing the amount of light (brightness) of the button image from being changed, the following may be considered. For example, when a player adjusts the light intensity, the light intensity (brightness) of the screen of the effect display device 60 other than the button image changes, but the light intensity of the button image on the screen does not change visually. Selectively control the layers of an image. More specifically, the CPU 531 of the sub-sub board 302 performs image processing such that the brightness of the layer of the button image looks the same as before the light amount adjustment.

In addition, when the operation button 22 is pressed while the automatic continuous hit effect C1 is being executed and the light intensity is being adjusted (in a situation where the image of the light intensity adjustment effect is displayed and the light intensity can be adjusted), the operation button 22 is pressed. It is also conceivable to change the light emission mode (effect of the operation button light emitter (not shown)) of the operation button light emitter (not shown) accordingly. For example, in normal repeated hits, the lighting pattern is configured so that it changes from white to red in response to a single press (changes to red for only 0.1 seconds, then returns to white), and during automatic repeated hits. If there is, it changes from white to red at 0.2 second intervals (auto repeats the change from white to red for 0.1 seconds, then returns to white for 0.1 seconds, and then changes to red again for 0.1 seconds) (repeat during performance).

Furthermore, when the operation button 22 is pressed, it is also possible to change the display mode of the button image (effect display of the button image, etc.) according to the press (the indicator image changes as the operation validity period decreases). (As they vary depending on the situation, they will be excluded here.) For example, if the button image is an image that imitates a white button, the button image may be configured to blink or vibrate in response to a single press during normal repeated presses, During the performance, the button image is configured to blink or a trembling effect is generated, which is repeated at 0.2 second intervals during the automatic continuous hit performance.

In addition, as another aspect, the display of the button image related to the automatic repeated hit effect is started (button image generation), and at almost the same time as this button image generation, the operation button 22 also emits white light (white emission). It will be done. Next, in the automatic repeated press effect executed by long-pressing the operation button 22, the display mode of the button image, the light emission mode of the operation button 22, and the light emission mode of various light emitting members change at 0.2 second intervals as described above. The mode changes to a repeating mode (in the case of a button image, an effect of blinking or shaking occurs, and in the case of the operation button 22 or other light-emitting member, a mode of generating a blinking or color-changing effect). Furthermore, while the automatic continuous press operation is in progress (long press continues), light amount adjustment can also be performed in parallel by operating the cross key 96. In addition, by performing automatic repeated presses and light intensity adjustment in parallel, the brightness changes while changing the light emission mode of the operation button 22 and the light emission mode of the light emitting member at 0.2 second intervals. (For example, the brightness changes while white is flashing, or the brightness changes while red is flashing.) However, the brightness of the button image (here, the above-mentioned change in the button image at 0.2 second intervals) control so that it does not change.

By using these various presentation modes, it is possible to indicate to the player that the light amount is being adjusted by changing the light amount (brightness) of the operation button 22 itself, and also to change the button image on the screen. The amount of light (brightness) can be assumed not to change. This makes it possible to show the player that the amount of light has actually been changed without creating a sense of discomfort in the image on the screen.

Furthermore, in a situation where the player operates the cross key 96 or the like to adjust the amount of light, the performance related to the automatic continuous hit performance C1 and the player's operation can proceed smoothly. Then, the player can quickly operate the cross key 96, etc., and the operation button 22 (operating the cross key 96, the operation button 22, and the cross key 96 in this order) with one hand (for example, the left hand).

Furthermore, in the continuous hit operation performance, since the performance is performed in response to multiple or single player operations, the player may feel that the screen and light decorations are too bright. In such a case, if the volume level cannot be adjusted until the player is actually performing the operations or after the continuous hit operation effect has finished, it is not possible to immediately reflect the player's hobbies and preferences. . However, by doing as in this additional consideration 4, since the automatic repeated hit effect C1 and the light level display are displayed in parallel, the light level can be adjusted in the situation where the player is actually performing operations. This makes it possible to immediately reflect the player's hobbies and preferences.

Note that although the auto-repeating effect C1 has been described as an example here, the present invention is not limited to the auto-repeating effect and can be applied to other button effects. It is also possible to consider the relationship between the forces required to press the operation button 22 and the cross key 96. For example, between the pressing force required to detect the operation button 22 as ON and the pressing force necessary to detect the cross key 96 as ON, a large force is required to detect the former operation button 22 as ON. It is conceivable to design mutual spring forces and other mechanical configurations to achieve this. By doing this, the device that is used relatively frequently during production (here, the operation button 22) has a stronger operating force than the device that is operated for setting the environment (here, the cross key 96). can be made as required.
<<Additional consideration 5 (Expansion of diversity of automatic continuous hit effect C1 2)>>

Next, consider other measures to diversify the above-mentioned automatic continuous hit performance C1 (SP reach second half, front button performance). Note that unless there is a particular problem, it is possible to apply the same items as the above-mentioned additional considerations, but the explanation of the similar items will be omitted as appropriate.

In this additional consideration matter 5, similar to the above-mentioned additional consideration matter 4, for example, in a situation where the automatic continuous hit effect C1 is being executed, the button image as explained so far (for example, the button image shown in FIG. 31(a) 401) appears, and the production and effects corresponding to the repeated tapping operation are executed.

Further, during the execution of the automatic continuous hit effect C1, among the above-mentioned environmental settings, light amount adjustment (light amount adjustment) can be performed in parallel. In this case, similar to the above-mentioned additional consideration 4, the image of the light amount adjustment effect as illustrated in FIG. will be carried out.

In addition, in this additional consideration 5, unlike the above-mentioned additional consideration 4, depending on the light intensity adjustment in this case, the light intensity of the operation button light emitting body (not shown) also changes the light intensity (brightness) of the button image (entire screen). (a) and (b) should not be changed. However, when the operation button 22 is pressed, the light emitting mode of the operation button light emitting body (not shown) (effect of the operation button light emitting body (not shown)) is changed in accordance with the press.

Furthermore, when the operation button 22 is pressed, the display mode of the button image (such as effect display of the button image) may be changed in accordance with the press.

In addition, as another aspect, the display of the button image related to the automatic repeated hit effect is started (button image generation), and at almost the same time as this button image generation, the operation button 22 also emits white light (white emission). It will be done. Next, in the automatic repeated press effect executed by long-pressing the operation button 22, the display mode of the button image, the light emission mode of the operation button 22, and the light emission mode of various light emitting members change at 0.2 second intervals as described above. The mode changes to a repeating mode (in the case of a button image, an effect of blinking or shaking occurs, and in the case of the operation button 22 or other light-emitting member, a mode of generating a blinking or color-changing effect). Furthermore, while the automatic continuous press operation is in progress (long press continues), light amount adjustment can also be performed in parallel by operating the cross key 96. In addition, by executing the automatic repeated presses and the light amount adjustment in parallel, the button image and the light emitting mode of various light emitting members other than the light emitting member of the operation button 22 can be changed at 0.2 second intervals as described above. The brightness changes while the mode changes (for example, the brightness changes while white is blinking, or the brightness changes while red is blinking), but the button image and the light emission mode of the operation button 22 (button image and , changes in the mode of the light emitting member of the operation button 22 at 0.2 second intervals) are controlled so that the brightness does not change.

By doing this, the operation button 22 and button image, which are hidden by the player's fingers and difficult to see, will not change during the performance even if the light amount is adjusted. As a result, the state of the operation button 22 during button presentation does not change. In particular, in the operation button 22, if the operation button light emitting body (not shown) is driven in a manner specific to, for example, a promotion performance, the amount of light remains unchanged in the notification mode that the promotion performance is in progress. (brightness). Then, it is possible to notify the player that a button effect is being performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Note that although the auto-repeating effect C1 has been described as an example here, the present invention is not limited to the auto-repeating effect and can be applied to other button effects.
<<Additional consideration 6 (Relationship between look-ahead effect and button effect 1 (button effect after power failure recovery))>

Next, we will examine the relationship between the look-ahead effect and the button effect after power recovery. Note that unless there is a particular problem, it is possible to apply the same items as the above-mentioned additional considerations, but the explanation of the similar items will be omitted as appropriate.

In this additional consideration 6, for example, it is assumed that the pre-read effects include at least two types, pre-read effects B and pre-read effects C. Among these, the look-ahead effect B is a type of look-ahead effect, and is, for example, a special background image (for example, "Chance! ” or “Very hot!”) is displayed, indicating that a target change is latent and that the target change is highly expected. It is assumed that it is a performance.

This background look-ahead effect is a look-ahead notice in which the background changes when a hold related to a target change occurs (in the middle of a change where a hold occurs), or at the start of a change after the change where a hold related to a target change occurs. . The background look-ahead performance is a performance that gives a suggestion or a preview regarding the subsequent game state based on the difference in the aspect of the background in the image displayed on the performance display device 60.

The prefetch effect B, which is a type of background prefetch effect, is one in which the jackpot expectation level is relatively high (for example, 80% or more). Such a look-ahead effect B can be called, for example, a ``hot background look-ahead effect'', and is, for example, a look-ahead effect that displays a background image in which the characters ``Very hot!'' are displayed in large letters. . In addition to this, a pending display in the shape of a rainbow-colored star with a jackpot expectation of 100%, which will be described later, may be used as the pre-read effect B.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 39(a), the look-ahead effect C is a type of "display mode including a predetermined character image" related to the above-mentioned hold look-ahead effect, and includes an image (button hold display) that means the operation button 22, as shown in FIG. 39(a). ) 421 (hereinafter referred to as ``button hold effect''). In addition, the hold display for which the hold look-ahead effect is not performed (hold change does not occur) is the basic display format, and its display form is in the shape of a white star (in addition, in the drawing, the hold display is not changed). For the sake of convenience, a black star shape is used to indicate the existence of the display), and the pending display in which pending look-ahead is performed (the pending change) is a display mode different from the basic mode, and the The display format is arranged in order of expectation: blue star shape (jackpot expectation 5%), green star shape (jackpot expectation 15%), red star shape (jackpot expectation 30%), and star with a predetermined pattern. (with a 50% chance of hitting the jackpot) and a rainbow-colored star (with a 100% chance of hitting the jackpot). In addition, it has a "button hold effect" which is a hold display effect that is changed to hold the button hold display. It is suggested that the display changes to a star-shaped reservation display. When the operation button 22 is operated in a situation where this button hold display is displayed, the displayed button hold display changes to a blue star with relatively low expectations for a favorable situation for the player. The system is configured to change into a pending display in the shape of a , or a pending display in the shape of a red star, which indicates a relatively high level of expectation. It should be noted that the expectation level differs depending on which pending display the button pending display changes to, but on average, the jackpot expectation level when the button pending display is displayed is 40%.

Note that this look-ahead effect C is not limited to the one using the button hold display 421; for example, various hold look-ahead effects can be used as long as the expectation level of the jackpot is relatively lower than the above-mentioned "super hot background look-ahead effect". Can apply things. As the look-ahead effect C, a background look-ahead effect that is positioned with a lower level of expectation than the "super hot background look-ahead effect" can be applied. An example of such a background look-ahead effect is a ``chance background look-ahead effect'' which is a background image in which the characters ``Chance!'' are displayed in large size and the jackpot expectation level is 30%.

Furthermore, in addition to this, it is also possible to apply a pre-read effect by stopping combinations of the effect symbols 190 (190a to 190c) as the pre-read effect C. An example of such a look-ahead effect is a so-called "opportunity look-ahead effect." Then, as this "opportunity prediction production", for example, the same symbol is used for combinations of production symbols that do not reach reach (left and middle production symbols 190a, 190b) and middle and right production symbols (190b, 190c). Something that causes a stop (may include a temporary stop) (for example, "223" or "455", etc.), or a combination of production symbols in which all production symbols are the same color (for example, an even number production pattern is blue and an odd number production pattern is blue). If the effect design is red, examples include "246", "351", etc.), and combinations of forward and reverse effect symbols (for example, "123", "654", etc.).

In this additional consideration item 6, a case will be considered in which a look-ahead effect B or a look-ahead effect C such as these is performed in a certain pre-target variation. Since the pre-target variation in this case is a pre-target variation in which a pre-read effect is performed, it can be referred to as a "pre-read target variation" as described above. In this additional consideration item 6, we will consider the rate at which button effects (here, we mean all effects related to the operation buttons 22) are performed in subsequent corresponding changes (target changes).

In addition, in this additional consideration item 6, as shown in FIG. A combination of cases in which a power outage occurs and the power is restored (also referred to as "power restoration") during the period during which the target fluctuation (the fluctuation in question) is performed (until it starts). think.

Then, when the above-mentioned pre-target variation A is a pre-target variation that is two variations before the target variation, a power outage occurs at the pre-target variation A where the look-ahead effect B is being executed, and the power is restored. In this case, the rate at which the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A is the rate at which the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation A where the look-ahead effect B is executed without a power failure occurring in the pre-target variation A. The rate at which the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation B of the next variation is set to be higher than the rate at which the button effect is executed, and when a power outage occurs and the power is restored in the pre-target variation A where the look-ahead effect C is being executed. The rate at which the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A is that the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation A where the look-ahead effect C is executed without a power failure occurring and the next variation of the pre-target variation A The number of settings related to the lottery of button effects is determined so that it is lower than the rate at which button effects are executed in the pre-target variation B. The rate at which the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A, and the rate at which the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation A where the look-ahead effect C is being executed, and when the power is restored after a power outage occurs in the pre-target variation A where the look-ahead effect C is being executed. (Includes that the rate at which the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A is 0%). In addition, if the above-mentioned pre-target variation A is a pre-target variation that is two variations before the target variation, a power outage occurs at the pre-target variation A where look-ahead effect B is being executed, and the power is restored. In this case, when the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A, the rate at which the button image appears with the effect set is as follows: If the button effect in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A is executed without a power outage, the rate at which the button image appears with the effect set is higher than that of the pre-target variation A, and the pre-reading effect is When a power outage occurs in pre-target variation A where C is being executed and the power is restored, when the button effect in pre-target variation B of the next variation of pre-target variation A is executed, it is accompanied by a set of effects. The rate at which the button image appears is when the button effect in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A is executed without power failure occurring in the pre-target variation A where the look-ahead effect C is executed. It is lower than the rate at which button images appear with a set of effects. The rate at which a button image appears with a set of effects when a button effect is executed, and the pre-target variation when a power outage occurs in a pre-target variation A where a look-ahead effect C is executed and the power is restored. (including that the rate at which a button image appears with an effect set is 0% when the button effect in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of A is executed).

Furthermore, if the above-mentioned pre-target variation A is a pre-target variation that is two variations before the target variation, a power outage occurs at the pre-target variation A where the look-ahead effect B is being executed, and the power is restored. In this case, the rate at which the button effect is executed for the target variation is higher than that for the pre-target variation B which is the next variation of the pre-target variation A, and the pre-target variation A for which the look-ahead effect C is executed. The rate at which the button effect is executed in the target variation when a power failure occurs and the power is restored is as follows. The number of settings related to the lottery of button effects may be determined so that the rate at which button effects are executed is lower for target variation than for pre-prediction effect B (pre-target variation where pre-reading effect B is executed The rate at which the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation B when a power failure occurs at A and the power is restored, and the rate at which the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation A when a power failure occurs and the power is restored when the pre-target variation A is executed with the pre-read effect C. (This includes the fact that the rate at which the button effect is executed when the target changes when the target changes after a break is restored is 0%). In other words, in the previous variation display (here, the variation display of the pre-target variation) than the variation display corresponding to the pending memory information (here, the variation display of the target variation), 1 If a power outage occurs and the power is restored while a look-ahead effect (here, look-ahead effect B) is being executed, a change display (pre-target change) that is earlier than a change display corresponding to a certain suspended memory information While the execution rate of the operation performance (button performance) is relatively higher in the fluctuation display corresponding to the certain suspended memory information (fluctuating display of target fluctuation) than in the fluctuation display corresponding to the certain suspended memory information, A second look-ahead effect (here, look-ahead effect C) related to the certain suspended memory information is executed in a change display (change display of pre-target change) that is earlier than the change display corresponding to the change display (change display of target change). If a power outage occurs in a situation where the power is turned off and then the power is restored, the fluctuation display corresponding to the certain suspended storage information (fluctuation display of the pre-target fluctuation) will be higher than the previous fluctuation display. The variation display corresponding to the target variation (variation display of target variation) is configured so that the execution rate of the operation performance is relatively lower. In addition, if the above-mentioned pre-target variation A is a pre-target variation that is two variations before the target variation, a power outage occurs at the pre-target variation A where look-ahead effect B is being executed, and the power is restored. In this case, when the button effect is executed, the button image appears at a higher rate with the effect set in the target variation than in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A, and If a power outage occurs in the pre-target variation A where the look-ahead effect C is executed and the power is restored, the rate at which the button effect is executed in the target variation is the same as the rate at which the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation A where the look-ahead effect C is executed. If a power failure does not occur in The rate at which a button image appears with a set of effects when a button effect is executed in pre-target variation B when a power outage occurs and the power is restored in pre-target variation A where is being executed, and the pre-reading When a power outage occurs in the pre-target variation A where the effect C is being executed and the power is restored, the rate at which a button image appears with a set of effects is 0% when the button effect is executed in the target variation when the power is restored. ). Furthermore, if the above-mentioned pre-target variation A is a pre-target variation that is two variations before the target variation, then the pre-target variation A (or the target of the next variation of the pre-target variation A) where the look-ahead effect B is executed When a power outage occurs in pre-variation B) and the power is restored, the rate at which the button effect is executed in the target variation is the pre-target variation A (or pre-target variation B) where the look-ahead effect B is executed. So that the rate at which the button effect is executed in the target variation is higher than the rate in which the button effect is executed in the case that a power outage does not occur in The rate at which button effects are executed in target variations when a power failure occurs and the power is restored is as follows: The number of settings related to the lottery of button effects may be determined so that the rate at which the button effect is executed in the target change is lower than the rate when the target change does not occur (pre-target variation A where pre-read effect B is executed (or before-target variation B), the rate at which the button effect is executed in the target variation when a power outage does not occur, and the pre-target variation A (or before-target variation B) when the look-ahead effect C is executed. ), the rate at which the button effect is executed in target variation when the power is restored after a power outage occurs is 0%). Further, if the above-mentioned pre-target fluctuation A is a pre-target fluctuation that is 2 fluctuations before the target fluctuation, and if the above-mentioned certain pre-target fluctuation A is a pre-target fluctuation that is 2 fluctuations before the target fluctuation, The button effect in the target variation when a power outage occurs and the power is restored in the pre-target variation A (or the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A) where the look-ahead effect B is being executed is executed. The rate at which a button image appears with a set of effects is the same as the rate at which a button image appears with a set of effects when a power outage does not occur during pre-target variation A (or pre-target variation B) where pre-read effect B is executed. When the button effect is executed, the rate at which the button image appears with the effect set is higher than that of the pre-target variation A (or pre-target variation B) where the look-ahead effect C is executed. When a button effect is executed in the target variation after a power outage occurs and the power is restored, the rate at which a button image appears with a set of effects is the same as the rate at which a button image appears with a set of effects (or the pre-target variation A (or , the rate at which the button image appears with the effect set is lower than the rate at which the button image appears with the effect set when the button effect is executed in the target variation when no power outage occurs in the pre-target variation B) (pre-read effect B) The rate at which a button image appears with a set of effects when a button effect is executed in a target variation when a power outage does not occur in the pre-target variation A (or pre-target variation B), and the pre-reading Button button for target variation when a power outage occurs in pre-target variation A (or pre-target variation B) where production C is being executed and the power is restored (including that the proportion of images appearing is 0%)

Here, FIG. 39(b) exemplifies a situation in which the pre-target fluctuation A is restarted after the power is restored, but the look-ahead effect B (or C) is not restarted. Further, FIG. 39(b) illustrates a situation in which a target variation occurs after a pre-target variation B that follows a pre-target variation A. Further, the button effect appears during the pre-target variation B.

By doing so, it is possible to vary the frequency of occurrence of the button effect after power-off recovery, depending on the type of prefetch effect (for example, prefetch effect B or prefetch effect C). Then, by visually observing the status of the button effects after the power is restored, the player (or the game hall clerk) can infer what the effects were like before the power was cut off (immediately before the power was cut). becomes possible.

Furthermore, as one of the indicators related to game performance, it is possible to generate ``differences in the tendency of button presentation after power recovery depending on the type of lookahead''. As a result, button functions can be further optimized, and new and diverse game features can be created.

Furthermore, it is possible to infer to some extent the difference in the tendency of button effects after the power is restored based on the look-ahead effects before the power is turned off, and this also makes it possible to create new and diverse game experiences. Become.

Note that the sub-main CPU 521 determines that "pre-reading effect B was executed before the power was turned off" based on a command sent again from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 after the power is restored. is possible. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine on the side of the sub-main board 301 that "pre-read effect B was executed before the power was cut off" without backing up the data.

Also, without being limited to this, for example, it is possible to back up the performance data on the sub-main board 301 side when the power is turned off, and when the power is restored, the sub-main CPU 521 checks the backed-up data. It will be done.
<<Additional consideration 7 (Relationship between look-ahead effect and button effect 2 (button effect 1 before target change))>>

Next, we will consider the button presentation before the target changes. Note that unless there is a particular problem, it is possible to apply the same items as the above-mentioned additional considerations, but the explanation of the similar items will be omitted as appropriate.

In this additional consideration item 7, for example, it is assumed that the pre-reading effect includes at least two types, pre-reading effect A and pre-reading effect B. Among these, the prefetch effect A is a type of pending prefetch effect, and here, it is assumed that it is a pending prefetch effect with a relatively low level of expectation among the whole, as shown in blue. Here, as described above, when the basic display mode related to the hold display is white, it may be colored (for example, blue or red) to indicate the expectation level of the next stage or the next stage.

On the other hand, the pre-read effect B is a background pre-read effect, similar to the above-mentioned additional consideration 6. In this case, it is also assumed that the look-ahead effect B is a "super hot background look-ahead effect" in which the expectation level of jackpot is relatively high (for example, 80% or more).

Then, we compared the case where the look-ahead effect A (here, the blue pending look-ahead effect) was performed and the case where the look-ahead effect B (here, the extremely hot background look-ahead effect) was performed. In this case, the button effect (here, a single button effect) is made to occur more easily in the subsequent "pre-target variation" than when the look-ahead effect B is performed. For example, if look-ahead effect A is performed at a pre-target variation A that is a pre-target variation that is two variations before the target variation, then the pre-target variation A is a pre-target variation that is two variations before the target variation. The button performance (here, a single button performance) is made easier to occur in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A than when the look-ahead production B is performed. Furthermore, if look-ahead effect A is performed at a pre-target variation A that is a pre-target variation that is two variations before the target variation, the pre-target variation A that is a pre-target variation that is two variations before the target variation. A button image appears with a set of effects when a button effect (in this case, a single button effect) occurs in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A than when the look-ahead effect B is performed. It may be possible to make it easier to do so. Regarding these, if look-ahead effect B is performed at pre-target variation A, which is a pre-target variation that is 2 variations before the target variation, the button will be pressed at pre-target variation B, which is the next variation of pre-target variation A. If the effect (in this case, a single button effect) does not occur, or if the look-ahead effect B is performed at the pre-target variation A, which is the pre-target variation 2 variations before the target variation, the next variation of the pre-target variation A This includes that when a button effect (in this case, a single button effect) occurs in the pre-target variation B, a button image does not appear with an effect set.

On the other hand, when look-ahead effect B is performed, the above-mentioned button effect (here, single-shot button effect) is more likely to occur in subsequent "target fluctuations" than when look-ahead effect A is performed. do. For example, if look-ahead effect A is performed at a pre-target variation A that is a pre-target variation that is two variations before the target variation, then the pre-target variation A is a pre-target variation that is two variations before the target variation. To make it easier for a button performance (here, a single button performance) to occur in target fluctuations of successive fluctuations of the pre-target fluctuation A than when a look-ahead performance B is performed. Furthermore, if look-ahead effect A is performed at a pre-target variation A that is a pre-target variation that is two variations before the target variation, the pre-target variation A that is a pre-target variation that is two variations before the target variation. When a button effect (in this case, a single button effect) occurs in a target variation of successive variations of the pre-target variation A, a button image with a set of effects is more likely to appear than when a look-ahead effect B is performed. You may do so. Regarding these, when look-ahead effect B is performed at pre-target variation A, which is a pre-target variation that is two variations before the target variation, button production ( Here, if a single button effect) does not occur, or if a look-ahead effect B is performed at a pre-target variation A which is a pre-target variation two variations before the target variation, the target variation of the pre-target variation A one after another may occur. This also includes the case where a button image does not appear with a set of effects when a button effect (in this case, a single button effect) occurs due to variation.

By doing this, depending on the type of look-ahead, whether the button effect (in this case, a single button effect) is more likely to be executed with "pre-target variation" or with "target variation" can be determined. This will result in a difference. Then, as one of the indicators related to game performance, it becomes possible to generate "differences in the tendency of button effects depending on the type of look-ahead." As a result, the button functions can be further optimized, and it is also possible to create new and diverse game features.

Note that the above-mentioned "difference in tendency of button effects" refers to a difference in tendency such as button effects are more likely to be performed when there is a change before the target, or button effects are more likely to be performed when the target is changed. Moreover, the "difference in the tendency of button effects" referred to here can also be expressed as "difference in the probability of occurrence related to button effects." More specifically, the following examples can be given regarding this "difference in occurrence probability related to button effects".

For example, in the target change for look-ahead effect A before target change (here, the blue pending look-ahead effect), the button effect before reach (here, the single button effect) occurs at a rate of 30%, and the button effect after reach ( Here, it is assumed that the automatic repeated button press effect) occurs at a rate of 5% (pattern 1 related to "difference in probability of occurrence related to button effects"). Further, a button image with a set of effects is more likely to appear in a post-reach button presentation than in a pre-reach button presentation. Note that before the reach is the timing before the SP reach effect develops, and after the reach may be the timing during the SP reach effect (second half of the SP reach effect). This also applies to the following.

On the other hand, in the target change for look-ahead effect B before the target change (here, the hot background look-ahead effect), the button effect before reach (here, the single-shot button effect) occurs at a rate of 40%, and the button effect after reach occurs at a rate of 40%. It is assumed that the effect (in this case, automatic button effect) occurs at 50% of the time (pattern 1 related to "difference in probability of occurrence related to button effect"). Further, a button image with a set of effects is more likely to appear in a post-reach button presentation than in a pre-reach button presentation.

In this way, the occurrence rate (execution rate, 30% and 5%) of button effects before reaching and after reaching with target variation related to look-ahead effect A, and before and after reaching with target change related to look-ahead effect B. It is possible to provide a difference (difference in the probability of occurrence) between the occurrence rate (execution rate, 40% and 50%) of button effects.

Here, for example, let us assume that the occurrence ratios of button performances before reaching and after reaching in target variation related to look-ahead effect A are 30% and 5%, and button effects before reaching and after reaching in target variation related to look-ahead effect B. It is also possible to set the occurrence rate of 30% and 50%.
<<Additional consideration 8 (Relationship between look-ahead effect and button effect 3 (button effect 1 with target variation))>>

Next, we will consider button effects when the target changes. Note that unless there is a particular problem, it is possible to apply the same items as the above-mentioned additional considerations, but the explanation of the similar items will be omitted as appropriate.

In this additional consideration item 8, for example, it is assumed that the pre-reading effect includes at least the pre-reading effect B (here, the extremely hot background pre-reading effect). Then, the "target variation" is made to be more likely to produce a button effect than the "pre-read target variation". This includes the fact that the button effect does not occur in the "pre-read target pre-variation". Furthermore, the type of button performance is at least one of an automatic repeated press performance and a single button performance.

In addition, as indicators related to game playability, ``difference in the probability of occurrence of auto-repeat effects when comparing pre-read target fluctuations and target fluctuations'' and ``single-shot button when comparing pre-read target fluctuations and target fluctuations'' Consider the difference in the probability of production. Both of these mean the difference in the probability of occurrence of a button performance when comparing the pre-read target variation and the target variation. In the former case, the button effect is an "auto continuous press effect", and in the latter case, the button effect is a "single button effect". Note that the probability of occurrence is set between 0% and 100%.

And, as additional consideration 8, we will compare the "difference in the probability of occurrence of auto-repeating effects" and the "difference in the probability of occurrence of single-shot button effects" when comparing "pre-reading target fluctuations and target fluctuations". make them different from each other.

In other words, as additional consideration 8, the difference (B1 - A1 ) and the difference (B2-A2), which is the difference between "probability A2 of occurrence of a single-shot button effect in a pre-read target variation" and "probability B2 of occurrence of a single-shot button effect in a target variation" are made to be different from each other.

By doing this, the frequency of occurrence of button effects (in this case, automatic repeated press effects and single-shot button effects) depends on whether pre-reading is in progress (depending on the difference between pre-reading target fluctuations and target fluctuations). (probability of occurrence) and the tendency of button effects to occur can be varied. Then, it is possible to improve the diversity of combinations of whether or not to display effects related to button effects and display modes. As a result, the button functions can be further optimized, and it is also possible to create new and diverse game features.

Here, the above-mentioned "tendency of button effects that occur" refers to the tendency shown by automatic repeated press effects or the tendency shown by single button effects. For example, whether the button effect that occurs is automatic continuous press effects or single button effects Whether it is a button effect or what kind of effect is generated by pressing the button when the button effect occurs is also included in the "trend of button effects that occur."

Please note that the special pattern fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation is 4 include those with a shorter fluctuation time compared to the specific special symbol fluctuation pattern at time reduction. As mentioned above (such as paragraph 0168 of this specification). In this way, it is common practice to allow the fluctuation time to vary depending on the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation.

When the number of pending items at the start of the fluctuation is relatively large (for example, 4 or 3), the fluctuation time is longer than when it is relatively small (for example, 2 or 1). Control is generally performed to determine the fluctuation pattern so that the time period is shortened. The description of each invention of the present application also assumes that such control is employed.

Further, as other embodiments related to this additional consideration item 8, the following can be considered. For example, since the fluctuation time can change depending on the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation time also varies (can change) in the pre-target fluctuation depending on the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation. In order to optimize this, control is performed to give priority to the execution of the single-shot button performance over the automatic repeated-hit performance, and the execution ratio of the single-shot button performance is made higher (larger, more) than the automatic repeated-hit performance. However, in target variation, since the variation time does not vary depending on the number of holds at the start of variation, the execution rate of the automatic repeated hit performance or single button performance does not change even if the number of holds at the start of variation differs.

Alternatively, only when the number of pending changes at the start of the fluctuation is relatively small (for example, 2 or 1), the automatic continuous hit effect is executed. Then, when the number of reservations at the start of the fluctuation is relatively large (for example, 4 or 3), the execution rate of the automatic continuous hit effect is set to 0% (or less than 5%, etc.). However, in target variation, since the variation time does not vary depending on the number of holds at the start of variation, the execution rate of the automatic repeated hit performance or single button performance does not change even if the number of holds at the start of variation differs.

By doing so, the button function can be further optimized in response to the fluctuation time varying depending on the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation. In addition, it becomes possible to create new and diverse game features.
<<Additional consideration 9 (Relationship between look-ahead effect and button effect 4 (button effect 2 before target change))>>

Next, in connection with the above-mentioned additional consideration item 7, another example related to the button presentation before the target change will be considered. Note that unless there is a particular problem, it is possible to apply the same items as the above-mentioned additional considerations, but the explanation of the similar items will be omitted as appropriate.

In this additional consideration 9, for example, it is assumed that the pre-read effects include at least two types, pre-read effects A and pre-read effects B. Among these, the prefetch effect A is a type of pending prefetch effect, and here, it is assumed that it is a pending prefetch effect with a relatively low level of expectation among the whole, as shown in blue. Here, as described above, when the basic display mode related to the hold display is white, it may be colored (for example, blue or red) to indicate the expectation level of the next stage or the next stage.

On the other hand, the pre-read effect B is a background pre-read effect, similar to the above-mentioned additional consideration 6. In this case, it is also assumed that the look-ahead effect B is a "super hot background look-ahead effect" in which the expectation level of jackpot is relatively high (for example, 80% or more).

Then, we compared the case where the look-ahead effect A (here, the blue pending look-ahead effect) was performed and the case where the look-ahead effect B (here, the extremely hot background look-ahead effect) was performed. In this case, the button effect (here, the front button effect) is made to occur more easily in the subsequent "pre-target variation" than when the look-ahead effect B is performed. Here, the "front button effect" is a button effect accompanied by a guide display such as a button image, as described above. In addition, when look-ahead effect A is performed, the button image is more likely to appear with a set of effects than when look-ahead effect B is performed when a button effect occurs in the subsequent "pre-target fluctuation". (Includes that when the look-ahead effect B is performed and the button effect occurs in the subsequent "pre-target variation", the button image does not appear with the effect set).

On the other hand, when look-ahead effect B is performed, the above-mentioned button effect (here, back button effect) is more likely to occur during subsequent "target fluctuation" than when look-ahead effect A is performed. do. Here, the "back button effect" is a button effect that does not display a guide such as a button image or restricts the guide display, as described above. Furthermore, when the look-ahead effect B is performed, the button image is more likely to appear with an effect set when a button effect occurs in "target variation" after that than when the look-ahead effect A is performed.

By doing this, depending on the type of lookahead, the button effect (here, front button effect or back button effect) will be more likely to be executed with "pre-target variation" or will be executed with "target variation". The difference is whether it becomes easier or not. Then, as one of the indicators related to game performance, it becomes possible to generate "differences in the tendency of button effects depending on the type of look-ahead." Furthermore, it is possible to create a game in which the degree of expectation for the back button effect to occur varies depending on the type of look-ahead. As a result, the button functions can be further optimized, and it is also possible to create new and diverse game features.

Note that the above-mentioned "difference in tendency of button effects" refers to a difference in tendency such as button effects are more likely to be performed when there is a change before the target, or button effects are more likely to be performed when the target is changed. Moreover, the "difference in the tendency of button effects" referred to here can also be expressed as "difference in the probability of occurrence related to button effects." More specifically, the following examples can be given regarding this "difference in occurrence probability related to button effects".

For example, in the target change for look-ahead effect A before the target change (here, the blue pending look-ahead effect), the button effect before reach (here, the front button effect) occurs at a rate of 30%, and the button effect after reach ( Here, it is assumed that the back button effect) occurs at a rate of 5% (pattern 1 related to "difference in probability of occurrence related to button effects"). Further, a button image with a set of effects is more likely to appear in a post-reach button presentation than in a pre-reach button presentation.

On the other hand, in the target change for look-ahead effect B before the target change (here, the hot background look-ahead effect), the button effect before reach (here, the front button effect) occurs at a rate of 40%, and the button effect after reach occurs at a rate of 40%. It is assumed that the effect (here, the back button effect) occurs 50% of the time (pattern 1 related to "difference in occurrence probability related to button effects"). Further, a button image with a set of effects is more likely to appear in a post-reach button presentation than in a pre-reach button presentation.

In this way, the occurrence rate (execution rate, 30% and 5%) of button effects before reaching and after reaching with target variation related to look-ahead effect A, and before and after reaching with target change related to look-ahead effect B. It is possible to provide a difference (difference in the probability of occurrence) between the occurrence rate (execution rate, 40% and 50%) of button effects.

Here, for example, let us assume that the occurrence ratios of button performances before reaching and after reaching in target variation related to look-ahead effect A are 30% and 5%, and button effects before reaching and after reaching in target variation related to look-ahead effect B. It is also possible to set the occurrence rate of 30% and 50%.
<<Additional consideration 10 (Relationship between look-ahead effect and button effect 5 (Button effect 2 with target variation))>>

Next, in connection with the above-mentioned additional consideration item 8, other examples related to button effects with target variation will be considered. Note that unless there is a particular problem, it is possible to apply the same items as the above-mentioned additional considerations, but the explanation of the similar items will be omitted as appropriate.

In this additional consideration 10, for example, it is assumed that the pre-read effects include at least the pre-read effect B (here, the extremely hot background pre-read effect). Then, the "target variation" is made to be more likely to produce a button effect than the "pre-read target variation". Further, it is assumed that the types of button effects are a back button effect and a front button effect. In addition, in "target variation", when a button effect occurs, a button image is more likely to appear with a set of effects than in "pre-reading target variation" (when a button effect occurs in "pre-reading target variation") (including that the button image does not appear with the effect set).

In addition, as indicators related to game playability, ``difference in the probability of occurrence of auto-repeat effects when comparing pre-read target fluctuations and target fluctuations'' and ``single-shot button when comparing pre-read target fluctuations and target fluctuations'' Consider the difference in the probability of production. Both of these mean the difference in the probability of occurrence of a button performance when comparing the pre-read target variation and the target variation. In the former case, the button effect is a "back button effect", and in the latter case, the button effect is a "back button effect".

And, as this additional consideration 10, we will calculate the difference in the probability of occurrence of the back button effect and the difference in the probability of occurrence of the front button effect in the case of comparing the change before the look-ahead target and the target change. make them different from each other.

In other words, as additional consideration 10, the difference (D1-C1) is the difference between "probability C1 of occurrence of back button effect in front of look-ahead target variation" and "probability D1 of occurrence of back button effect in target variation". ) and the difference (D2-C2), which is the difference between "probability C2 of occurrence of single-shot button performance in pre-reading target fluctuation" and "probability D2 of occurrence of single-shot button performance in fluctuation of target", are made different from each other.

By doing this, the frequency of occurrence of button effects (in this case, back button effects and front button effects) depends on whether or not pre-reading is in progress (depending on whether the pre-read target is changing or the target is changing). (probability of occurrence) and the tendency of button effects to occur can be varied. Then, it is possible to improve the diversity of combinations of whether or not to display effects related to button effects and display modes. As a result, the button functions can be further optimized, and it is also possible to create new and diverse game features.

Here, the above-mentioned "tendency of button effects that occur" refers to the tendency shown by the back button effect and the tendency shown by the front button effect.

Please note that the special pattern fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation is 4 include those with a shorter fluctuation time compared to the specific special symbol fluctuation pattern at time reduction. As mentioned above (such as paragraph 0168 of this specification). In this way, it is common practice to allow the fluctuation time to vary depending on the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation.

When the number of pending items at the start of the fluctuation is relatively large (for example, 4 or 3), the fluctuation time is longer than when it is relatively small (for example, 2 or 1). Control is generally performed to determine the fluctuation pattern so that the time period is shortened. The description of each invention of the present application also assumes that such control is adopted.

The following can be considered as other embodiments related to this additional consideration item 10. For example, since the fluctuation time can change depending on the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation time also varies (can change) in the pre-target fluctuation depending on the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation. In order to optimize this, control is performed to give priority to the front button performance over the back button performance, and the execution ratio of the front button performance is made higher (larger, more) than the back button performance. However, in target variation, since the variation time does not change depending on the number of holds at the start of variation, the execution ratio of back button effects and front button effects does not change even if the number of holds at the start of variation differs.

Alternatively, the back button effect is executed only when the number of pending items at the start of variation is relatively small (for example, in the case of 2 items or 1 item). Then, when the number of reservations at the start of variation is relatively large (for example, 4 or 3), the execution rate of the back button effect is set to 0% (or less than 5%, etc.). However, in target variation, since the variation time does not change depending on the number of holds at the start of variation, the execution ratio of back button effects and front button effects does not change even if the number of holds at the start of variation differs.

By doing this, the button function can be further optimized in response to the fluctuation time varying depending on the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation. In addition, it becomes possible to create new and diverse game features.

10 pachinko game machine, 20 firing handle, 50 game board, 52 game area,
53 main control display device, 62 first starting winning hole, 63 second starting winning hole,
70 first special symbol display section, 71 second special symbol display section, 90 grand prize winning device,
102 main board, 104 sub board, 113 first validity determining means,
117 second validity determining means, 120 special game control means, 301 sub-main board,
302 sub-sub board, 501 CPU of main board, 521 CPU of sub-main board,
401 button image, 402 indicator image, 404 bright image.

Claims (1)

When a game is played using game media, symbols can be displayed in a variable manner as a performance related to the game, and then can be stopped and displayed, and if the stopped and displayed symbols are in a predetermined display mode, a profit is given to the player. A gaming machine that performs special games that are possible,
a main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a sub-control means that is communicatively connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information transmitted from the main control means;
Effect display output means for outputting an effect display under the control of the sub-control means;
Effect sound output means for outputting effect sound under the control of the sub-control means;
a first operating means operable by the player;
a second operating means that can be operated by a player and is different from the first operating means;
Equipped with
It is possible to execute an operation performance that can cause a performance display to be executed in response to a player's operation of the first operation means,
The types of operation performances include a single operation performance that can accept a player's operation of the first operation means a single time, and a continuous hit operation performance that can accept a plurality of player operations of the first operation means,
It is possible to perform a promotion effect for encouraging the player to operate the first operation means,
When the player operates the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hit operation performance, it is possible to execute a performance display according to the player's operation of the first operating means a plurality of times,
Even if the player does not operate the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hit operation presentation, if the player operates the first operating means a single time continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, the player may operate the first operating means multiple times. It is assumed that a player's operation of said first operating means has been performed, and an effect display is executed in response to a single player's operation of said first operating means being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more. It is possible and
The volume level of the performance sound can be adjusted in response to a player's operation of the second operation means,
When adjusting the volume level of the performance sound , it is possible to display the volume level so that the player can understand the current volume level of the performance sound ,
In the continuous hit operation performance, when a single player operation of the first operating means is performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, it is deemed that the player has operated the first operating means multiple times. , in a situation where an effect display is being executed in response to a single player's operation of the first operating means being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, the player's operation of the second operating means is triggered. The volume level of the performance sound can be adjusted, and the volume level display is displayed in parallel with the performance display in response to a single player operation of the first operating means being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more. is feasible and
While the volume level display is being executed, an effect display is executed in response to a single player operation of the first operation means being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, so that both displays can be executed at the same time. can be,
By executing the volume level display during execution of the effect display in response to a single player operation of the first operation means being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more, both displays can be executed at the same time. can be,
The volume level display has a higher display priority than the effect display in response to a single player operation of the first operation means being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more,
The volume level display switches from non-execution to execution when the second operation means is operated by the player during the variable display of the symbols;
If a specific period of time has elapsed after the execution of the volume level display started during symbol fluctuation, the volume level display will not be executed. However, if the player operates the second operating means before the specific time elapses, the The specific time is set again,
The specific time is the first operation that is set in the predetermined continuous-hit operation performance capable of executing a performance display in response to a single player operation of the first operation means being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more. shorter than the operational validity period of the means;
In a situation where the volume level display is being performed, even if the player continues to operate the second operation means a single time, the volume level will only change by one level;
If the player has continuously operated the second operating means a single time since before the power was turned on, the state of the signal indicating the player's operation of the second operating means continues after the power is turned on. The volume will not change depending on the situation,
Even if an effect display is executed in response to a single player operation of the first operating means being performed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more in a situation where the volume level display is executed first, the volume level The display can be executed continuously without ending.
A predetermined standby effect can be executed in a game standby state after the symbol fluctuation has stopped, and even while the predetermined standby effect is being executed, the volume level display and the volume can be executed by operating the second operating means. While the level can be adjusted, the predetermined standby effect does not end even if the operation is performed, and the volume level display has a higher display priority than the predetermined standby effect,
It has a starting winning hole into which game media can enter, and is configured to be able to display symbols in a variable manner when the gaming medium enters the starting winning hole,
The states related to the ease of entering the ball into the starting winning hole include a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ease of entering the ball into the starting winning hole is higher than the normal gaming state,
During the specific game state, it is possible to execute a firing instruction performance that instructs firing of the game medium in a predetermined direction;
During the specific game state, the predetermined standby performance and the firing instruction performance can be executed simultaneously, but the firing instruction performance has a higher display priority than the predetermined standby performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images